OWNER’S MANUAL - SEAT · OWNER’S MANUAL Leon 5F0012720BG Inglés 5F0012720BG (11.16) Leon...

SEAT recommendsSEAT GENUINE OIL

SEAT recommendsCastrol EDGE Professional

OWNER’S MANUAL

Leon

5F0012720BG

Ingl

és 5

F001

2720

BG

(11

.16)

Leon

In

glés

(11

.16)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16

About this manual

This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the vehicle at the time this manual was published. Some of the units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer-tain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the LEON range, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not in-cluded in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the mar-ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The steering indications (left, right, forward, reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-cept when otherwise indicated.

The audiovisual material only is intended to help users to understand certain car function-alities better. It does not replace the instruc-tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-al to obtain more comprehensive information and indications.

The equipment marked with an aster-isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op-tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries.

® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Although the copyright symbol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

>> The section is continued on the follow-ing page.

Important warnings on a given page

Detailed contents on a given page

General information on a given page

Emergency information on a given page

Audiovisual material on a given page

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-mation on safety. They warn you about possi-ble dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION

Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-vant information concerning environmental protection.

Note

Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-nal information.

This manual is divided into six large parts, which are:

1. The essentials

2. Safety

3. Emergencies

4. Operation

5. Tips

6. Technical data

At the end of this manual, there is a detailed alphabetical index that will help you quickly find the information you require.

ForewordThis Instruction Manual and its correspond-ing supplements should be read carefully tofamiliarise yourself with your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance ofthe vehicle, its correct handling will help pre-serve its value.

For safety reasons, always note the informa-tion concerning accessories, modificationsand part replacements.

If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-boarddocumentation to the new owner, as itshould be kept with the vehicle.

You can access the information in this man-ual using:

● Thematic table of contents that follows themanual’s general chapter structure.

● Visual table of contents that uses graphicsto indicate the pages containing “essential”information, which is detailed in the corre-sponding chapters.

● Alphabetical index with many terms andsynonyms to help you find information.

WARNING

Read and always observe safety informa-tion concerning the passenger's front air-bag ››› page 83, Important informationregarding the front passenger's airbag. »

Related videos

Lane Assist ››› page 213

Start-Stop ››› page 191

Storing objects ››› page 151

Light Assist ››› page 132

Fatigue detection ››› page 224

Front Assist ››› page 207

Interior lights ››› page 138

DSG automatic gearbox ››› page 180

SEAT Drive Profile ››› page 219

Active cylinder management(ACT®)

››› page 188

Dynamic chassis control DCC ››› page 219

Adaptive cruise control ACC ››› page 196

Driving style CUPRA ››› page 220

All-wheel drive ››› page 254

CNG natural gas ››› page 260

Table of Contents

Table of ContentsThe essentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Interior view (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 55Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 60How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Correct position for passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Why wear a seat belt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71How to properly adjust your seatbelt . . . . . . . . 74Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Airbag safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Vehicle tool kit anti-puncture kit* . . . . . . . . . . . 85Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Manual unlocking/locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 87Towing and tow-starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 88Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Change the front bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Changing incandescent rear light bulbs . . . . . . 97

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . 104Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Introduction to the Easy Connect system* . . . . 110System settings (CAR)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Communications and multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . 111Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Rear lid (luggage compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Panoramic sliding sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Windscreen wiper and window wiper sys-tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Adjusting the seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . 143Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . 148Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear-box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Engine management and exhaust gas purifica-tion system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Start-Stop system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Auto Hold Function* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Adaptive Cruise Control ACC* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

5

Table of Contents

Front Assist system including City emergencybraking and pedestrian monitoring* . . . . . . . . 207Lane Assist system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217SEAT Drive Profile* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Fatigue detection (break recommendation)* . . 224Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”* . . . . . . . . . . . 231Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Accessories and modifications to the vehi-cle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Vehicle exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Caring for the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Progressive steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Important . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 282Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

6

The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 602 ››› page 503 ››› page 10

4 ››› page 125 ››› page 556 ››› page 13

7 ››› page 118 ››› page 50

7

The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 512 ››› page 503 ››› page 52

4 ››› page 545 ››› page 506 ››› page 52

7 ››› page 528 ››› page 1579 ››› page 57

10 ››› page 5611 ››› page 154

8

The essentials

Interior view (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 132 ››› page 103 ››› page 244 ››› page 25





9

The essentials

How it works

Unlocking and locking

Doors

Fig. 1 Remote control key: buttons.

Fig. 2 Driver door: central locking switch.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle using thekey

● Locking: press the ››› Fig. 1 button.

● Locking the vehicle without activating theanti-theft system: Press the ››› Fig. 1 buttonfor a second time within 2 seconds.

● Unlocking: press the ››› Fig. 1 button.

● Unlocking the rear lid: Hold down the ››› Fig. 1 button for at least 1 second.

Locking and unlocking with the central lock-ing switch

● Locking: press the ››› Fig. 2 button. Noneof the doors can be opened from the outside.The doors can be opened from the inside bypulling the inside door handle.

● Unlocking: press the ››› Fig. 2 button.

››› in Description on page 116

››› page 116

››› page 10, ››› page 11

Unlocking and locking the driver'sdoor

Fig. 3 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.

If the central locking system should fail to op-erate, the driver door can still be locked andunlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door islocked manually all other doors are locked.When it is unlocked manually, only the driverdoor opens. Please observe the instructionsrelating to the anti-theft alarm system››› page 116.

● Unfold the vehicle key blade››› page 117.

● Insert the key blade into the lower openingin the cover on the driver door handle››› Fig. 3 (arrow) then remove the cover up-wards.

● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinderto unlock or lock the vehicle.

10

The essentials

Special Characteristics

● The anti-theft alarm will remain active whenvehicles are unlocked. However, the alarmwill not be triggered ››› page 116.

● After the driver door is opened, you have15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Oncethis time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.

● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im-mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key anddeactivates the anti-theft alarm system.

Note

The anti-theft alarm is not activated when thevehicle is locked manually using the keyshaft ››› page 116.

Manual locking of the doors with nolock cylinder

Fig. 4 Locking the door manually.

If the central locking system should fail towork at any time, doors with no lock cylinderwill have to be locked separately.

A mechanical locking device (only visiblewhen the door is open) is provided on thefront passenger door.

● Pull the cap out of the opening.

● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn itto the right as far as it will go (if the door ison the right side) or to the left (if the door ison the left side).

Once the door has been closed it can no lon-ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte-rior door handle once to unlock and open thedoor.

Rear lid

Fig. 5 Rear lid: opening from the outside.

The rear lid opening system operates electri-cally. It is activated by using the handle onthe boot lid.

To lock/unlock, press the button or button ››› Fig. 1 on the remote control key.

A warning appears on the instrument paneldisplay if the rear lid is open or not properlyclosed.* An audible warning is also given if itis opened while the vehicle is moving fasterthan 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

Opening and closing

● Opening the rear lid: Pull on the releaselever and lift it up ››› Fig. 5. The rear lid opensautomatically.

● Closing the rear lid: Hold it by one of thehandles on the interior lining and close it bypushing gently.

››› in Tailgate automatic lock onpage 126

››› page 126

››› page 12, ››› page 12

11

The essentials

Manual release of the rear lid3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC

Fig. 6 Luggage compartment: access to man-ual release.

The rear lid can be unlocked manually frominside in the event of an emergency.

● Insert the key in the opening in the liningof the tail gate 1 and move the key in the di-rection of the arrow until the lock is released.

Manual release of the rear lid3 Applies to the model: LEON ST

Fig. 7 Luggage compartment: access to man-ual release.

The rear lid can be unlocked manually frominside in the event of an emergency.

● Remove the cover by inserting a screwdriv-er in groove ››› Fig. 7 A.

● Insert the key into the opening and turn itin the direction of the arrow until the latch››› Fig. 7 B has been released.

Bonnet

Fig. 8 Release lever in the driver's footwellarea.

Fig. 9 Cam under the bonnet

● Opening the bonnet: Pull the lever underthe dashboard ››› Fig. 8 1 .

● Lift up the bonnet. Press the release catchunder the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 9 2 . Thearrester hook under the bonnet is released.

12

The essentials

● The bonnet can be opened. Release thebonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-signed for this in the bonnet.

››› in Work in the engine compartmenton page 262

››› page 262

Electric windows*

Fig. 10 Detail of the driver door: controls forthe windows.

● Opening the window: Press the button.

● Closing the window: Pull the button.

Buttons on the driver door

Window on the front left door

Window on the front right door

Window on the rear left door (only 5-doorvehicles)

Window on the right rear door (only 5-door vehicles)

Safety switch for deactivating the electricwindow buttons on the rear doors (only 5-door vehicles)

››› in Opening and closing of the elec-tric windows* on page 127

››› page 127

Panoramic roof*

Fig. 11 On the interior roof lining: use the ro-tary button for opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

Fig. 12 On the interior roof lining: press thebutton and pull on it to raise and lower thesunroof.

● Opening: Turn the switch to position››› Fig. 11 3 .

● Convenience position: Turn the switch toposition ››› Fig. 11 2 .

● Closing: Turn the switch to position››› Fig. 11 1 .

● To tilt open: Push the switch to position››› Fig. 12 4 . For an intermediate position,hold down the switch until you reach the de-sired position.

● Lowering: Pull the switch to position››› Fig. 12 5 . For an intermediate position,hold down the switch until you reach the de-sired position. »

13

The essentials

››› in Opening or closing the panoramicsliding sunroof on page 129

››› page 129

Before driving

Manually adjusting the front seats

Fig. 13 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.

Forward/back: pull the lever and movethe seat forwards or backwards.

Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever.

1

2

Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.

Lumbar support: Press the button in thecorresponding position.

Folding down the backrest (only 3-doorvehicles): pull the lever and push thebackrest forward.

››› in Manual adjustment of seats onpage 143

Electric adjustment of the driver'sseat*

Fig. 14 Driver's seat: electric seat adjust-ment.

Adjusting the lumbar support: press thebutton according to the desired position.

Seat up/down: Press the buttonup/down. To adjust the front of the seatcushion, press the front of the buttonup/down. To adjust the rear of the seat

3

4

5

A

B

cushion, press the rear of the buttonup/down.

Seat forwards/backwards: press the but-ton forwards/backwards.

Backrest further upright/further reclined:press the button forwards/backwards.

››› in Electric driver's seat adjustment*on page 143

Adjusting the head restraints

Fig. 15 Front seat: adjustment of the head re-straint.

● Grab the sides of the head restraints withboth hands and push upwards to the desiredposition. To lower it, repeat the same action,pressing the 1 button on the side.

C

14

The essentials

››› in Correct adjustment of front headrestraints on page 69

››› page 69, ››› page 144

Adjustment of the seat belt

Fig. 16 Positioning and removing the seatbelt buckle.

Fig. 17 Correct seat belt and head restraintpositions, viewed from front and the side.

To adjust the seat belt around your should-ers, adjust the height of the seats.

The shoulder part of the seat belt should bewell centred over it, never over the neck. Theseat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on theupper part of the body.

The lap part of the seat belt lies across thepelvis, never across the stomach. The seatbelt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel-vis.

››› page 72

››› page 74

Seat belt tensioners

During a collision, the seat belts on the frontseats are retracted automatically.

The tensioner can be triggered only once.

››› in Service and disposal of belt ten-sioners on page 76

››› page 75

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 18 Detail of the driver door: control forthe exterior mirror.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knobto the corresponding position:

Turning the knob to the desired posi-tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver »

L/R

15

The essentials

side (L, left) and the passenger side (R,right) to the direction desired.

Depending on the equipment fitted onthe vehicle, the mirrors may be heatedaccording to the outside temperature.

Folding in mirrors.

››› in Adjusting the exterior rear viewmirrors on page 142

››› page 142

Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 19 Lever in the lower left side of thesteering column.

● Adjusting the position of the steeringwheel: Pull the ››› Fig. 19 1 lever down,move the steering wheel to the desired posi-tion and lift the lever back up until it locks.

››› in Adjusting the steering wheel po-sition on page 67

Airbags

Front airbags

Fig. 20 Driver airbag located in steeringwheel.

Fig. 21 Front passenger airbag located indash panel.

The front airbag for the driver is located inthe steering wheel ››› Fig. 20 and the airbagfor the front passenger is located in the dashpanel ››› Fig. 21. Airbags are identified by theword “AIRBAG”.

When the driver and front passenger airbagsare deployed, the covers remain attached tothe steering wheel and dashboard, respec-tively ››› Fig. 20 ››› Fig. 21.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the frontairbag system gives the front occupants ad-ditional protection for the head and chest in

16

The essentials

the event of a severe frontal collision ››› inFront airbags on page 78.

Their special design allows the controlled es-cape of the propellant gas when an occupantputs pressure on the bag. Thus, the head andchest are protected by the airbag. After thecollision, the airbag deflates sufficiently toallow visibility.

››› page 78

Deactivating the front passenger frontairbag

Fig. 22 Front passenger front airbag switch.

To deactivate the front passenger front air-bag:

● Open the glove compartment on the frontpassenger side.

● Insert the key blade into the slot providedin the deactivation switch.

● Approximately ¾ of the length of the keyblade remains inserted (the maximum).

● Turn the key blade, changing its position to. Do not force it. If you have difficulty, en-sure that you have inserted the key as far asit will go.

● Finally, check the control lamp on the in-strument panel where it shows the following should appear .

››› in Front passenger front airbagswitch on page 82

››› page 81

Knee airbag*

Fig. 23 On the driver side: location of theknee airbag

Fig. 24 On the driver side: radius of action ofthe knee airbag.

The knee airbag is located on the driver sidebelow the dash panel ››› Fig. 23. Airbags areidentified by the word “AIRBAG”.

The area framed in red (deployment area)››› Fig. 24 is covered by the knee airbag whenit is deployed. Objects should never beplaced or mounted in this area.

››› page 78

17

The essentials

Side airbags*

Fig. 25 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 26 Illustration of completely inflated sideairbags on the left side of the vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the backrestcushions of the driver seat ››› Fig. 25 and thefront passenger seat as well as in the back-rest of the side rear seats*. The locations areidentified by the text “AIRBAG” in the upperregion of the backrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the sideairbag system provides additional protectionfor the upper body in the event of a severeside collision ››› in Side airbags* onpage 78.

In a side collision, the side airbags reducethe risk of injury to passengers to the areasof the body facing the impact. In addition totheir normal function of protecting the occu-pants in a collision, the front and rear outerseat belts also hold the passengers in theevent of a side collision; this is how these air-bags provide maximum protection.

››› page 78

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 27 Location of head-protection airbags.

The head-protection airbags are located onboth sides in the interior above the doors››› Fig. 27 and are identified with the text“AIRBAG”.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-protection airbag system gives the vehicleoccupants additional protection for the headand upper body in the event of a severe sidecollision ››› in Curtain airbags* onpage 79.

››› in Curtain airbags* on page 79

18

The essentials

Child seats

Important information regarding thefront passenger's airbag

Fig. 28 Airbag stickers - version 1: on thefront passenger's sun visor and on the rearframe of the front passenger's door .

Fig. 29 Airbag stickers - version 2: on thefront passenger's sun visor and on the rearframe of the front passenger's door .

A sticker with important information aboutthe passenger airbag is located on the pas-senger's sun visor and/or on the passengerside door frame.

››› in Important information regardingthe front passenger's airbag on page 83

››› page 82

19

The essentials

Securing child seats with the seat belt

Fig. 30 On the rear seats: Possible installationsfor the child seat.

Figure ››› Fig. 30 A shows the basic child re-straint system mounting using lower retain-ing rings and the upper retaining strap. Fig-ure ››› Fig. 30 B shows the child restraintsystem mounting using the vehicle seat belt.

The seat belt may be used to secure univer-sal type child seats to the vehicle seatsmarked with a U in the table below.

If the front passenger seat lacks a height ad-justment, child seats cannot be mounted isthis location1).

To correctly use a child seat in the back, thefront backrest must be adjusted so that there

is no contact with the child seat in the backin the case that it goes opposite to the direc-tion of the car. In the case of front facing re-straint systems, the front backrest must beadjusted so that there is no contact with thechild's feet.

To adjust the passenger seat to accommo-date a child's seat and get the seat belt in aperfect position, adjust the passenger back-rest as far forward as possible.1).

Starting with Group 0+ child seats should notbe mounted facing backwards in the passen-ger seat given that due to the size of some ofthem, they can be difficult to install.1).

1) Compliance with current national legislation andthe manufacturer's instructions is required when us-ing or installing child seats.

20

The essentials

Weightgroup

Seating position

Front pas-sengerseata)

Rearsideseat

Rearcentral

seat

Group 0to 10 kg

U* U U

Group 0+to 13 kg

U* U U

Group I9 to 18 kg

U* U U

Group II15 to 25 kg

U* U U

Group III22 to 36 kg

U* U U

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manu-facturer's instructions is required when using or installing childseats.

Suitable for universal restraint systemsfor use in this weight group.

Only compatible for models with adjust-able seat height. Place the seat in thebackmost and highest position possi-ble.

The systems include the child restraint sys-tem mounting with an upper retaining strap(Top Tether) and lower anchoring points onthe seat.

››› in Safety instructions on page 84

U:

*:

“ISOFIX” and Top Tether child seat mounting system*

Child seats can be secured quickly, easilyand safely on the rear outer seats with the“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system.

Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted oneach rear seat. In some vehicles, the ringsare secured to the seat frame and, in others,they are secured to the rear floor. The “ISO-

FIX” rings are located between the rear seatbackrest and the seat cushioning. The TopTether* rings are located at the rear of thebackrests of the rear seats (behind the seatbackrest or in the boot).

To understand the compatibility of the "ISO-FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the tablebelow.

The body weight permitted and informationregarding sizes A to F is indicated on the la-bel on child seats with “universal” or “semi-universal” certification. »

21

The essentials

Weight group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting directionVehicle Isofix positions

Rear side seats

Baby carrierF ISO/L1 Backward-facing X

G ISO/L2 Backward-facing X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU

D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU

C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU

C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU

B ISO/F2 Forward-facing IU

B1 ISO/F2X Forward-facing IU

A ISO/F3 Forward-facing IU

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---

Suitable for ISOFIX universal child re-straint systems approved for use in thisweight group.

ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIXchild restraint systems for this weightgroup or size class.


IU:

X:

22

The essentials

Attaching the child seat with the“ISOFIX system”

Fig. 31 ISOFIX securing rings.

You are obliged to follow the seat manufac-turer's instructions.

● Remove the protective caps of the “ISOFIX”rings by placing a finger in the hole and pull-ing up ››› Fig. 31.

● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-taining rings until the child seat can be heardto engage securely. If the child seat is equip-ped with Top Tether* anchor points, secure itto the correspondent ring ››› Fig. 32. Observethe manufacturer's instructions.

● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-sure that it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*attachment system are available from Techni-cal Services.

Attachment of the child seat with theTop Tether* retainer straps

Fig. 32 Position of the Top Tether rings on theback of the rear seat.

Child seats with the Top Tether system comewith a strap for securing the seat to the vehi-cle anchor point, located at the back of therear seat backrest and provide greater re-straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for-ward movements of the child seat in a crash,to reduce the risk of injuries to the head fromhitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mountedseats

Currently, there are very few rear-facing childsafety seats that have Top Tether. Pleasecarefully read and follow the seat manufac-turer instructions to learn the proper way toinstall the Top Tether strap.

Securing the Top Tether* to the an-chorage point

Fig. 33 Retainer strap: correct adjustmentand fitting.

Securing the retainer strap

● Follow the manufacturer's instructions todeploy the child seat Top Tether retainerstrap.

● Guide the strap under the rear seat head re-straint ››› Fig. 33 (lift the head restraint wherenecessary).

● Slide the strap and secure it properly withthe anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 32.

● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap

● Loosen the strap following the manufactur-er's instructions. »

23

The essentials

● Push the lock and release it from the an-choring support.


Starting the vehicle

Ignition lock

Fig. 34 Ignition key positions.

Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni-tion and start the engine.

Locking and unlocking the steering wheel

● Engaging the steering wheel lock: Removethe key from the ignition and turn the wheeluntil it locks. In vehicles with an automaticgearbox, the gear lever must be in the P posi-tion in order to remove the key. If necessary,

press the locking key on the selector leverand release it again.

● Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the keyinto the ignition and turn it at the same timeas the steering wheel in the direction indica-ted by the arrow. If it is not possible to turnthe steering wheel, it may be because it islocked.

Turning on/switching off the ignition, glowplugs reheating

● Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the 2

position.

● Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the 1

position.

● Diesel vehicles : The glow plugs reheatwhen the ignition is switched on

Starting the engine

● Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal allthe way down and move the gearbox lever in-to neutral.

● Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedaland move the selector lever to the P positionor into N.

● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au-tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do notpress the accelerator.

Start-Stop System*

When you stop and release the clutch pedal,the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine.The ignition remains switched on.

››› in Switching the ignition on andstarting the engine with the key onpage 168

››› page 167

Lights and visibility

Light switch

Fig. 35 Dash panel: light control.

● Turn the switch to the required position››› Fig. 35.

24

The essentials

Sym-bol

Ignition switchedoff

Ignition isswitched on

Fog lights, dippedbeam and side lightsoff.

Light off or daytimedriving light on.

The “Coming home”and “Leaving home”guide lights may beswitched on.

Automatic control ofdipped beam anddaytime runninglight.

Side light on.

Dipped beam head-light off

Dipped beamswitched on.

Front fog lights: move the switch to thefirst position, from positions , or .

Rear fog light: move the switch completelyfrom positions , or .

● Switching off fog lights: Push the switch orturn it to the position.

››› in Side light and dipped beam head-light on page 131

››› page 131

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 36 Turn signal and main beam lever

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn signal: Right-hand parkinglight (ignition switched off).

Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light(ignition switched off).

Main beam switched on: Control lamp lit up on the instrument panel.

Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever ispushed. Control lamp lit up.

Lever all the way down to switch it off.

››› in Turn signal and main beam leveron page 132

››› page 131

1

2

3

4

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 37 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn-ing lights.

Switched on, for example:

● When approaching a traffic jam

● In an emergency

● The vehicle has broken down

● When towing or being towed

››› in Hazard warning lights onpage 136

››› page 135

25

The essentials

Interior lights

Fig. 38 Detail of headliner: front interior light-ing.

Knob Function

Switches interior lights off.

Switches interior lights on.

Switches door contact control on (central po-sition).The interior lights come on automaticallywhen the vehicle is unlocked, a door isopened or the key is removed from the igni-tion.The lights go off a few seconds after all thedoors are closed, the vehicle is locked or theignition is switched on.

Knob Function

Turning the reading light on and off

››› page 138

Windscreen wipers and window wiperblade

Fig. 39 Operating the windscreen wiper andrear wiper


0 Windscreen wiper off.


1

Windscreen wipers interval wipe.Using the control ››› Fig. 39 A adjust theinterval (vehicles without rain sensor), orthe sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2 Slow wipe.

3 Continuous wipe.

4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Holdthe lever down for more time to increasethe wipe frequency.

5

Automatic wipe. The windscreen washerfunction is activated by pushing the leverforwards, and simultaneously the wind-screen wipers start.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wiperwill wipe the window approximately everysix seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is activa-ted by pressing the lever, and the rearwiper starts simultaneously.

››› page 139

››› page 63

26

The essentials

Easy Connect

CAR menu settings (Setup)

Fig. 40 Easy Connect: Main menu Fig. 41 Easy Connect: CAR menu

To select the settings menus, press the EasyConnect button and the SETUP functionbutton.

The actual number of menus available andthe name of the various options will dependon the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.

● Switch the ignition on.

● If the Infotainment System is off, switch iton.

● Press the system's button and thenthe function button Vehicle ››› Fig. 40, or thesystem's button to go to the menu Vehi-cle ››› Fig. 41.

● Press the function button SETUP to openthe menu Vehicle settings ››› Fig. 41.

● To select a function in the menu, press thedesired button.

When you press the menu button, the last se-lected menu will always be displayed.

When the function button check box is activa-ted , the function is active.

Any changes made using the settings menusare automatically saved on closing theBACK menus.

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) ››› page 176

TyresTyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 275

Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning value ››› page 279 »27

The essentials


Driver assistance

ACC (adaptive cruise control) Activation/deactivation: Gear programme, temporary distance from the vehicle in front (dis-tance level)

››› page 196

Front Assist (ambient trafficmonitoring system) Activation/deactivation: monitoring system, advance warning, distance warning display ››› page 207

City emergency braking func-tion Activation/deactivation of the City emergency braking function. ››› page 211

Lane Assist (system warningyou if you leave the lane) Activation/deactivation: Lane Assist, Adaptive Lane Guidance ››› page 213

Detection of traffic signsThe following functions can be activated and deactivated:– Display of traffic signs on the multi-function display– Trailer recognition (display of traffic signs for vehicles with trailer)

››› page 222

Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation ››› page 224

Parking and ma-noeuvring ParkPilot Automatically activate, front volume, front sound settings, rear volume, rear sound settings,

adjust volume››› page 225

Vehicle lights

Vehicle interior lighting Instrument and switch lighting, footrest lighting ››› page 138

Coming home/Leaving homefunction Start time for “Coming home” function, start time for “Leaving home” function

››› page 134››› page 135

Motorway light Activation/deactivation ››› page 136

Headlamp height adjustment Adjust the height and reach of the headlights according to the vehicle's load. ››› page 137

Mirrors/wind‐screen wipers

Mirrors Synchronised regulation, lower the rear-view mirror when reversing, fold in after parking››› page 15,››› page 142

Windscreen wipers Automatic windscreen wipers, wipe when reversing ››› page 26

Opening and clos-ing

Radio-operated remote control Convenience open function ››› page 128

Central locking system Unlocking doors, automatic locking/unlocking, audible confirmation ››› page 116

28

The essentials


Multifunctiondisplay –

Current consumption, average consumption, volume to fill up, convenience consumers,ECOAdvice, travelling time, distance travelled, digital speed display, average speed, speed-ing warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, restore data “from start”, restore data“total calculation”

››› page 30

Date and time –Time source, set the time, automatic summer time (DST) setting, select time zone, time for-mat, set the date, date format

–

Measurement units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, consumption –

Service – Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service ››› page 37

Factory settings –All settings can be reset: driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, lights, rear view mir-rors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, multi-function display

–

››› in CAR menu on page 110

››› page 110

29

The essentials

Driver information system

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possibleto read the different functions of the displayby scrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,the multifunction display can only be operat-ed with the steering wheel buttons.

The number of menus displayed on the in-strument panel will vary according to the ve-hicle electronics and equipment.

A specialised workshop will be able to pro-gramme or modify additional functions, ac-cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec-ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is at a standstill.

As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, itwill not be possible to read the menus. Somewarning messages can be confirmed andmade to disappear with the windscreen wiperlever button or the multifunction steeringwheel button.

The information system also provides the fol-lowing information and displays (dependingon the vehicle's equipment):

Driving data ››› page 34■ Vehicle status

■ MFD from departure■ MFD from refuelling■ MFD total calculation

Assist systems ››› table on page 31■ Activate/deactivate Lane Assist■ Reverse (optional)

Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system

Audio ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Naviga-tion system

Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Book-let Navigation system

Vehicle ››› table on page 31

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, withthe risk of injury.

● Do not operate the instrument panel con-trols when driving.

Using the menus on the instrumentpanel

Fig. 42 Windscreen wiper lever: control but-tons.

Fig. 43 Right side of multifunction steeringwheel: control buttons.

The driver information system is controlledwith the multifunction steering wheel buttons››› Fig. 43 or with the windscreen wiper lever››› Fig. 42 (if the vehicle is not equipped withmultifunction steering wheel).

30

The essentials

Enabling the main menu


● If a message or vehicle pictogram appears,press button ››› Fig. 42 1 on the windscreenwiper lever or button on the multifunctionsteering wheel ››› Fig. 43.

● If managed from the windscreen wiper lev-er: to display the main screen ››› page 31 orto return to the main menu from anothermenu hold down the rocker button ››› Fig. 42

2 .

● If managed from the multifunction steeringwheel: the main menu list is not displayed.To go from point to point in the main menu,press button or several times››› Fig. 43.

Select a submenu

● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 42 2 on thewindscreen wiper lever up or down or turnthe thumbwheel of the multifunction steeringwheel ››› Fig. 43 until the desired option ap-pears marked on the menu.

● The selected option is displayed betweentwo horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle isdisplayed on the right:

● To consult the submenu option, press but-ton ››› Fig. 42 1 on the windscreen wiperlever or button on the multifunction steer-ing wheel ››› Fig. 43.

Making changes according to the menu

● With the rocker switch on the windscreenwiper lever or the thumbwheel of the multi-function steering wheel, make the desiredchanges. To increase or decrease the valuesmore quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster.

● Mark or confirm the selection with button››› Fig. 42 1 on the windscreen wiper leveror button on the multifunction steeringwheel ››› Fig. 43.

Button for the driver assistance sys-tems*

Fig. 44 On the turn signal and main beamheadlight lever: button for the driver assis-tance systems

With the turn signal and main beam head-light lever button, you can activate or deacti-vate the driver assistance systems displayed

in the Assist systems menu››› page 191.

Activate or deactivate a driver assistancesystem

● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 44 in the di-rection of the arrow to open the menu As-sist systems.

● Select the driver assistance system and ac-tivate or deactivate it ››› page 30. A mark indi-cates that driver assistance system is switch-ed on.

Menu

Menu Function

Drivingdata

Information and possible configurationsof the multifunction display (MFD)››› page 34, ››› page 110.

Assistsystems

Information and possible configurationsof the driver assistance systems››› page 110.

Naviga-tion

Information instructions from the activa-ted navigation system: when a route guid-ance is activated, the turning arrows andproximity bars are displayed. The appear-ance is similar to the Easy Connect sys-tem.If route guidance is not activated, the di-rection of travel (compass) and the nameof the street along which you are drivingare shown ››› Booklet Navigation system. »

31

The essentials

Menu Function

AudioStation display on the radio.Track name on the CD.Track name in Media mode ››› Booklet Ra-dio or ››› Booklet Navigation system.

Tele-phone

Information and possible configurationsof the mobile phone preinstallation››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navigationsystem.

Lap tim-er

In a racing circuit, measurement andmemorisation of lap times by the vehicleand comparison with previously measuredbest times ››› page 36.

Vehiclestatus

Display of the current warning or informa-tion texts and other system components,depending on the equipment››› page 110.

Outside temperature display

When the outside temperature is below +4°C(+39°F), the “ice crystal” symbol (warning ofrisk of freezing) is also displayed. At first, thissymbol flashes and then it remains lit untilthe outside temperature rises above +6°C(+43°F) ››› in Indications on the display onpage 107.

When the vehicle is at a standstill or whentravelling at very low speeds, the tempera-ture displayed may be higher than the true

outside temperature as a result of the heatproduced by the engine.

The temperatures measured range from-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F).

Gear-change indicator

Fig. 45 Instrument panel: gear-change indica-tor (manual gearbox).

A gear change will be recommended if thegear you are in is not the most economicalchoice. If no gear-change is recommended, itmeans that you are already in the most eco-nomical gear.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

The following display symbols ››› Fig. 45mean:

● Change to a higher gear: the suggestedgear appears to the right of the current gearwhen a higher gear is recommended.

● Change to a lower gear: the suggestedgear appears to the left of the current gearwhen a lower gear is recommended.

The gear recommendation may occasionallyskip a gear (2nd 4th).

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox*

The display is only visible in tiptronic mode››› page 182.

The following display symbols mean:

● Shifting up a gear

● Shifting down a gear

CAUTION

The gear-change indicator is intended to helpsave fuel, but it is not intended to recom-mend the right gear for all driving situations.In certain situations, only the driver canchoose the correct gear (for instance whenovertaking, driving up a steep gradient ortowing a trailer).

Note

The display disappears from the instrumentpanel when you press the clutch pedal.

32

The essentials

Bonnet, rear lid and doors open

Fig. 46 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C:front left door open; D: rear right door open(5-door vehicles only).

When the ignition is switched on or whendriving, the bonnet, rear lid or doors that areopen will be indicated on the instrument pan-el display, and, as applicable, this will be in-dicated audibly. The display may vary accord-ing to the type of instrument panel fitted.

Illustra-tion

Key to ››› Fig. 46

A Do not continue driving!The bonnet is open or is not properlyclosed ››› page 262.

B Do not continue driving!The rear lid is open or is not properlyclosed ››› page 126.

C, D Do not continue driving!A vehicle door is open or is not properlyclosed ››› page 116.

Warning and information messages

The system runs a check on certain compo-nents and functions when the ignition isswitched on and while the vehicle is moving.Faults in the operation are displayed on thescreen using red and yellow symbols andmessages on the instrument panel display(››› page 109) and, in some cases, withaudible warnings. The display may vary ac-cording to the type of instrument panel fitted.

Priority 1 warning (red symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audiblewarnings. Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Warningand control lamps on page 109 !Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessa-ry, request assistance from specialised personnel.

Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audiblewarnings.A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correctlevels may cause damage to the vehicle! ››› in Warn-ing and control lamps on page 109Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If neces-sary, request assistance from specialised personnel.

Informative text

Information relating to different vehicle processes.

Submenu Assist systems

Assistsystemsmenu

Function

ACC Display of Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) ››› page 196.

Front As-sist

Switching the monitoring system onand off ››› page 207.

Lane As-sist*

Switching the Lane Assist system onor off ››› page 215.

Detectionof trafficsigns

Display of traffic signs ››› page 222:

Fatigue de-tection*

Switching the fatigue detection on oroff (pause recommendation)››› page 224.

33

The essentials

Driving data

Memory

The MFD (multifunction display) shows differ-ent values for the journey and the consump-tion.

Changing between display modes on theMFD

● In vehicles without multifunction steeringwheel: Press the rocker switch on thewindscreen wiper lever ››› Fig. 42.

● Vehicles with a multifunction steeringwheel: turn the thumbwheel ››› Fig. 43.

Multifunction display memory

The multifunction display is equipped withthree memories that work automatically: MFDfrom departure, MFD from refuelling and MFDtotal calculation. On the screen display, youcan read which memory is currently dis-played.

● Toggle between memories with the ignitionon and the memory displayed: Press the button on the windscreen wiper lever

or the button of the multifunction steeringwheel.

Menu Function

MFD fromdeparture

Display and storage of the values forthe journey and the consumption fromwhen the ignition is switched on towhen it is switched off.If the journey is continued in less than2 hours after the ignition is switchedoff, the new data is added to the dataalready stored in the memory. Thememory will automatically be deleted ifthe journey is interrupted for more than2 hours.

MFD fromrefuelling

Display and storage of the values forthe journey and the consumption. Byrefuelling, the memory will be erasedautomatically.

MFD totalcalcula-tion

The memory records the values for aspecific number of partial trips, up to atotal of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99hours and 59 minutes, or 1999.9 km or9999 km, depending on the model ofinstrument panel. On reaching either ofthese limitsa), the memory is automati-cally erased and starts to count from 0again.

a) It varies according to the instrument panel version.

Erasing a memory manually

● Select the memory that you wish to erase.

● Hold the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel or the button of the multi-function wheel pressed down for about 2 sec-onds.

Personalising the displays

In the Easy Connect system you can adjustwhich of the possible displays of the MFD canbe shown on the instrument panel displaywith the button and the function buttonSETUP ››› page 110.

Data summary

Menu Function

Current fuelconsumption

The current fuel consumption dis-play operates throughout the jour-ney, in litres/100 km; and with theengine running and the vehiclestopped, in litres/hour.

Average fuelconsumptiona)

After turning on the ignition, aver-age fuel consumption in li-tres/100 km will be displayed aftertravelling about 100 metres. Other-wise horizontal lines are displayed.The value shown is updated approxi-mately every 5 seconds.ACT®*: Depending on the equip-ment, number of active cylinders.

Operatingrangea)

Approximate distance in km that canstill be travelled with the fuel re-maining in the tank, assuming thesame style of driving is maintained.This is calculated using the currentfuel consumption.

Travellingtime

This indicates the hours (h) and mi-nutes (min) since the ignition wasswitched on.

34

The essentials

Menu Function

Distancecovered

Distance covered in km (m) afterswitching on the ignition.

CNG quality

Whenever you refuel the quality ofthe natural gas is automatically veri-fied and is displayed when the igni-tion is switched on. The display ismade in a percentage of between70% and 100%. The greater the per-centage displayed the lower the con-sumption may be.

Averagespeed

The average speed will be shown af-ter a distance of about 100 metreshas been travelled. Otherwise hori-zontal lines are displayed. The valueshown is updated approximately ev-ery 5 seconds.

Digital dis-play ofspeed

Current speed displayed in digitalformat.

Speed warn-ing at ---km/h or Speedwarning at--- mph

If the stored speed is exceeded (be-tween 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 -155 mph), an audible warning isgiven together with a visual warn-ing.

Detection oftrafficsigns

The traffic signs detected are dis-played.

Oil tempera-ture

Updated engine oil temperature dig-ital display

Menu Function

Coolant tem-peraturegauge

Digital display of the current temper-ature of the liquid coolant.

a) In vehicles with a natural gas engine, range and average con-sumption refer only to data or natural gas consumption. If youare in “petrol mode”, the information of both data only appearson the dash panel and not on the multifunction screen.

Storing a speed with the speed warning

● Select the display Speed warning at--- km/h (--- mph)● Press the button on the windscreenwiper lever or the button on the multifunc-tion steering wheel to store the current speedand activate the warning.

● To switch system on: adjust to the desiredspeed within 5 seconds using the rockerswitch on the windscreen wiper lever orby turning the thumbwheel on the multifunc-tion steering wheel. Next, press the button or again or wait several seconds.

The speed is stored and the warning activa-ted.

● To switch system off: press the but-ton or . The stored speed is de-leted.

Engine oil temperature display

Vehicles without multifunction steeringwheel

● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 42 2 untilthe main menu appears. Enter into Drivingdata. With the button 2 move to the oiltemperature gauge.

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel

● Enter the submenu Driving data andturn the thumbwheel until the oil tempera-ture display appears.

The engine reaches its operating temperaturewhen in normal driving conditions, the oiltemperature is between 80°C (180°F) and120°C (250°F). If the engine is required towork hard and the outside temperature ishigh, the engine oil temperature can in-crease. This does not present any problem aslong as the warning lamps ››› table onpage 41 or ››› table on page 41 do notappear on the display.

Additional electrical appliances

● Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*:Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 42 2 until themain menu appears. Enter into the sectionDriving data. With the rocker switch,move to the display Convenience con-sumers. »

35

The essentials

● Operation with the multi-function steeringwheel*: Move with the buttons 1 or 2 toDriving data and enter with OK. Turn thethumbwheel to the right until the Conven-ience consumers display appears.

In addition, a scale will inform you of the cur-rent sum of all the additional appliances.

Saving tips

Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed inconditions that increase fuel consumption.Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi-cations appear automatically only with the ef-ficiency programme. After a time, the tips willdisappear automatically.

If you wish to hide a saving tip immediatelyafter it appears, press any button on thewindscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer-ing wheel*.

Note

● If you hide a saving tip, it will reappear af-ter you switch the ignition on again.

● The saving tips do not appear in all situa-tions, but rather with a large separation oftime.

Timer*

You can access the timer via the selectionmenu ››› page 31.

It allows you to manually time lap times on aracing circuit, memorise them and comparethem to the vehicle's previous best times.

The following menus can be displayed:

● Stop● Lap● Pause● Partial time● Statistics

Change from one menu to another

● Vehicles without multifunction steeringwheel: press the rocker switch in thewindscreen wiper lever.

● Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:press or .

Menu “Stop”

Start

The timer starts.If there are existing laps and they are in-cluded in the statistics, it will begin withthe number of laps in question.It is only possible to begin with a newfirst lap if the statistics have been resetfirst in the Statistics menu.

Menu “Stop”

Sincestart

The timer begins when the vehicle setsoff.If the vehicle is already moving, the timerbegins once the vehicle has stopped.

Statis-tics

The Statistics menu is displayed onthe screen.

Menu “Lap”

New lapThe timer of the current lap stops and anew lap starts immediately. The time forthe lap you have just completed is inclu-ded in the statistics.

Partialtime

For about 5 seconds a partial time is dis-played. The timer continues in parallel.

StopThe current lap timer will be interrupted.The lap does not end. The Pause menuis displayed.

Menu “Pause”

Continue The interrupted timer continues.

New lap A new timer starts. The halted lap endsand is included in the statistics.

Interr.lap

The timer of the current lap ends and iscancelled. It is not included in the statis-tics.

End The current timer ends. The lap is inclu-ded in the statistics.

36

The essentials

Menu “Partial time”

Partialtime

For about 5 seconds a partial time is dis-played. The timer continues in parallel.

New lapThe timer of the current lap stops and anew lap starts immediately. The time forthe lap you have just completed is inclu-ded in the statistics.

StopThe current lap timer will be interrupted.The lap does not end. The Pause menuis displayed.

Menu “Long-term Statistics”

View of the latest lap times:– total time– best lap time– worst lap time– average lap durationA maximum of 10 laps is possible, and atotal duration of 99 hours, 59 minutesand 59 seconds.If one of the 2 limits is reached, you willhave to reset the statistics in order to be-gin a new timer.

Back This returns to the previous menu.

Resettingto zero

All the memorised statistical data are re-set.

WARNING

Do your best to avoid handling the timerwhile driving.

● Only set the timer or consult statisticswhen the vehicle is stationary.

● While driving, do not handle the timer incomplicated driving situations.

Speed warning device

The speed warning device warns the driverwhen they have exceeded the pre-set speedlimit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warningsignal sounds, and the warning lamp andthe driver message Speed limit excee-ded! will be displayed simultaneously on theinstrument panel. The warning lamp switches off when reducing speed below thestored maximum limit.

Speed warning programming is recommen-ded if you wish to be reminded of a maxi-mum speed, such as when travelling in acountry with different speed limits or for amaximum speed for winter tyres.

Setting speed limit warning

You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* toset, alter or cancel the speed limit warning.

● Vehicles with radio: press the button SETUP

> control button Driver Assistant >Speed warning.

● Vehicles with Easy Connect: press the but-ton Systems or else Vehicle systems >Driver assistant > Speed warning.

The warning limit can be set from 30 to240 km/h (20 to 149 mph). The adjustmentis made at 10 km/h (5 mph) intervals.

Note

● Please bear in mind that, even with thespeed warning function, it is still importantto keep an eye on the vehicle speed with thespeedometer and to observe the legal speedlimits.

● The speed limit warning function in the ver-sion for some countries warns you at a speedof 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a factory-setspeed limit.

Service intervals

The service interval indication appears on theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 120 3 .

SEAT distinguishes between services with en-gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) andservices without engine oil change (e.g. In-spection).

In vehicles with Services established by timeor mileage, the service intervals are alreadypre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-vals are determined individually. Thanks totechnological progress, maintenance workhas been greatly reduced. Because of thetechnology used by SEAT, with this service »

37

The essentials

you only need to change the oil when the ve-hicle so requires. To calculate this change(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions ofuse and individual driving styles are consid-ered. The advance warning first appears 20days before the date established for the cor-responding service. The kilometres (miles)remaining until the next service are alwaysrounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles)and the time is given in complete days. Thecurrent service message cannot be vieweduntil 500 km after the last service. Prior tothis, only lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminder

When the Service date is approaching, whenthe ignition is switched on a Service remind-er is displayed.

Vehicles without text messages: a span-ner will be displayed on the instrumentpanel plus an indication in km.

The kilometres indicated are the maximumnumber of kilometres that can be travelleduntil the next service. After a few seconds,the display mode changes. A clock symbolappears and the number of days until thenext service is due.

Vehicles with text messages: Service in--- km or --- days will be shown on theinstrument panel display.

Service due

When the service date is due, an audiblewarning is given when the ignition is switch-ed on and the spanner displayed on thescreen flashes for a few seconds .

Vehicles with text messages: Service nowwill be shown on the instrument panel dis-play.

Reading a service notification

With the ignition switched on, the engine offand the vehicle at a standstill, the currentservice notification can be read:

Press and hold the button ››› Fig. 120 4

for more than 5 seconds to consult the serv-ice message.

When the service date has passed, a minussign is displayed in front of the number of kil-ometres or days.

Vehicles with text messages: the followingmessage is displayed: Service --- km(miles) or --- days ago.

The time can also be set via the buttonand SETUP function button in the Easy Con-nect system ››› page 110.

Resetting service interval display

If the service was not carried out by a SEATdealership, the display can be reset as fol-lows:

● Switch off the ignition, press and hold but-ton ››› Fig. 120 4 .

● Switch ignition back on.

● Release the 4 ››› Fig. 120 button andpress it again for the next 20 seconds.

Note

● The service message disappears after a fewseconds, when the engine is started or whenOK/RESET is pressed on the windscreen wiper

lever, or OK on the multifunction steeringwheel.

● In vehicles with the LongLife system inwhich the battery has been disconnected fora long period of time, it is not possible to cal-culate the date of the next service. Thereforethe service interval display may not be cor-rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximumservice intervals permitted in the ››› Book-let Maintenance Programme.

● If you reset the display manually, the nextservice interval will be indicated as in vehi-cles with fixed service intervals. For this rea-son we recommend that the service intervaldisplay be reset by a SEAT authorised Dealer.

38

The essentials

Cruise control

Operating the cruise control system(CCS)*

Fig. 47 On the left of the steering column:switches and controls for operating the CCS

Fig. 48 On the left of the steering column:third lever to operate the CCS.

Operation of the turn signal lever

● Switching on the CCS: Move switch››› Fig. 47 1 to . The system is on. If nospeed has been programmed, the system willnot control it.

● Activating the CCS: Press button ››› Fig. 472 in the area. The current speed is

memorised and controlled.

● Temporarily switching off the CCS: Moveswitch ››› Fig. 47 1 to or push thebrake. The cruise control system is switchedoff temporarily.

● Reactivating the CCS: Press button››› Fig. 47 2 in . The memorised speedis saved and controlled again.

● Increasing stored speed during CCS regula-tion: press button 2 in . The vehicle ac-celerates until the new stored speed.

● Reducing stored speed during CCS regula-tion: press button 2 in to lower thespeed by 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduceduntil reaching the new stored speed.

● Switching off the CCS: Move switch››› Fig. 47 1 to . The system is disconnec-ted and the memorised speed is deleted.

Operation using the third lever

● Switching on the CCS: move the third leverto ››› Fig. 48. The system switches on but itdoes not control the speed as no speed hasbeen programmed.

● Activating the CCS: press the ››› Fig. 48button. It memorises and maintains the cur-rent speed.

● Temporarily switching off the CCS: movethe lever to ››› Fig. 48 and release it orpress the brake pedal. The cruise control sys-tem is switched off temporarily.

● Reactivating the CCS: move the lever to ››› Fig. 48 and release it. The memo-rised speed is saved and controlled again.

● Switching off the CCS: move the third leverto position ››› Fig. 48. The system is dis-connected and the memorised speed is de-leted.

››› in Operation on page 196

››› page 195

39

The essentials

Warning lamps

On the instrument panel

Fig. 49 Instrument panel, on dash panel

Red warning lamps

Central warning lamp: additionalinformation on the instrument pan-el display

–

Parking brake on. ››› page 172››› page 175

Do not continue driving!The brake fluid level is too low orthere is a fault in the brake system.

Lit up or flashing: Do not continue driving!Fault in the steering.

››› page 253

Driver or passenger has not fas-tened seat belt.

››› page 71

Use the foot brake!

Yellow warning lamps

Central warning lamp: additionalinformation on the instrument pan-el display

–

40

The essentials

Front brake pads worn.

››› page 176

it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or dis-connection caused by the system.

flashes: ESC or ASR activated.

ASR manually deactivated.

ESC in Sport mode or OFF

ABS faulty or does not work.

Rear fog light switched on.››› page 131

lights up or flashes: fault in theemission control system.

››› page 189

it lights up: pre-heating of dieselengine. ››› page

190flashes: fault in the diesel enginemanagement.

fault in the petrol engine manage-ment.

››› page 190

lights up or flashes: fault in thesteering system.

››› page 253

Tyre pressure too low, or fault inthe tyre pressure monitoring sys-tem.

››› page 275

Fuel tank almost empty.››› page 104

Fault in airbag system and seatbelt tensioners.

››› page 76

Lane Assist is switched on, but notactive.

››› page 213

Other warning lamps

Left or right turn signal.

››› page 131

Hazard warning lights on.››› page 135

Trailer turn signals››› page 234

it lights up: Press the foot brake!flashes: the selector lever lockingbutton has not engaged.

››› page 180

it lights up: cruise control activatedor speed limiter switched on andactive. ››› page

195flashes: the speed set by thespeed limiter has been exceeded.

green warning lamp: Lane Assist isswitched on and active.

››› page 213

Main beam on or flasher on.››› page 131

Natural gas operating mode››› page 108

On the instrument panel display

Fig. 50 On the instrument panel display: dooropen.

Do not continue driving!With the corresponding indica-tion: door(s), rear lid or bonnetopen or not properly closed.

››› page 116››› page 126››› page 262

Ignition: Do not carry on driv-ing! Engine coolant level too low,coolant temperature too high ››› page

266Flashing: Fault in the enginecoolant system. »

41

The essentials

Do not continue driving!Engine oil pressure too low. Ifthe warning lamp flashes, stopdriving, even if the oil level iscorrect. Do not even run the en-gine at idle speed!

››› page 264

Fault in the battery.››› page 269

Driving light totally or partiallyfaulty.

››› page 93

Fault in the cornering light sys-tem.

››› page 131

Diesel particulate filter blocked››› page 190

Level of windscreen washer fluidtoo low.

››› page 139

Flashing: Fault in the oil level de-tection. Control manually. ››› page

264Ignition: Insufficient engine oil.

Fault in the gearbox.››› page 187

Light Assist on.››› page 132

Immobiliser active.

Service interval display››› page 37

Mobile telephone is connectedvia Bluetooth to the original tele-phone device.

››› Book-let Radioor››› Book-let Navi-gationsystem

Mobile telephone battery chargemeter. Available only for devicespre-installed in factory.

Freezing warning. The outsidetemperature is lower than +4°C(+39°F).

››› page 32

Start-Stop system activated. ››› page 191

Start-Stop system unavailable.

Low consumption driving status››› page 31

On the instrument panel

Fig. 51 Warning lamp for disabling the frontpassenger airbag.

Front passenger front airbag isdisabled ( ).

››› page 76

The front passenger front airbagis activated ( ).

››› page 76

››› in Warning and control lamps onpage 109

››› page 109

Gearbox lever

Manual gearbox

Fig. 52 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speedmanual gearbox

The position of the gears is indicated on thegearbox lever ››› Fig. 52.

42

The essentials

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.

● Move the gearbox lever to the required po-sition.

● Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gear

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.

● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push itupwards, move it to the left as far as it will goand then forwards to select reverse ››› Fig. 52R .

● Release the clutch.

››› in Changing gear on page 179

››› page 179

Automatic gearbox*

Fig. 53 Automatic gearbox: selector lever po-sitions.

Parking lock

Reverse gear

Neutral (idling)

Drive (forward)

Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards(+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) togo down a gear.

››› in Selector lever positions onpage 181

››› page 180

››› page 43

P

R

N

D/S

+/–

Manual release of the selector lever

Fig. 54 Selector lever: manual release fromposition P.

Should the power supply be interrupted,there is a manual unlocking device locatedunder the console of the selector lever, onthe right. Releasing the selector lever re-quires a certain degree of practical skill.

● Unlocking: use the flat part of a screwdriverblade.

Removing the cover from the selector lever

● Apply the handbrake ››› to ensure thatthe car does not move.

● Carefully pull the corners of the selectorlever boot and twist it upwards above the lev-er handle. »

43

The essentials

Releasing the selector lever

● Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel-low unlocking tab sideways ››› Fig. 54.

● Now press the interlock button on the se-lector lever A and move the selector lever toposition N.

● After carrying out the manual release, at-tach the selector lever boot on the gearboxconsole again.

If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. dis-charged battery) and the vehicle has to bepushed or towed, the selector lever must firstbe moved to position N, after operating themanual release mechanism.

WARNING

The selector lever may be moved out of posi-tion P only when the handbrake is firmly ap-plied. If this does not work, secure the vehi-cle with the brake pedal. On a slope the vehi-

cle could otherwise start to move inadver-tently after shifting the selector lever out ofposition P - accident risk!

44

The essentials

Air conditioning

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 55 In the centre console: Climatronic con-trols

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-propriate button. Press the button again toswitch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicatethat the respective function of a control hasbeen switched on.

1

TemperatureThe left and right sides can be adjusted separately: Turn the control to adjust the temperature

2

FanThe power of the fan is automatically adjusted. The fan is also adjusted manually by turning the control.

3

Air distributionThe airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons 3 .

4 Indications on the temperature display screen selected for the right and left sides. »

45

The essentials

Defrost function

The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the wind-screen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

Air distribution towards the footwell.

Upward air distribution.

Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

Air recirculation

Seat heating buttons

Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Press the button to make maximum cooling capacity available. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distri-bution adjusts automatically to the position .

When the warning light for button lights up, the settings on the driver side also apply to the passenger side. Press the button or the temper-ature control on the passenger side

Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution. Press the button: the warning lamp on the button will light up .

Press the configuration button : the air conditioning operation menu will be displayed on the Easy Connect system screen.

Switching off Turn the blower control to the position or press the button.

››› in Introduction on page 163

››› page 163

46

The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning work*?

Fig. 56 In the centre console: Manual air condi-tioning controls



1

TemperatureTurn the control to adjust the temperature

2

FanSetting 0: blower and manual air conditioning switched offLevel 6: maximum fan level.

3

Air distributionRotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area.

Defrost function

The airflow is directed at the windscreen. Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear thewindscreen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.


Distribution of air towards the chest and the footwell area. »47

The essentials


Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.

Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

Air recirculation


Maximum cooling power. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distribution adjusts automatically to theposition


››› page 163

How does the heating and the fresh air system work?

Fig. 57 In the centre console: heating system andfresh air controls.

48

The essentials



1

TemperatureTurn the control to adjust the temperature. The temperature cannot be lower than that of the exterior air temperature, as this system cannot coolor dehumidify the air

2

FanSetting 0: blower, heating and fresh air systems switched offLevel 6: maximum fan level

3

Air distributionRotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area.

Defrost function

The airflow is directed at the windscreen.


Distribution of air towards the chest and the footwell area.


Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.

Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes

Air recirculation ››› page 166



››› page 163

49

The essentials

Fluid Level control

Filling capacities

Tank level

Petrol and dieselengines

50 l, of which, approx. 7 l reserveVehicles with all-wheel-drive:

55 l, of which, approx. 8.5 l re-serve

Natural gas en-ginea) approx. 15 kg

a) The capacity depends on the efficacy and characteristics ofthe natural gas pumps. The capacity indicated is based on aminimum loading pressure of 200 bar.

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid container

Versions withoutheadlight washersystem

approx. 3 litres

Versions withheadlight washersystem

approx. 5 litres

Fuel

Fig. 58 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlockedand locked automatically using the centrallocking.

Opening the fuel tank cap

● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on theleft side.

● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.

● Place it in the space on the hinge of theopen flap ››› Fig. 58.

Closing the fuel tank cap

● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right asfar as it will go.

● Close the lid.

››› in Filling up on page 257

››› page 256

Oil

Fig. 59 Engine oil dipstick.

Fig. 60 In the engine compartment: Engineoil filler cap

50

The essentials

The level is measured using the dipstick loca-ted in the engine compartment››› page 262.

The oil should leave a mark between zonesA and C . It should never exceed zone A .

● Zone A : Do not add oil.

● Zone B : You can add oil but keep the levelin that zone.

● Zone C : Add oil up to zone B .

Topping up engine oil

● Unscrew cap from oil filler opening.

● Add oil slowly.

● At the same time, check the level to ensureyou do not add too much.

● When the oil level reaches at least zone B ,unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully.

Oil properties

Engine type Specification

Petrol without flexibleservice interval

VW 502 00/VW 504 00

Petrol with flexible serv-ice interval (LongLife)

VW 504 00

Diesel. Engines withoutParticulate filter (DPF)

VW 505 01/VW 506 01/VW507 00

Engine type Specification

Diesel. Particulate FilterEngines (DPF).With or without flexibleservice interval (withand without LongLife)a)

VW 507 00

Natural gas engines VW 502 00

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage theengine.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be mixed with theengine oil. The deterioration caused by theseadditives is not covered by the warranty.

››› in Changing engine oil on page 266

››› page 264

Coolant

Fig. 61 Engine compartment: coolant expan-sion tank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the enginecompartment ››› page 262.

When the engine is cold, replace the coolantwhen the level is below .

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied fromthe factory with a specially treated mixture ofwater and at least 40 % of the additive G13(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives thenecessary frost protection down to -25°C(-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts ofthe engine cooling system against corrosion.It also prevents scaling and considerably rai-ses the boiling point of the coolant.

To protect the cooling system, the percentageof additive must always be at least 40 %, »

51

The essentials

even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection isnecessary, the proportion of additive may beincreased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-tifreeze protection will diminish and this willworsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixtureof distilled water and at least 40 % of theG13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive(both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-corrosion protection ››› in Topping up cool-ant on page 267. The mixture of G13 withG12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11(green-blue) engine coolants will significant-ly reduce anti-corrosion protection andshould therefore be avoided ››› in Toppingup coolant on page 267.

››› in Topping up coolant on page 267

››› page 266

Brake fluid

Fig. 62 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-ervoir cap

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-gine compartment ››› page 262.

The level should be between the and marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni-cal Service.

››› in Topping up brake fluid onpage 268

››› page 267

Windscreen washer

Fig. 63 In the engine compartment: wind-screen washer reservoir top.

The windscreen washer reservoir is located inthe engine compartment ››› page 262.

To top up, mix water with a product recom-mended by SEAT.

In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.

››› in Checking and topping up thewindscreen washer reservoir onpage 268

››› page 268

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compart-ment ››› page 262. It does not require

52

The essentials

maintenance. It is checked as part of the In-spection Service.

››› in Important safety warnings forhandling a vehicle battery on page 270

››› page 269

53

The essentials

Emergencies

Fuses

Fuse location

Fig. 64 On the driver-side dash panel: fusebox cover

Fig. 65 In the engine compartment: fuse boxcover

Underneath the instrument panel

The fuse box is located behind the storagecompartment ››› Fig. 64.

In the engine compartment

Press the locking tabs to release the fuse boxcover ››› Fig. 65.

Identifying fuses situated below the dashpanel by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40


››› page 91

Replacing a blown fuse

Fig. 66 Image of a blown fuse

Preparation

● Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec-trical equipment.

● Open the corresponding fuse box››› page 92.

Identifying a blown fuse

A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured››› Fig. 66.

● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it hasblown.

To replace a fuse

● Remove the fuse.

● Replace the blown fuse by one with anidentical amperage rating (same colour andmarkings) and identical size.

54

The essentials

● Replace the cover again or close the fusebox lid.

Bulbs

Bulbs (12 V)

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights Type

Daytime running light/sidelight

P21W SLL

Dipped beam headlights H7 LL

Main beam headlights H7 LL

Turn signal PY21W LL

Full-LED main headlights Type

No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs

Front fog light Type

Fog/cornering lights* H8

Rear lights Type

Brake light/tail light P21W LL

Side lights 2x W5W LL


Rear lights Type

Retro fog light H21W

Reverse lights P21W LL

LED rear lights Type


Retro fog light H21W

Reverse lights P21W LL

The remaining functions work with LEDs

››› page 93

Action in the event of a punc-ture

What to do first

● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surfaceand in a safe place as far away from traffic aspossible.

● Apply the handbrake.

● Switch on the hazard warning lights.

● Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear.

● Automatic gearbox: Move the selector leverto position P.

● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it fromyour vehicle.

● Have the vehicle tool kit ››› page 85and the spare wheel* ready››› page 278.

● Observe the applicable legislation for eachcountry (reflective vest, warning triangles,etc.).

● All occupants should leave the vehicle andwait in a safe place (for instance behind theroadside crash barrier).

WARNING

● Always observe the above steps and pro-tect yourself and other road users.

● If you change the wheel on a slope, blockthe wheel on the opposite side of the car witha stone or similar to prevent the vehicle frommoving.

55

The essentials

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc-ture kit

Fig. 67 Standard representation: contents ofthe anti-puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located under thefloor panel in the luggage compartment.

Sealing the tyre

● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Usethe ››› Fig. 67 1 tool to remove the insert.Place it on a clean surface.

● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously››› Fig. 67 10 .

● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 67 3 intothe sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will breakautomatically.

● Remove the lid from the filling tube››› Fig. 67 3 and screw the open end of thetube into the tyre valve.

● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down,fill the tyre with the contents of the sealantbottle.

● Remove the bottle from the valve.

● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-ing the tool ››› Fig. 67 1 .

Inflating the tyre

● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube››› Fig. 67 5 into the tyre valve.

● Check that the air bleed screw is closed››› Fig. 67 7 .

● Start the engine and leave it running.

● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 67 9 into thevehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 150.

● Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFFswitch ››› Fig. 67 8 .

● Keep the air compressor running until itreaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8minutes.

● Disconnect the air compressor.

● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.

● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant isdistributed throughout the tyre.

● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into thevalve.

● Repeat the inflation process.

● If the indicated pressure still cannot bereached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stopand request assistance from an authorisedtechnician.

● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrewthe tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.

● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding80 km/h (50 mph).

● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes››› page 87.

››› in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* onpage 85

››› page 85

56

The essentials

Changing a wheel

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 68 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.

An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

Towline anchorage

Box spanner for wheel bolts*

Crank handle for jack

Jack*

Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov-ers*/wheel bolt cap clip.

››› in What to do first on page 55

››› page 85

1

2

3

4

5

6

Wheel covers*

Fig. 69 Remove the wheel cover.

The wheel covers must be removed for accessto the wheel bolts.

Removing

● Remove the wheel cover using the wirehook ››› Fig. 69.

● Hook this into one of the cut-outs of thewheel cover.

Fitting

● Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim bypressing it firmly.

● Put pressure on the point of the cut-out forthe valve.

● Next fit the rest of the wheel cover.

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 70 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.

Removal

● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over thecap until it clicks into place ››› Fig. 70.

● Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

57

The essentials

Anti-theft wheel bolts

Fig. 71 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap andadapter.

● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.

● Insert the special adapter (vehicle tools)onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and push it onas far as it will go.

● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) ontothe adapter as far as it will go.

● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 58.

Note

Make a note of the code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place,but not in your vehicle. If you need a newadapter, you can obtain it from the SEAT Offi-cial Service, indicating the code number.

Loosening the wheel bolts

Fig. 72 Wheel: loosen the wheel bolts.

● Insert the box spanner (vehicle tools) ontothe wheel bolt as far as it will go. An adapteris required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts ››› page 58.

● Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turnto the left ››› Fig. 72 (arrow). To apply the re-quired torque, hold the wheel brace at theend. If it is not possible to loosen a wheelbolt, carefully apply pressure with one footon the end of the box spanner. Hold on to thevehicle for support and take care not to slip.

WARNING

Slightly loosen the wheel bolts (one turn) be-fore raising the vehicle with the jack*. If not,an accident may occur.

Lifting the vehicle

Fig. 73 Crossbar: marks.

Fig. 74 Strut: mounting the jack on the vehi-cle.

● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firmground. If necessary use a large, strongboard or similar support. If the surface is slip-pery (for example tiles) place the jack on arubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-ping ››› .

58

The essentials

● Find the support point on the strut (sunkenarea) closest to the wheel to be changed››› Fig. 73.

● Turn the jack*, located below the strut sup-port point, to raise it until tab 1 ››› Fig. 74 isbelow the housing provided.

● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” ontothe housing provided on the strut and themobile base 2 is resting on the ground. Thebase plate 2 should fall vertically with re-spect to the support point 1 .

● Continue turning the jack* until the wheelis slightly lifted off the ground.

WARNING

● Make sure that the jack* remains stable. Ifthe surface is slippery or soft, the jack* couldslip or sink, respectively, with the resultantrisk of injury.

● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-plied by the manufacturer. Other vehiclescould slip, with the consequent risk of injury.

● Only mount the jack* on the support pointsdesigned for this purpose on the strut, andalways align the jack correctly. If you do not,the jack* could slip as it does not have an ad-equate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury!

● The height of the parked vehicle canchange as a result of variations in tempera-ture and loading.

CAUTION

The vehicle must not be raised on the cross-bar. Only place the jack* on the points de-signed for this purpose on the strut. Other-wise, the vehicle may be damaged.

Removing and fitting a wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheelbolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

Taking off the wheel

● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the boxspanner and place them on a clean surface.

● Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheel

When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotationdirection, observe the instructions in››› page 59.

● Mount the wheel.

● Screw on the wheel bolts in position andtighten them loosely with a box spanner.

● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.

● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairsusing the wheel brace.

The wheel bolts should be clean and turneasily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspectthe wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-

ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-ting the wheel.

Tyres with compulsory direction of ro-tation

A directional tread pattern can be identifiedby the arrows on the sidewall that point inthe direction of rotation. Always observe thedirection of rotation indicated when fittingthe wheel to guarantee optimum propertiesof this type of tyres with regard to grip,noises, wear and aquaplaning.

If it is absolutely necessary to fit the sparetyre* against the direction of rotation, drivewith care as this means the tyre does not of-fer optimum driving properties. This is of par-ticular importance when the road surface iswet.

To return to directional tread tires, replacethe punctured tyre as soon as possible andrestore the obligatory direction of rotation ofall tyres.

Subsequent work

● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.

● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap››› page 57. »

59

The essentials

● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-tion.

● If the replaced wheel does not fit in thespare wheel housing, store it safely in theluggage compartment ››› page 151.

● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-ted tyre as soon as possible.

● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi-cator, adjust the pressure and store the read-ing in the radio/Easy Connect system*››› page 275.

● Have the tightening torque of the wheelbolts checked as soon as possible with a tor-que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Mean-while, drive carefully.

● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly aspossible.

Snow chains

Use

Snow chains should only be used on thefront wheels.

Check that they are correctly seated afterdriving for a few yards; correct the position ifnecessary, in accordance with the manufac-turer's fitting instructions. Keep your speedbelow 50 km/h (30 mph).

If there is a danger of being trapped despitehaving mounted the chains, it is best to disa-ble the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC››› page 178, Switching on/off the ESCand ASR.

Snow chains will improve braking ability aswell as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may onlybe used with the following wheel rim/tyrecombination.

195/65 R15 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm




Remove wheel covers and any integral trimring before fitting snow chains.

Remove the chains when roads are free ofsnow. Driving characteristics worsen, and thewheels become damaged quickly and mayeven be rendered unusable.

Emergency towing of the vehi-cle

Towing

Fig. 75 Right side of the front bumper: tow-line anchorage screwed in.

Fig. 76 Right side of the rear bumper: towlineanchorage screwed in.

60

The essentials

Towline anchorages

Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho-rages.

The towline anchorages are located underthe floor panel in the luggage compartment,next to the vehicle tools ››› page 85.

Screw the towline anchorage into the screwconnection ››› Fig. 75 o ››› Fig. 76 and tightenit with the wheel brace.

Tow rope or tow bar

The tow bar offers increased safety and alower risk of damage.

The tow rope is recommended when there isno tow bar. It must be elastic so that it doesnot damage the vehicle.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

● The tow rope must be taut before you driveoff.

● Release the clutch very carefully when start-ing the vehicle (manual gearbox), or acceler-ate gently (automatic gearbox).

Driving style

Towing requires some experience, especiallywhen using a tow rope. Both drivers shouldrealise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In-experienced drivers should not attempt totow.

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicleand take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-ways a risk of overloading and damaging theanchorage points.

Switch on the ignition so that the turn sig-nals, windscreen wipers and windscreenwasher can work. Ensure that the steeringwheel is unlocked and moves freely.

Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicleswith a manual gearbox. With an automaticgearbox, place the lever in N.

To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. Thebrake servo does not work when the engineis switched off.

The power steering only works when the igni-tion is switched on and the vehicle is moving,provided that the battery is sufficiently charg-ed. Otherwise, it will need more force.

Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at alltimes.

››› in General information on page 88

››› page 88

Tow-starting

If the engine will not start, first try starting itusing the battery of another vehicle››› page 61. You should only attempt to tow-start a vehicle if charging the battery doesnot work. This is done by leveraging wheelmovement.

When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en-gine, do not tow it more than a short dis-tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter thecatalytic converter.

● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear before moving off.

● Press the clutch and hold the pedal down.


● Once both vehicles are moving, release theclutch.

● As soon as the engine has started, pressthe clutch and move the gear lever to neutral.

How to jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wirecross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis-charged battery, the battery can be connec-ted to the battery of another vehicle to startthe engine. »

61

The essentials

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-tions). The wire cross section must be at least25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note

● The vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.

● The discharged battery must be properlyconnected to the on-board network.

How to jump start: description

Fig. 77 Diagram of connections for vehicleswithout Start Stop system

Fig. 78 Diagram of connections for vehicleswith Start Stop system

Jump lead terminal connections

1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles››› .

2. Connect one end of the red jump lead tothe positive + terminal of the vehiclewith the flat battery A ››› Fig. 77.

3. Connect the other end of the red jumplead to the positive terminal + in the ve-hicle providing assistance B .

4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system:connect one end of the black jump lead tothe negative terminal – of the vehicleproviding the current B ››› Fig. 77.

– For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con-nect one end of the black jump lead X to asuitable ground terminal, to a solid piece ofmetal in the engine block, or to the engineblock itself ››› Fig. 78.

5. Connect the other end of the black jumplead X to a solid metal component boltedto the engine block or to the engine blockitself of the vehicle with the flat battery.Do not connect it to a point near the bat-tery A .

6. Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.

Starting

7. Start the engine of the vehicle with theboosting battery and let it run at idlingspeed.

8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flatbattery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes untilthe engine is running.

Removing the jump leads

9. Before you remove the jump leads, switchoff the dipped beam headlights if they areswitched on.

10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rearwindow in the vehicle with the flat battery.This helps minimise voltage peaks whichare generated when the leads are discon-nected.

11.When the engine is running, disconnectthe leads in reverse order to the detailsgiven above.

62

The essentials

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficientmetal-to-metal contact with the battery termi-nals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-onds, switch off the starter and try again afterabout 1 minute.

WARNING

● Please note the safety warnings referring toworking in the engine compartment››› page 262.

● The battery providing assistance must havethe same voltage as the flat battery (12V) andapproximately the same capacity (see imprinton battery). Failure to comply could result inan explosion.

● Never use jump leads when one of the bat-teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af-ter the battery has thawed, battery acid couldleak and cause chemical burns. If a batteryfreezes, it should be replaced.

● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettesaway from batteries, danger of explosion.Failure to comply could result in an explo-sion.

● Observe the instructions provided by themanufacturer of the jump leads.

● Do not connect the negative cable from theother vehicle directly to the negative terminalof the flat battery. The gas emitted from thebattery could be ignited by sparks. Danger ofexplosion.

● Do not attach the negative cable from theother vehicle to parts of the fuel system or tothe brake line.

● The non-insulated parts of the batteryclamps must not be allowed to touch. Thejump lead attached to the positive batteryterminal must not touch metal parts of the ve-hicle, this can cause a short circuit.

● Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.

● Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-sult in chemical burns.

Note

The vehicles must not touch each other, oth-erwise electricity could flow as soon as thepositive terminals are connected.

Changing the wiper blades

Windscreen wipers service position

Fig. 79 Wipers in service position

The wiper arms can be raised when the wip-ers are in service position ››› Fig. 79.

● Close the bonnet ››› page 262.

● Switch the ignition on and off.

● Press the windscreen wiper lever down-wards briefly 4 ››› page 26.

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-tion.

››› page 87

63

The essentials

Changing the windscreen and rearwindow wiper blades

Fig. 80 Changing the windscreen wiperblades

Fig. 81 Changing the rear wiper blade

Raising and lowering windscreen wiper arms

● Place the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition ››› page 63.

● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fas-tening point.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

● Raise the wiper arms.

● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirtfrom the windscreen wiper blades.

● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge ordamp cloth may be used ››› in Changingthe windscreen and rear window wiperblades on page 88.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

● Lift and unfold the wiper arms.

● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 80 1

and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-rection of the arrow.

● Fit a new wiper blade of the same lengthand design on to the wiper arm and hook itinto place.

● Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-screen.

Changing the rear wiper blade

● Raising/lowering the wiper arm.

● Turn the blade slightly ››› Fig. 81 (arrowA ).

● Hold down the release button 1 whilegently pulling the blade in the direction of ar-row B .

● Insert a new blade of the same length andtype in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di-rection to the arrow B and hook into placebutton 1 .

● Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.

››› in Changing the windscreen andrear window wiper blades on page 88

››› page 87

64

Safe driving

Safety

Safe driving

Safety first!

WARNING

● This manual contains important informa-tion about the operation of the vehicle, bothfor the driver and the passengers. The othersections of the on-board documentation alsocontain further information that you shouldbe aware of for your own safety and for thesafety of your passengers.

● Ensure that the on-board documentation iskept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe-cially important when lending or selling thevehicle to another person.

Advice about driving

Before starting every trip

For your own safety and the safety of yourpassengers, always note the following pointsbefore every trip:

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turnsignals are working properly.

– Check tyre pressure.

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear andgood view of the surroundings.

– Make sure all luggage is secured››› page 151.

– Make sure that no objects can interferewith the pedals.

– Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir-rors properly according to your size.

– Ensure that the passengers in the rearseats always have the head restraints inthe in-use position ››› page 69.

– Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-straints according to their height.

– Protect children with appropriate childseats and properly applied seat belts››› page 82.

– Assume the correct sitting position. Instructyour passengers also to assume a propersitting position. ››› page 66.

– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct yourpassengers also to fasten their seat beltsproperly. ››› page 71.

What affects driving safety?

As a driver, you are responsible for yourselfand your passengers. When your concentra-tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-

cumstance, you endanger yourself as well asothers on the road ››› , for this reason:

– Always pay attention to traffic and do notget distracted by passengers or telephonecalls.

– Never drive when your driving ability is im-paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

– Always reduce your speed as appropriatefor road, traffic and weather conditions.

– When travelling long distances, takebreaks regularly - at least every two hours.

– If possible, avoid driving when you are tiredor stressed.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip,the risk of injury and accidents increases.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of yourpassengers in danger. In the event of an acci-dent, the safety equipment may reduce therisk of injury. The following list includes mostof the safety equipment in your SEAT:

● three-point seat belts,

● belt tension limiters for the front and rearside seats, »

65

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

● belt tensioners for the front seats,

● front airbags,

● knee airbags,

● side airbags in the front seat backrests,

● side airbags in the rear seat backrests*,

● head-protection airbags,

● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats inthe rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system,

● height-adjustable front head restraints,

● rear head restraints with in-use positionand non-use position,

● adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned aboveworks together to provide you and your pas-sengers with the best possible protection inthe event of an accident. However, thesesafety systems can only be effective if youand your passengers are sitting in a correctposition and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct position for passengers

Correct sitting position for driver

Fig. 82 The proper distance between driverand steering wheel

Fig. 83 Correct head restraint position for thedriver.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident, we recom-

mend the following adjustments for the driv-er:

– Adjust the steering wheel so that there is adistance of at least 25 cm between thesteering wheel and the centre of your chest››› Fig. 82.

– Move the driver's seat forwards or back-wards so that you are able to press the ac-celerator, brake and clutch pedals to thefloor with your knees still slightly angled››› .

– Ensure that you can reach the highest pointof the steering wheel.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of yourhead, or as close as possible to the samelevel as the top of your head ››› Fig. 83.

– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-tion so that your back rests completelyagainst it.

– Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 71.

– Keep both feet in the footwell so that youhave the vehicle under control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver's seat ››› page 143.

WARNING

● An incorrect sitting position of the drivercan lead to severe injuries.

66

Safe driving

● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is atleast 25 cm distance between the centre ofthe chest and the centre of the steeringwheel ››› Fig. 82. If you are sitting closer than25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect youproperly.

● If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the minimum distance of 25cm, contact a specialised workshop. Theworkshop will help you decide if special spe-cific modifications are necessary.

● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel with both hands on the outside of thering at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.This reduces the risk of injury when the driverairbag is triggered.

● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.in the centre of the steering wheel). In suchcases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus-tain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

● To reduce the risk of injury to the driverduring sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac-cident, never drive with the backrest tilted farback! The airbag system and seat belts canonly provide optimal protection when thebackrest is in an upright position and thedriver is wearing his or her seat belt correct-ly.

● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-ieve optimal protection.

Adjusting the steering wheel position

Read the additional information carefully››› page 16.

WARNING

● Never adjust the position of the steeringwheel when the vehicle is moving, as thiscould cause an accident.

● Move the lever up firmly so the steeringwheel position does not accidentally changeduring driving. risk of accident!

● Make sure you are capable of reaching andfirmly holding the upper part of the steeringwheel: risk of accident!

● If you adjust the steering wheel so that itpoints towards your face, the driver airbagwill not protect you properly in the event ofan accident. Make sure that the steeringwheel points towards your chest.

Correct sitting position for front pas-senger

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident, we recom-mend the following adjustments for the frontpassenger:

– Move the front passenger seat back as faras possible ››› .

– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-tion so that your back rests completelyagainst it.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of yourhead, or as close as possible to the samelevel as the top of your head ››› page 69.

– Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of the front passenger seat.


It is possible to deactivate the front passen-ger airbag in exceptional circumstances››› page 80.

Adjusting the front passenger seat››› page 143.

WARNING

● An incorrect sitting position of the frontpassenger can lead to severe injuries.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so thatthere is at least 25 cm between your chestand the dash panel. If you are sitting closerthan 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protectyou properly.

● If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the minimum distance of 25cm, contact a specialised workshop. Theworkshop will help you decide if special spe-cific modifications are necessary. »

67

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

● Always keep your feet in the footwell whenthe vehicle is moving; never rest them on thedash panel, out the window or on the seat. Anincorrect sitting position exposes you to anincreased risk of injury in case of a suddenbraking or an accident. If the airbag is trig-gered, you could sustain severe injuries dueto an incorrect sitting position.

● To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas-senger in events such as sudden braking ma-noeuvres or an accident, never travel with thebackrest tilted far back! The airbag systemand seat belts can only provide optimal pro-tection when the backrest is in an upright po-sition and the front passenger is wearing hisor her seat belt properly. The further the seatbackrests are tilted to the rear, the greaterthe risk of injury due to incorrect positioningof the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po-sition!

● Adjust the head restraint correctly in orderto achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for rear seatpassengers

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of asudden braking manoeuvre or an accident,passengers on the rear seat bench must con-sider the following:

– Sit up straight.

– Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-sition ››› page 69.

– Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of the rear seat.


– Use an appropriate child restraint systemwhen you take children in the vehicle››› page 82.

WARNING

● If the passengers in the rear seats are notsitting properly, they could sustain severe in-juries.

● Adjust the head restraint correctly in orderto achieve maximum protection.

● Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-tion when seat backrests are in an uprightposition and the vehicle occupants are wear-ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers Inthe rear seats are not sitting in an upright po-sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi-tioning of the seat belt increases.

Examples of incorrect sitting posi-tions

Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-ly when the belt webs are properly posi-tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan-tially reduce the protective function of seatbelts and increase the risk of injury due to in-correct seat belt position. As the driver, youare responsible for all passengers, especiallychildren.

– Never allow anyone to assume an incorrectsitting position in the vehicle while travel-ling ››› .

The following list contains examples of sit-ting positions that could be dangerous for allvehicle occupants. The list is not complete,but we would like to make you aware of thisissue.

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:

● Never stand in the vehicle.

● Never stand on the seats.

● Never kneel on the seats.

● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.

● Never lean against the dash panel.

● Never lie on the rear bench.

● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.

● Never sit sideways.

● Never lean out of a window.

● Never put your feet out of a window.

● Never put your feet on the dash panel.

● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.

● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-well.

● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.

● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-gage compartment.

68

Safe driving

WARNING

● Any incorrect sitting position increases therisk of severe injuries. Sitting in an incorrectposition exposes the vehicle occupants to se-vere injuries if airbags are triggered, by strik-ing a vehicle occupant who has assumed anincorrect sitting position.

● Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop-er sitting position and maintain it throughoutthe trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas-sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po-sition during the trip ››› page 66, Correct posi-tion for passengers.

Correct adjustment of front head re-straints

Fig. 84 Correctly adjusted head restraint asviewed from the front and the side.


Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-portant part of passenger protection and canreduce the risk of injuries in most accidentsituations.

● Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is, as far as possible, at the same levelas the top of your head, or at the very least,at eye level ››› Fig. 84.

WARNING

● Travelling with the head restraints removedor improperly adjusted increases the risk ofsevere injuries. An improper adjustment ofthe head restraints may cause death in an ac-cident and increase the risk of suffering inju-ries during abrupt braking actions or unex-pected manoeuvres.

● The head restraints must always be adjus-ted according to the height of the passenger.

Correct adjustment of rear head re-straints

Fig. 85 Head restraints in the correct posi-tion.

Fig. 86 Head restraint position warning label.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-portant part of the passenger protection andcan reduce the risk of injuries in most acci-dent situations »

69

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

Rear head restraints

– The rear head restraints have 2 positions:use and non-use.

– One position for use (head restraint raised)››› Fig. 85. In this position, the head re-straints are used normally, protecting pas-sengers along with the rear seat belts.

– And one position for non-use (head re-straint lowered).

– To fit the head restraints in position for use,pull on the edges with both hands in thedirection of the arrow.

WARNING

● Under no circumstances should the rearpassengers travel while the head restraintsare in the non-use position. See the warninglabel located on the rear side fixed window››› Fig. 86.

● Do not swap the centre rear head restraintwith either of the outer seat rear head re-straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident!

CAUTION

Note the instructions on the adjustment ofthe head restraints ››› page 144.

Pedal area

Pedals

– Ensure that you can always press the accel-erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpairedto the floor.

– Ensure that the pedals can return unim-paired to their initial positions.

– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-tened during the trip and do not obstructthe pedals ››› .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedalsclear and which are secured to prevent themfrom slipping. You can obtain suitable floormats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal mustbe pressed down thoroughly in order to stopthe vehicle.

Wear suitable footwear

Always wear shoes which support your feetproperly and give you a good feeling for thepedals.

WARNING

● Restricting pedal operation can lead to crit-ical situations while driving.

● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov-erings over the original floor mats. Thiswould reduce the pedal area and could ob-struct the pedals. Risk of accident.

● Never place objects in the driver footwell.An object could move into the pedal area andimpair pedal operation. In the event of a sud-den driving or braking manoeuvre, you willnot be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac-celerator pedal. Risk of accident!

70

Seat belts

Seat belts

Why wear a seat belt?

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the frontand three in the rear. Each seat is equippedwith a three-point seat belt.

In some versions, your vehicle is approvedonly for four seats. Two front seats and tworear seats.

WARNING

● Never transport more than the permittedamount of people in your vehicle.

● Every vehicle occupant must properly fas-ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his orher seat. Children must be protected with anappropriate child restraint system.

Seat belt lamp*

Fig. 87 Instrument panel: right rear seat oc-cupied and corresponding seat belt fasteneddisplay.

The control lamp illuminates to remind thedriver to fasten his seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

– Fasten your seat belt securely.

– Instruct your passengers to fasten theirseat belts properly before driving off.

– Protect children by using a child seat ac-cording to the child's height and weight.

When the ignition is switched on, the controllamp in the instrument panel lights up (de-pending on the model version) if the driver orpassenger have not fastened their seat belts.

An audible warning signal will sound for afew seconds if the seat belts are not fastenedas the vehicle drives off and reaches a speed

of more than approximately 25 km/h(15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastenedwhile the vehicle is in motion. The warninglight will also flash .

The lamp goes out when the driver andpassenger seat belts are fastened with the ig-nition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display*

Depending on the model version, when theignition is switched on, the seat belt statusdisplay ››› Fig. 87 on the instrument panel in-forms the driver whether the passengers inthe rear seats have fastened their seat belts.The symbol indicates that the passenger inthis seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt.

When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastenedor unfastened, the seat belt status is dis-played for approximately 30 seconds. The in-dication can be hidden by pressing the0.0/SET button on the dash panel.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seatsis unfastened while the vehicle is in motion.An audible warning will also be heard if thevehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h(15 mph).

71

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

The protective function of seat belts

Fig. 88 Drivers with properly worn seat beltswill not be thrown forward in the event of sud-den braking

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupantsin the proper position. They also help preventuncontrolled movements that may result inserious injury and reduce the risk of beingthrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-dent.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat beltscorrectly benefit greatly from the ability of thebelts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,the front part of your vehicle and other pas-sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-gy released in a collision. Taken together, allthese features reduce the releasing kineticenergy and consequently, the risk of injury.This is why it is so important to fasten seatbelts before every trip, even when "just driv-ing around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seatbelts as well. Accident statistics have shownthat wearing seat belts is an effective meansof substantially reducing the risk of injuryand improving the chances of survival wheninvolved in a serious accident. Furthermore,properly worn seat belts improve the protec-tion provided by airbags in the event of anaccident. For this reason, wearing a seat beltis required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-bags, the seat belts must be fastened andworn. The front airbags, for example, are onlytriggered in some cases of head-on collision.The front airbags will not be triggered duringminor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air-bag trigger threshold value in the control unitis not exceeded.

Therefore, you should always wear your seatbelt and ensure that all vehicle occupantshave fastened their seat belts properly beforeyou drive off!

Safety instructions on using seatbelts

– Always wear the seat belt as described inthis section.

– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastenedat all times and are not damaged.

WARNING

● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not atall, the risk of severe injuries increases. Theoptimal protection from seat belts can beachieved only if you use them properly.

● Fasten your seat belt before every trip -even when driving in town. Other vehicle oc-cupants must also wear the seat belts at alltimes, otherwise they run the risk of being in-jured.

● The seat belt cannot offer its full protectionif the seat belt is not positioned correctly.

● Never allow two passengers (even children)to share the same seat belt.

● Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of your seat as long as the vehicle is inmotion.

● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

● The seat belt must never be twisted while itis being worn.

● The seat belt should never lie on hard orfragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.)because this can cause injuries.

● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged orjammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

● Never wear the seat belt under the arm orin any other incorrect position.

● Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoatover a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func-tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacityto protect.

72

Seat belts

● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not beblocked with paper or other objects, as thiscan prevent the latch plate from engaging se-curely.

● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings orsimilar items to alter the position of the beltwebbing.

● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to theconnections, belt retractors or parts of thebuckle could cause severe injuries in theevent of an accident. Therefore, you mustcheck the condition of all seat belts at regularintervals.

● Seat belts which have been worn in an acci-dent and stretched must be replaced by aspecialised workshop. Renewal may be nec-essary even if there is no apparent damage.The belt anchorage should also be checked.

● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seatbelt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-moved or modified in any way.

● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise theretractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws ofphysics

Fig. 89 A driver not wearing a seat belt isthrown forward violently

Fig. 90 The unbelted passenger in the rearseat is thrown forward violently, hitting thedriver who is wearing a seat belt.

It is easy to explain how the laws of physicswork in the case of a head-on collision: whena vehicle starts moving, a type of energy

called “kinetic energy” is created both in thepassengers and inside the vehicle.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends onthe speed of the vehicle and the weight ofthe vehicle and its passengers. The higherthey are, the more energy there is to be “ab-sorbed” in the event of an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is thespeed of the vehicle. If the speed doublesfrom 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h(30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki-netic energy is multiplied by four.

Given that the passengers of the vehicle inour example do not have their seat belts fas-tened, in the event of a collision the entireamount of the passengers' kinetic energy willbe only absorbed by the mentioned impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces areeven higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts arenot “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-oncollision, they will move forward at the samespeed their vehicle was travelling just beforethe impact. This example applies not only tohead-on collisions, but to all accidents andcollisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on thebody in a collision are so great that it is not »

73

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

possible to brace oneself with one's hands.In a frontal collision, unbelted passengersare thrown forward and will make violent con-tact with the steering wheel, dash panel,windscreen or whatever else is in the way››› Fig. 89.

It is also important for rear passengers towear seat belts properly, as they could other-wise be thrown forward violently through thevehicle interior in an accident. Passengers inthe rear seats who do not use seat belts en-danger not only themselves but also the frontoccupants ››› Fig. 90.

How to properly adjust yourseatbelt

Fastening and unfastening the seatbelt

Fig. 91 Positioning and removing the seatbelt buckle.

Fig. 92 Position of seat belt during pregnan-cy.


Fasten your seat belt

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection ifthe seat belt is not positioned correctly.

● Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.

● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latchplate and pull it slowly across your chest andlap.

● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for theappropriate seat and push it down until it issecurely locked with an audible click››› Fig. 91 A.

● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate issecurely engaged in the buckle.

74

Seat belts

The seat belts are equipped with an automat-ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free-dom of movement is permitted when theshoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur-ing sudden braking, during travel in steepareas or bends and during acceleration, theautomatic retractor on the shoulder belt islocked.

The automatic belt retractors on the frontseats are fitted with seat belt tensioners››› page 75.

Releasing the seat belt

● Press the red button on the belt buckle››› Fig. 91 B. The latch plate is released andsprings out ››› .

● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rollsup easily and the trim is not damaged.

Positioning seat belts

Seat belts offer their maximum protection on-ly when they are properly positioned.

WARNING

● The seat belts offer best protection onlywhen the backrests are in an upright positionand the seat belts have been fastened prop-erly.

● Never put the latch plate in the buckle ofanother seat. If you do this, the seat belt willnot protect you properly and the risk of injuryis increased.

● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-cle is in motion. If you do, you increase therisk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.

● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se-vere injuries in the event of an accident.

● For pregnant women, the lap part of theseat belt must lie as low as possible over thepelvis, never across the stomach, and alwayslie flat so that no pressure is exerted on theabdomen ››› Fig. 92.

● Always engage the retractor lock when youare securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1››› page 82.

● Read and observe the warnings ››› page 72.

Seat belt tensioners

How the seat belt tensioner works


The seat belts for the occupants in the frontseats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sen-sors will trigger the belt tensioners only dur-ing severe head-on, lateral and rear-end colli-sions and only if the seat belt is worn. Thisretracts and tightens the seat belts, reducingthe forward motion of the occupants.

The belt tensioners will not be triggered inthe event of minor collisions, if the vehicle

overturns, or in accidents where no majorforces act on the vehicle.

Note

● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, afine dust is produced. This is normal and it isnot an indication of fire in the vehicle.

● The relevant safety requirements must beobserved when the vehicle or components ofthe system are scrapped. Specialised work-shops are familiar with these regulations,which are also available to you.

Service and disposal of belt tension-ers

The belt tensioners are components of theseat belts that are installed in the seats ofyour vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-ers or remove and install parts of the systemwhen performing other repair work, the seatbelt may be damaged. The consequence maybe that, in the event of an accident, the belttensioners function incorrectly or may notfunction at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-sioner is not reduced and that removed partsdo not cause any injuries or environmentalpollution, regulations, which are known tothe specialised workshops, must be ob-served. »

75

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

WARNING

● Improper use or repairs not carried out byqualified mechanics increase the risk of se-vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners mayfail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir-cumstances.

● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove orinstall parts of the belt tensioners or seatbelts.

● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto-matic retractor cannot be repaired.

● Any work on the belt tensioners and seatbelts, including the removal and refitting ofsystem parts in conjunction with other repairwork, must be performed by a specialisedworkshop only.

● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-tection for one accident and must be changedif they have been activated.

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why is it so important to wear a seatbelt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the bestprotection, the seat belt must always be wornproperly and the correct sitting position mustbe assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seatbelts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle'soverall passive safety system. Please bear inmind that the airbag system can only work ef-fectively when the vehicle occupants arewearing their seat belts correctly and haveadjusted the head restraints properly. There-fore, it is most important to properly wear theseat belts at all times, not only because thisis required by law in most countries, but alsofor your safety ››› page 71, Why wear a seatbelt?.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, soif you are not properly seated when the air-bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicleoccupants assume a correct sitting positionwhile travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may causea passenger not wearing a seat belt to bethrown forward into the area of the deploying

airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag mayinflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu-pant. This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis-tance between yourself and the front airbag.This way, the front airbags can completelydeploy when triggered, providing their maxi-mum protection.

The most important factors that will triggeran airbag are: the type of accident, the angleof collision and the speed of the vehicle.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-pends primarily on the vehicle decelerationrate resulting from the collision and detectedby the control unit. If the vehicle decelerationoccurring during the collision and measuredby the control unit remains below the speci-fied reference values, the front, side and/orcurtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in-to account that the visible damage in a vehi-cle involved in an accident, no matter howserious, is not a determining factor for theairbags to have been triggered.

WARNING

● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum-ing an incorrect sitting position can lead tocritical or fatal injuries.

● All vehicle occupants, including children,who are not properly belted can sustain criti-cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered.Children up to 12 years old should always

76

Airbag system

travel on the rear seat. Never transportchildren in the vehicle if they are not restrain-ed or the restraint system is not appropriatefor their age, size or weight.

● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if youlean forward or to the side while travelling orassume an incorrect sitting position, there isa substantially increased risk of injury. Thisincreased risk of injury will be further in-creased if you are struck by an inflating air-bag.

● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflatingairbag, always wear the seat belt properly››› page 71.

● Always adjust the front seats properly.

Description of the airbag system


The airbag system is not a substitute for theseat belts. The airbag system offers addition-al protection for the driver and passenger incombination with the seat belts.

The airbag system comprises the followingmodules (as per vehicle equipment):

● Electronic control unit

● Front airbags for driver and passenger

● Knee airbag for the driver

● Side airbags

● Head airbag

● Airbag control lamp on the instrumentpanel

● Key-operated switch for front passenger air-bag

● Control lamp to disconnect/connect thefront airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitoredelectronically. The airbag control lamp will il-luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the controllamp :

● does not light up when the ignition isswitched on,

● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignitionis switched on

● turns off and then lights up again after theignition is switched on

● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle ismoving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:

● the ignition is switched off

● there is a minor frontal collision

● there is a minor side collision

● there is a rear-end collision

● the vehicle turns over.

WARNING

● The seat belts and airbags can only providemaximum protection if the occupants areseated correctly ››› page 66, Correct positionfor passengers.

● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system,have the system checked immediately by aspecialised workshop. Otherwise there is adanger that during a collision, the systemmay fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, withinthousandths of a second, to provide addi-tional protection in the event of an accident.A fine dust may develop when the airbag de-ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-tion of fire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to functionwhen the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air-bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli-sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factors

The conditions that lead to the airbag systemactivating in each situation cannot be gener-alised. Some factors play an important role, »

77

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

such as the properties of the object the vehi-cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehiclespeed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-tory and activates the respective restraintsystem.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-fined reference value in the control unit theairbags will not be triggered, even thoughthe accident may cause extensive damage tothe car.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous head-on collisions

● Driver airbag.

● Front passenger front airbag

● Knee airbag for the driver.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous side-on collisions

● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.

● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.

● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-cident.

In an accident with airbag activation:

● the interior lights switch on (if the interiorlight switch is in the courtesy light position);

● the hazard warning lights switch on;

● all doors are unlocked;

● the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

Airbag safety instructions

Front airbags


WARNING

● The deployment space between the frontpassengers and the airbags must not in anycase be occupied by other passenger, petsand objects.

● The airbags provide protection for just oneaccident; replace them once they have de-ployed.

● It is also important not to attach any ob-jects such as cup holders or telephonemountings to the surfaces covering the air-bag units.

● Do not attempt to modify components ofthe airbag system in any way.

Knee airbag*


WARNING

● The knee airbag is deployed in front of thedriver's knees. Always keep the deploymentareas of the knee airbags free.

● Never not fix objects to the cover or in thedeployment area of the knee airbag.

● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is adistance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) betweenyour knees and the location of the this air-bag. If your physical constitution preventsyou from meeting these requirements, makesure you contact a specialised workshop.

Side airbags*


WARNING

● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you leanforward, or are not seated correctly while thevehicle is in motion, you are at a greater riskof injury if the side airbag system is triggeredin an accident.

● In order for the side airbags to provide theirmaximum protection, the prescribed sitting

78

Airbag system

position must always be maintained withseat belts fastened while travelling.

● In a side-on collision the side airbags willnot work if the sensors do not correctly meas-ure the pressure increase on the interior ofthe doors, due to air escaping through theareas with holes or openings in the door pan-el.

● Never drive if the interior door panels havebeen removed or if the panels have not beencorrectly fitted.

● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakersin the door panels have been removed, un-less the holes left by the loudspeakers havebeen closed properly.

● Always check that the openings are closedor covered if loudspeakers or other equip-ment are fitted inside the door panels.

● Occupants of the outer seats must nevercarry any objects or pets in the deploymentspace between them and the airbags, or al-low children or other passengers to travel inthis position. It is also important not to at-tach any accessories (such as cup holders) tothe doors. This would impair the protectionoffered by the side airbags.

● The built-in coat hooks should be used onlyfor lightweight clothing. Do not leave anyheavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-ster because the system may be damaged. Inthis case, the side airbags would not be trig-gered.

● Under no circumstances should protectivecovers be fitted over seats with side airbagsunless the covers have been approved for usein your vehicle. Because the airbag deploysfrom the side of the backrest, the use of con-ventional seat covers would obstruct the sideairbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec-tiveness.

● Any damage to the original seat upholsteryor around the seams of the side airbag unitsmust be repaired immediately by a special-ised workshop.


● Any work on the side airbag system or re-moval and installation of the airbag compo-nents for other repairs (such as removal ofthe front seat) should only be performed by aspecialised workshop. Otherwise, faults mayoccur during the airbag system operation.

● Do not attempt to modify components ofthe airbag system in any way.

Curtain airbags*


WARNING

● In order for the head-protection airbags toprovide their maximum protection, the pre-

scribed sitting position must always be main-tained with seat belts fastened while travel-ling.

● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag mustbe disabled in those vehicles fitted with ascreen dividing the interior of the vehicle.See your technical service to make this ad-justment.

● There must be no other persons, animals orobjects between the occupants of the outerseats and the deployment space of the head-protection airbags so that the head-protec-tion airbag can deploy completely without re-striction and provide the greatest possibleprotection. Therefore, sun blinds which havenot been expressly approved for use in yourvehicle may not be attached to the side win-dows

● The built-in coat hooks should be used onlyfor lightweight clothing. Do not leave anyheavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang-ers.


● Any work on the head-protection airbagsystem or removal and installation of the air-bag components for other repairs (such as re-moval of the roof lining) should only be per-formed by a specialised workshop. Other-wise, faults may occur during the airbag sys-tem operation.

● Do not attempt to modify components ofthe airbag system in any way. »

79

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

● The side and head airbags are managedthrough sensors located in the interior of thefront doors. To ensure the correct operation ofthe side and curtain airbags neither thedoors nor the door panels should be modifiedin any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If thefront door is damaged, the airbag systemmay not work correctly. All work carried outon the front door must be done in a special-ised workshop.

Deactivating airbags

Deactivation of front airbag

Fig. 93 Control lamp for disabling the frontpassenger front airbag on the dash panel

It lights up on the combi-in-strument

Fault in airbagsystem and seatbelt tensioners.

Have the system checked immedi-ately by a specialised workshop.

It lights up on the dash panel

Fault in the air-bag system.

Have the system checked immedi-ately by a specialised workshop.

Front passengerfront airbag dis-abled.

Check whether the airbag should re-main disabled.

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passengerfront airbag ena-bled.

The control lamp switches off about60 seconds after the ignition isturned on or after enabling of thefront passenger front airbag with thekey lock switch.

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,the lamp does not re-main lit, or if it is lit together with the controllamp on the dash panel, there may be afault in the airbag system ››› .

The disabling of airbags is only carried out incertain cases, i.e. if:

● a child seat is required in the front passen-ger seat with the child facing in the oppositedirection to the direction of travel (in somecountries, due to divergent legal require-ments, facing in the direction of travel)››› page 84;

● despite the driver's seat being in the cor-rect position, a minimum distance of 25 cmcannot be maintained between the centre ofthe steering wheel and the driver's torso,

● installation of special devices is required inthe steering wheel area due to a physical dis-ability,

● if you have special seats installed (e.g. anorthopaedic seat without side airbags).

The front passenger front airbag can be disa-bled using the switch ››› page 81.

We recommend that you contact an author-ised SEAT dealer for the disabling of other air-bags.

Airbag system control

The airbag system availability is controlledelectronically, regardless of whether an air-bag is disabled.

80

Airbag system

If an airbag was disabled using a diagnosticssystem:● the airbag system warning lamp illumi-nates after switching on the ignition forabout 4 seconds, and then flashes for about12 seconds.

If the airbag has been disabled with the air-bag switch on the side of the dash panel:● the airbag control lamp will illuminatefor about 4 seconds after the ignition isswitched on,

● The airbag is disabled, signalled with thewarning lamp which lights up with theword placed in the cen-tre part of the dash panel ››› Fig. 94.

WARNING

In the event of a fault in the airbag system,the airbag may not trigger correctly, may failto trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly,leading to severe or fatal injuries.

● Have the airbag system checked immedi-ately by a specialised workshop.

● Never mount a child seat in the front pas-senger seat or remove the mounted childseat! The front passenger front airbag maydeploy during an accident in spite of thefault.

CAUTION

Always pay attention to any lit control lampsand to the corresponding descriptions and in-structions to avoid damage to the vehicle.

Note

● Follow the current legislation in your coun-try regarding the disabling of airbags.

● At your authorised SEAT dealer you can findinformation on which vehicle airbags can bedisabled.

Front passenger front airbag switch

Fig. 94 Front passenger front airbag switch.

Fig. 95 Warning lamp for disabling the frontpassenger airbag.


The switch disables only the front passengerfront airbag.

Switching on the airbag

– Switch the ignition off.

– Open the glove compartment on the frontpassenger side.

– Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 94. About 3/4 of the key should en-ter, as far as it will go.

– Then turn the key gently to the ON position.Do not force it if you feel resistance, andmake sure you have inserted the key fully.

– Close the passenger side storage compart-ment. »

81

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

– Check, with the ignition switched on, thatthe control lamp ››› Fig. 95 does notlight up, with the word in the centre part of the dash panel.

– The warning lamp is illuminated for60 seconds in the centre part of the dashpanel.

Control lamp with the word (front passenger airbag disabled)

If the front passenger front airbag is disa-bled, after switching on the ignition, the con-trol lamp will light up for several seconds,then it will switch off for about 1 s and thenswitch on again.

If the control lamp is flashing, there is a faultin the disabling of the airbag system ››› .Please go immediately to an Official Service.

WARNING

● The driver of the vehicle is responsible fordisabling or switching on the airbag.

● Always switch off the ignition before disa-bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to doso could result in a fault in the airbag deacti-vation system.

● Never leave the key in the airbag disablingswitch as it could get damaged or enable ordisable the airbag during driving.

● If the (airbag disabled) control lampflashes, the front passenger front airbag willnot trigger in the event of an accident! Have

the system immediately checked by an Offi-cial Service.

Transporting children safely

Safety for children

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned fromaccident statistics, we recommend that chil-dren under 12 years of age travel in the rearseats. Depending on their age, height andweight, children travelling in rear seats mustuse a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-sons, the child seat should be installed in therear seat, behind the front passenger seat orin the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forcesacting in a collision apply also to children››› page 73. But unlike adults, children do nothave fully developed muscle and bone struc-tures. This means that children are subject toa greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children mustalways use special child restraint systemswhen travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod-ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-gramme, which includes systems for all agesmade by “Peke” (not for all countries).

These systems have been especially de-signed and approved, complying with theECE-R44. regulation.

82

Transporting children safely

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats. Always readand note ››› page 83.

We recommend you always carry the manu-facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-gether with the on-board documentation.

Important information regarding thefront passenger's airbag


Read and always observe the safety informa-tion included in the following chapters:

● Safety distance with respect to the passen-ger airbag ››› page 76.

● Objects between the passenger and thepassenger side airbag ››› in Front airbagson page 78.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena-bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facingbackward since the airbag can strike the seatwith such force that it can cause serious orfatal injuries. Children up to 12 years oldshould always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you totransport children on the rear seats. This isthe safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-

bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 81.When transporting children, use a child seatsuitable for the age and size of each child››› page 84.

WARNING

● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of anaccident increases.

● An inflating front passenger airbag canstrike the rear-facing child seat and project itwith great force against the door, the roof orthe backrest.

● Never install a child seat facing backwardson the front passenger seat unless the frontpassenger front airbag has been disabled.Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child!However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca-ses, to transport a child in the front passen-ger seat, the front passenger front airbagmust always be disabled ››› page 80. If thepassenger seat has a height adjustment op-tion, move it to the highest, most upright po-sition. If you have a fixed seat, do not installany child restraint system in this location.

● For those vehicles that do not include a keylock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi-cle must be taken to a technical service.

● All vehicle occupants, especially children,must assume the proper sitting position andbe properly belted in while travelling.

● Never hold children or babies on your lap,this can result in potentially fatal injuries tothe child!

● Never allow a child to be transported in avehicle without being properly secured, or tostand up or kneel on a seat while travelling.In an accident, the child could be flungthrough the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in-juries to themselves and to the other vehicleoccupants.

● If children assume an improper sitting posi-tion when the vehicle is moving, they exposethemselves to greater risk of injury in theevent of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in anaccident. This is particularly important if thechild is travelling on the front passenger seatand the airbag system is triggered in an acci-dent; as this could cause serious injury oreven death.

● A suitable child seat can protect your child!

● Never leave a child alone in the child seator inside the vehicle because depending onthe season, very high temperatures may bereached inside a parked vehicle, which couldbe fatal.

● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tallmust not wear a normal seat belt without achild seat, as this could cause injuries to theabdominal and neck areas during a suddenbraking manoeuvre or in an accident.

● Do not allow the seat belt to become twis-ted and the seat belt should be properly inplace ››› page 71.

● Only one child may occupy a child seat››› page 84, Child seats. »

83

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

● When a child seat is mounted in the rearseats, the door child-proof lock should be ac-tivated ››› page 123.

Child seats

Safety instructions


WARNING

When travelling, children must be secured inthe vehicle with a restraint system suitablefor age, weight and size.

● Read and always observe information andwarnings concerning the use of child seats››› page 83.

WARNING

The retaining rings are designed only for usewith “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system childseats.

● Never secure other child seats that do nothave the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, orretaining belts or objects to the fasteningrings - this can result in potentially fatal inju-ries to the child.

● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* se-curing rings.

WARNING

An undue installation of the safety seat willincrease the risk of injury in the event of acrash.

● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in theluggage compartment.

● Never secure or tie luggage or other itemsto the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upperones (Top Tether).

Categorisation of child seats intogroups

Use only child seats that are officially ap-proved and suitable for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic Commis-sion for Europe Regulation.

The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-ries:

Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9months)

Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18months)

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4years old)

Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7years old)

Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7years old)

Child seats that have been tested and ap-proved under the ECE R44 standard bear thetest mark on the seat (the letter E in a circlewith the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include themanufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manualtogether with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats fromthe Original Accessories Catalogue. Thesechild seats have been designed and testedfor use in SEAT vehicles. You can find theright child seat for your model and age groupat SEAT dealers.

84

Self-help

Emergencies

Self-help

Vehicle tool kit anti-puncture kit*

The tools and anti-puncture kit* are storedunder the floor panel in the luggage compart-ment.

To access the vehicle tools:

– Lift up the floor surface by the plastic han-dle until it is fastened to the tabs on bothsides.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the an-ti-puncture kit* is located under the floorpanel in the luggage compartment.

The tool kit includes:

● Jack*

● Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov-er*/wheel bolt cap clip.

● Box spanner for wheel bolts*

● Towline anchorage

● Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

● Towing bracket device

Some of the items listed are only provided incertain model versions, or are optional ex-tras.

Note

The jack does not generally require any main-tenance. If required, it should be greased us-ing universal type grease.

Tyre repair

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

Read the additional information carefully››› page 56

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)will reliably seal punctures caused by thepenetration of a foreign body of up to about4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob-jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,you must again check the tyre pressure about10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set ifthe vehicle is parked in a safe place, you arefamiliar with the procedure and you have thenecessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, youshould seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the followingcases:

● If the wheel rim has been damaged.

● In outside temperatures below -20°C (-4°F).

● In the event of cuts or perforations in thetyre greater than 4 mm.

● If you have been driving with very low pres-sure or a completely flat tyre.

● If the sealant bottle has passed its use bydate.

WARNING

Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-gerous, especially when filling the tyre at theroadside. Please observe the following rulesto minimise the risk of injury:

● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.Park it at a safe distance from surroundingtraffic to fill the tyre.

● Ensure the ground on which you park is flatand solid.

● All passengers and particularly childrenmust keep a safe distance from the work area.

● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users.

● Use the tyre mobility system only if you arefamiliar with the necessary procedures. Oth-erwise, you should seek professional assis-tance.

● The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo-rary emergency use only until you can reachthe nearest specialised workshop.

● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo-bility set as soon as possible. »

85

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

● The sealant is a health hazard and must becleaned immediately if it comes into contactwith the skin.

● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of thereach of small children.

● Never use an equivalent jack, even if it hasbeen approved for your vehicle.

● Always stop the engine, apply the hand-brake lever firmly and engage gear if using amanual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk ofvehicle involuntary movement.

WARNING

A tyre filled with sealant does not have thesame performance properties as a conven-tional tyre.

● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking andfast cornering.

● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximumspeed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then checkthe tyre.


Dispose of used or expired sealant observingany legal requirements.

Note

A new bottle of sealant can be purchased atSEAT dealerships.

Note

Take into account the separate instructionmanual of the tyre mobility set* manufactur-er.

Contents of the tyre mobility system*

Fig. 96 Standard representation: contents ofthe anti-puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneaththe floor covering in the luggage compart-ment. It includes the following components››› Fig. 96:

Tyre valve remover

Sticker indicating maximum speed “max.80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”

Filler tube with cap

1

2

3

Air compressor

Tube for inflating tyres

Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-toring system (it can also be integrated inthe compressor).

Air bleed screw (in its place, the compres-sor may have a button).

ON/OFF switch

12 volt connector

Bottle of sealant

Spare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at thelower end for a valve insert. The valve insertcan only be screwed or unscrewed in thisway. This also applies to its replacement part11 .

WARNING

When inflating the wheel, the air compressorand the inflator tube may become hot.

● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.

● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube orhot air compressor on flammable material.

● Allow them to cool before storing the de-vice.

● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to atleast 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre istoo badly damaged. The sealant is not in agood condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

86

Self-help

CAUTION

Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid over-heating! Before switching on the air compres-sor again, let it cool for several minutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 96 5 againand check the pressure on the gauge 6 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:

● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealedsufficiently with the tyre mobility set.

● You should obtain professional assistance››› .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:

● Set the tyre pressure to the correct valueagain.

● Carefully resume your journey until youreach the nearest specialised workshop with-out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).

● Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNING

Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerousand can cause accidents and serious injury.

● Do not continue driving if the tyre pressureis 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.

● Seek specialist assistance.

Manual unlocking/locking

Introduction

Read the additional information carefully››› page 11, ››› page 12.

The doors, rear lid and panoramic tilting sun-roof can be locked manually and partiallyopened, for example if the key or the centrallocking is damaged.

WARNING

Opening and closing doors carelessly cancause serious injury.

● If the vehicle is locked from outside, thedoors and windows cannot be opened fromthe inside.

● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the car. They could be trapped in thecar in an emergency and will not be able toget themselves to safety.

● Depending on the time of the year, temper-atures inside a locked and closed vehicle canbe extremely high or extremely low resultingin serious injuries and illness or even death,particularly for young children.

WARNING

Getting in the way of the doors and the rearlid is dangerous and can lead to serious in-jury.

● Open and close the doors and the rear lidonly when there is nobody in the way.

CAUTION

When opening and closing in an emergency,carefully disassemble components and thenreassemble them carefully to avoid damageto the vehicle.

Changing the windscreen wiperblades

Changing the windscreen and rearwindow wiper blades


The windscreen wiper blades are supplied asstandard with a layer of graphite. This layer isresponsible for ensuring that the wipe is si-lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, thenoise of the water as it is wiped across thewindscreen will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades regu-larly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, »

87

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

they should be changed if they are damaged,or cleaned if they are dirty ››› .

Damaged wiper blades should be replacedimmediately. These are available from quali-fied workshops.

WARNING

Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibilityand increase the risk of accident and seriousinjury.

● Always replace damaged or worn blades orblades which do not clean the windscreencorrectly.

CAUTION

● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers couldscratch the glass.

● If products containing solvents, roughsponges or sharp objects are used to cleanthe blades, the graphite layer will be dam-aged.

● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paintthinner or similar products to clean the win-dows.

● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it mayhelp to leave the vehicle parked with the wip-ers in service position ››› page 63.

CAUTION

● To prevent damage to the bonnet and thewiper arms, only leave them in the serviceposition.

● Before driving, always lower the wiperarms.

Towing and tow-starting the ve-hicle

General information


Tow-starting means starting the engine ofthe vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling anotherthat is not roadworthy.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Accesssystem, towing is only allowed with the igni-tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle istowed with the engine switched off and theignition connected. Depending on the batterycharge status, the drop in voltage may be solarge, even after just a few minutes, that noelectrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with

the Keyless Access system, the steeringwheel could lock up.

WARNING

If the vehicle has no electrical power, thebrake lights, turn signals and all other lightswill no longer function. Do not have the vehi-cle towed away. Failure to follow this instruc-tion could result in an accident.

WARNING

The risk of accidents is high when tow-start-ing, for example, the towed vehicle can easilybe driven into the towing vehicle.

CAUTION

If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubricantin the automatic transmission the car mayonly be towed with the driven wheels liftedclear of the road, or transported on a specialcar transporter or trailer.

CAUTION

Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m in at-tempt to start it. There is risk of damage tothe catalytic converter.

Note

● Please observe related legal requirements.

88

Self-help

● Switch on the hazard warning lights of bothvehicles. However, observe any regulationsto the contrary.

● The tow rope must not be twisted. Other-wise the front tow line anchorage could bepulled off the vehicle.

Indications for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow-star-ted. The jump start should be used instead››› page 61.

For technical reasons, towing the followingvehicles is not allowed:

● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-cause in vehicles with the Keyless Accesslocking and ignition system the steering re-mains locked and the electronic parkingbrake cannot be deactivated nor can the elec-tronic lock of the steering column be re-leased if they are activated.

● If the battery is flat, it is possible that theengine control units may not operate correct-ly.

However, if the vehicle must absolutely betow-started (in the case of manual gearbox-es):

● Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.

● Keep the clutch pressed down.

● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-ing lights.

● Once both vehicles are moving, release theclutch.

● Once the engine starts, press the clutchand disengage the gear to avoid collidingwith the towing vehicle.

Note

The vehicle can only be tow-started if theelectronic parking brake and, if appropriate,the electronic lock of the steering column aredeactivated. If the vehicle has no power sup-ply or there is an electric system fault, theengine must be tow-started to deactivate theelectronic parking brake and the electroniclock of the steering column.

Anchoring the front tow line

Fig. 97 Right side of the front bumper: tow-line anchorage screwed in.

The front towline anchorage is only mountedif the vehicle has to be towed.

There is a cover with an opening into whichthe towline anchorage is screwed on the rightpart of the front bumper.

– To open the cover press it on its left-handside.

– Take the towline anchorage out of the vehi-cle tool kit ››› page 85.

– Screw the towline anchorage into the screwconnection as far as it will go ››› Fig. 97 andtighten with the wheel brace.

After use, unscrew the towline anchorageand fit the cover back on the bumper. Put thetowline anchorage back in the vehicle tool »

89

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

kit. The towline anchorage should always bekept in the vehicle.

Rear towline anchorage

Fig. 98 Right side of the rear bumper: cover-cap.

Fig. 99 Right side of the rear bumper: towlineanchorage screwed in.

The rear towline anchorage should only bemounted if you wish to tow another vehicle.

Vehicles with towline anchorage

On the right of the rear bumper there is a cov-er which covers a threaded hole.

– Take the towline anchorage out of the vehi-cle tool set ››› page 85.

– To open the cover press it on the top rightarea ››› Fig. 98

– Screw the towline anchorage into the screwconnection as far as it will go ››› Fig. 99 andtighten with the wheel brace.

After use, unscrew the towline anchorageand put it back in the vehicle tool kit. Replacethe cover on the bumper. The towline anchor-age should always be kept in the vehicle.

WARNING

● If the towline anchorage is not screwed inas far as the stop, there is a risk of the screwconnection shearing off during towing (acci-dent risk).

● If your car has a towing bracket, only usespecial towing ropes. Risk of accident!

CAUTION

In vehicles fitted with a towing bracket, onlyuse special tow bars to prevent damage tothe ball joint. These tow bars have been spe-cially approved for use with towing brackets.

Towing vehicles with a manual gear-box

Towing is relatively straightforward.

Please observe the relevant instructions››› page 88.

The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar ortow rope in the normal way, with all fourwheels on the road; it can also be towed witheither the front or rear wheels lifted off theroad. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h(30 mph).

Towing a vehicle equipped with auto-matic gearbox

Certain restrictions must be observed whentowing your vehicle.

Please observe the relevant instructions››› page 88.

The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar ortow rope in the normal way, with all fourwheels on the ground. When doing so,please note the following points:

● Make sure the selector lever is in the N po-sition.

● The vehicle must not be towed faster than50 km/h (30 mph).

● The vehicle must not be towed further than50 km (30 miles). Reason: when the engine

90

Fuses and bulbs

is not running, the gearbox oil pump doesnot work and the gearbox is not adequatelylubricated for higher speeds or longer distan-ces.

If the vehicle has to be towed with a break-down truck, it must only be suspended at thefront wheels. Reason: the drive shafts are lo-cated on the front wheels. If the car is towedwith the rear wheels lifted off the road (I.e.travelling backwards), the drive shafts alsoturn backwards. The planetary gears in theautomatic gearbox then turn at such highspeeds that the gearbox will be severelydamaged in a short time.

Note

● If it is not possible to tow the vehicle in thenormal way, or if it has to be towed furtherthan 50 km (30 miles), it must be transportedon a special car transporter or trailer.

● Should the power supply to the selectorlever be interrupted in position P, the selectorlever will be locked. Before the vehicle can berecovered/manoeuvred you must manuallyrelease the selector lever ››› page 43.

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to variouselectrical components. Likewise, an electricalcomponent can be protected by severalfuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of theproblem has been solved. If a newly insertedfuse blows after a short time, you must havethe electrical system checked by a special-ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING

The high voltages in the electrical system cangive serious electrical shocks, causing burnsand even death!

● Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-tion system.

● Take care not to cause short circuits in theelectrical system.

WARNING

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses orbridging a current circuit without fuses cancause a fire and serious injury.

● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Onlyreplace fuses with a fuse of the same amper-age (same colour and markings) and size.

● Never repair a fuse.

● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, stapleor similar.

CAUTION

● To prevent damage to the vehicle's electricsystem, before replacing a fuse always turnoff the ignition, the lights and all electricalelements and remove the key from the igni-tion.

● If you replace a fuse with higher-ratingfuse, you could cause damage to another partof the electrical system.

● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-vent the entry of dust or humidity as they candamage the electrical system.

Note

● One component may have more than onefuse.

● Several components may run on a singlefuse.

91

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

Vehicle fuses

Fig. 100 On the driver-side dash panel: fusebox cover

Fig. 101 In the engine compartment: fuse boxcover


Only replace fuses with a fuse of the sameamperage (same colour and markings) andsize.

Opening and closing the fuse box situatedbelow the dash panel

● Opening: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 100.

● Closing: push back the cover it in until itclicks into place.

To open the engine compartment fuse box

● Open the bonnet ››› page 262.

● Press the locking tabs to release the fusebox cover ››› Fig. 101.

● Then lift the cover out.

● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.Push the locking tabs down until they clickaudibly into place.

Fuses in the vehicle interior

No. Consumers/Amps

4 Taxis 3

5 Gateway 5

6 Automatic gearbox lever 5

7Air conditioning and heating controlpanel, heating the back window.

10

8Diagnosis, handbrake switch, lightswitch, reverse light, interior lighting

10

9 Steering column 5

10 Radio display 5

12 Radio 20

No. Consumers/Amps

13 Driving mode. 15

14 Air conditioner fan 40

15 KESSY 10

16 Connectivity Box 7.5

17 Instrument panel 5

18 Rear camera 7.5

19 KESSY 7.5

21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15

22 Trailer 15

23 Right lights 40

24 Electric sunroof 30

25 Left door 30

26 Heated seats 20

28 Trailer 25

31 Left lights 40

32Control unit for parking aid, front cam-era and radar

7.5

33 Airbag 5

34Reverse switch, clima sensor, electro-chromic mirror

7.5

35Diagnosis, headlight control unit,headlight adjuster

10

92

Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumers/Amps

36 Right LED headlight 10

37 Left LED headlight 10

38 Trailer 25

39 Right door 30

40 12V socket 20

42 Central locking 40

43 Interior light 30

44 Trailer 15

45 Electric driver's seat 15

47 Rear window wiper 15

49 Starter motor; clutch sensor 5

53 Heated rear window 30

Fuse arrangement in engine compartment

No. Consumers/Amps

1 ESP control unit 40/20

2 ESP control unit 40/60

3Engine control unit (diesel/pet-rol)

30/15

4 Engine sensors 5/10

5 Engine sensors 7.5/10

6 Brake light sensor 5

No. Consumers/Amps

7 Engine power supply 5/10

8 Lambda probe 10/15

9 Engine 5/10/20

10 Fuel pump control unit 10/15/20

11 PTC 40

12 PTC 40

13 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30

15 Horn 15

16 Fuel pump control unit 5/15/20

17 Engine control unit 7.5

18 Terminal 30 (positive reference) 5

19 Front windscreen washer 30

20 Alarm horn 10

22 Engine control unit 5

23 Starter motor 30

24 PTC 40

31 Electronic differential CUPRA 15

33 Automatic gearbox pump 30

CAUTION

● Always carefully remove the fuse box cov-ers and refit them correctly to avoid problemswith your vehicle.

● Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoidthe entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humid-ity inside fuse boxes can cause damage tothe electrical system.

Note

● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter. These shouldonly be changed by a specialised workshop.

● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-pear in the following tables.

● Some of the equipment listed in the tablesbelow pertain only to certain versions of themodel or are optional extras.

● Please note that the above lists, while cor-rect at the time of printing, are subject tochange.

Changing bulbs

Topic introduction


Changing bulbs requires a certain degree ofpractical skill. »

93

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

If you choose to change the engine compart-ment lamps yourself, remember that it is adangerous area ››› in Work in the enginecompartment on page 262.

Always use identical bulbs with the samedesignation. The name can be found on thebase of the bulb holder.

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,there are different sets of headlights and taillights:

● Halogen headlights

● Full-LED main headlights*

● Halogen headlights with LED daytime run-ning lights*

● Rear bulb light

● LED rear light*

Full-LED headlight system*

Full-LED headlights handle all light functions(daylight, side light, turn signal, dippedbeam and route light) with light emitting di-odes (LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last thelifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot bereplaced. In case of headlight failure, go toan authorised workshop to have it replaced.

WARNING

● Take particular care when working on com-ponents in the engine compartment if the en-gine is warm. Risk of burns.

● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. Theglass can break when you touch the bulb,causing injury.

● When changing bulbs, please take care notto injure yourself on sharp edges, in particu-lar on the headlight housing.

CAUTION

● Remove the ignition key before working onthe electric system. Otherwise, a short circuitcould occur.

● Switch off the lights and the parking lightbefore changing a bulb.

● Take good care to avoid damaging any com-ponents.


Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis-pose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Note

● Please check at regular intervals that alllighting (especially the exterior lighting) onyour vehicle is functioning properly. This isnot only in the interest of your own safety,but also that of all other road users.

● Before changing a bulb, make sure youhave the correct new bulb.

● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb withyour bare hands, use a cloth or paper towelinstead, since the fingerprints left on theglass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen-erated by the bulb, they will be deposited onthe reflector and will impair its surface.

94

Fuses and bulbs

Change the front bulbs

Dipped headlight bulb

Fig. 102 Dipped beam headlights.

Fig. 103 Dipped beam headlights.

– Raise the bonnet.

– Move the loops ››› Fig. 102 1 in the direc-tion of the arrow and remove the cover.

– Remove connector ››› Fig. 103 2 from thebulb.

– Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 103 3

pressing inwards to the right.

– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement sothat the lug on the base fits into the recesson the reflector.

Day light bulb

Fig. 104 Day light bulb.


– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 104 1 to theleft and pull.

– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulbholder and turning it anti-clockwise at thesame time.

– Installation involves all of the above stepsin reverse sequence.

Turn signal bulb

Fig. 105 Turn signal bulb.

Fig. 106 Turn signal bulb.


– Move the loop ››› Fig. 105 1 in the direc-tion of the arrow and remove the cover.

– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 106 2 anti-clockwise and pull. »

95

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulbholder and turning it anti-clockwise at thesame time.


Main beam headlight bulb

Fig. 107 Main beam headlight bulb.

Fig. 108 Main beam headlight bulb.


– Move the loop ››› Fig. 107 1 in the direc-tion of the arrow and remove the cover.

– Slide connector ››› Fig. 108 2 to the left orright and pull.

– Remove the bulb by disconnecting the con-nector.


Fog light bulb*3 Valid only for versions with incandescent bulbs

Fig. 109 Fog light: extracting the grille.

96

Fuses and bulbs

Fig. 110 Fog light: remove the bulb holder

Follow the steps indicated:

Remove the screw ››› Fig. 109 1 fromthe fog light grille using a screwdriverand extract the grille.

Remove the 3 screws ››› Fig. 109 2 .

Remove the metal clip situated on theupper part of the fog light by pullingaway from the vehicle 3 and takethe fog light out.

Remove the connector ››› Fig. 110 1

from the bulb.

Turn the bulb holder 2 anti-clockwiseand pull.

Remove the bulb by pressing on thebulb holder and turning it anticlockwiseat the same time.

Installation involves all of the abovesteps in reverse sequence.

Check that the bulb works properly.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Note

● Due to the difficulty of accessing fog lightbulbs, have them replaced at a TechnicalService or specialised workshop.

● LED fog light bulbs should be replaced byspecialised personnel.

Changing incandescent rearlight bulbs

Rear lights summary

Tail lights on side panel

Turn signal PY21W NA LL

Side light and brake light P21W LL

Tail lights on the rear lid

Left side


Fog lights H21 W

Right side


Reverse light P21W LL

The table corresponds to a right-hand trafficvehicle. The position of lights may vary ac-cording to the country.

97

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

Rear bulbs (in the side panel)

Fig. 111 Luggage compartment: location ofthe bolt securing the tail light unit. Removethe rear light unit from side panel.

Fig. 112 Retaining tabs on reverse side of taillight.

– Check which of the bulbs is defective.

– Open the rear lid.

– Remove the cover by prying the flat side ofa screwdriver into the recess and removethe cover from the opening ››› Fig. 111 1 .

– Carefully loosen the screw located behindthe cover with a screwdriver, turning it anti-clockwise ››› Fig. 111 2 .

– Tilt the light in the direction of the arrowsuntil it comes out of its housing (positions

3 and 4 ) ››› Fig. 111.

– Remove the bulb holder ››› Fig. 112 unlock-ing the retaining tabs 1 .

– Change the damaged bulb.

– To refit follow the steps in reverse order,taking special care when fitting the bulbholder. The securing tabs must click intoplace.

CAUTION

Take care when removing the rear light unit tomake sure there is no damage to the paint-work or any of its components.

Note

Make sure you have a soft cloth ready toplace under the glass on the rear light unit, toavoid any scratches.

98

Fuses and bulbs

Rear lights bulbs (in the rear lid)

Fig. 113 Remove the cover from the rear lidand detach the bulb holder.

Fig. 114 Position of the bulbs in the bulbholder

The rear lid must be open to change thebulbs.

– Remove the rear lid cover in the directionindicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 113 .

– Unlock the retaining tabs A of the bulbholder, following the direction of arrows 1

and 2 ››› Fig. 113 .

– Remove the bulb holder by turning it in thedirection of arrow 3 ››› Fig. 113 .

– Lightly press the defective bulb into thebulb holder 1 , then turn it to the left 2

and remove it ››› Fig. 114.

– Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulbholder and turn it to the right as far as itwill go.

– Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints fromthe glass part of the bulb.

– Check that the new bulb works properly.

– Reinstall the bulb holder making sure thatlocking clips A ››› Fig. 113 are properlyclipped.

– Replace the cover of the rear lid lining.

Rear LED light bulb (in the rear lid)

Fig. 115 Remove the cover from the rear lid

Fig. 116 Remove the bulb holder. »

99

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

The rear lid must be open to change thebulbs.

– Remove the rear lid cover in the directionindicated ››› Fig. 115.

– Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise in thedirection of the arrow 1 ››› Fig. 116.

– Remove the bulb holder from its housing2 .

– Replace the defective bulb and return thebulb holder to its housing, following thesame steps in reverse order.

– Check that the new bulb works properly.

Changing number plate light bulbs

Fig. 117 In the rear bumper: number platelight.

Fig. 118 Number plate light: Remove the bulbholder.

Follow the steps indicated:

1. Press the number plate light in the direc-tion of the arrow ››› Fig. 117.

2. Remove the number plate bulb slightly.

3. In the connector lock, turn ››› Fig. 118 to-wards the arrow 1 and pull the connec-tor.

4. Rotate the bulb holder in the direction ofarrow 2 and extract it with the bulb.

5. Replace the defective bulb with a newbulb with the same features.

6. Insert the bulb holder in the number platelight and turn in the opposite direction ofarrow 2 until it stops.

7. Plug the connector into the bulb holder.

Note

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,the number plate lights may be LEDs. LEDshave an estimated life that exceeds than thatof the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go to anauthorised workshop for replacement.

100

Operation

Fig. 119 Instruments and controls.

102

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displays

General instrument panel

Door release lever

Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Electric control to adjust exteriormirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Control lever for:

– Turn signals and main beamheadlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

– Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

– Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

– Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 195

Depending on equipment fitted:

– Lever for cruise control . . . . . . . . . . 195

Steering wheel with horn and

– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

– On-board computer controls . . . . 30

– Controls for radio, telephone,navigation and speech dialoguesystem ››› Booklet Radio

– Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 182

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Control lever for:

– Windscreen wipers and washer . . 139

– Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . 139

– On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Depending on equipment fitted: ra-dio or display for Easy Connect(navigation, radio, TV/video) . . . . . . 110

Depending on the equipment, but-tons for:

– SEAT driving modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

– Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

– Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

– Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . 135

– Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

– Airbag off display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Depending on the equipment,glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . . 149

– CD player* and/or SD card*››› Booklet Radio

Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Front passenger airbag switch . . . . 81

Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Passenger seat heating control . . . . 145

Depending on the equipment, con-trols for:

– Heating and ventilation system ormanual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .48, 47

– Automatic air conditioner . . . . . . . 45

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Depending on the equipment:

– USB/AUX-IN input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

– Connectivity Box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

– Storage compartment

Depending on equipment fitted,gear lever or selector lever for:

– Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

– Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Electronic parking brake switch . . . 172

Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Starter button (Keyless Access lock-ing and ignition system) . . . . . . . . . . 169

Driver's seat heating control . . . . . . 145

Ignition lock (vehicles without Key-less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Adjustable steering column . . . . . . . 16

Storage compartment

Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Note

● Some of the equipment listed in this sec-tion is only fitted on certain models or are op-tional extras. »

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

103

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● A separate Instructions Manual is enclosedif the vehicle is equipped with a factory-fittedradio, CD player, AUX IN connection or navi-gation system.

● The arrangement of switches and controlson right-hand drive models* may be slightlydifferent from the layout shown in

››› page 102. However, the symbols used toidentify the controls are the same.

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Instruments

View of instrument panel

Fig. 120 Instrument panel, on dash panel

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 120: Rev counter (with the engine running, inhundreds of revolutions per minute).

1 The beginning of the red zone of the revcounter indicates the maximum speed inany gear after running-in and with the

104


engine hot. However, it is advisable tochange up a gear or move the selectorlever to D (or lift your foot off the acceler-ator) before the needle reaches the redzone ››› .

Engine coolant temperature display››› page 107 or the natural gas level indi-cator in vehicles with natural gas engine(CNG) ››› page 108.

Displays on the screen ››› page 105.

Adjuster button and display››› page 107.

Speedometer.

Fuel gauge ››› page 108.

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, withthe risk of injury.

● Do not operate the instrument panel con-trols when driving.

CAUTION

● To prevent damage to the engine, the revcounter needle should only remain in the redzone for a short period of time.

● When the engine is cold, avoid high revsand heavy acceleration and do not make theengine work hard.

2

3

4

5

6


Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel con-sumption and noise.

Rev counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en-gine revolutions per minute ››› Fig. 120 1 .

Together with the gear-change indicator, therev counter offers you the possibility of usingthe engine of your vehicle at a suitablespeed.

The start of the red zone on the dial indicatesthe maximum engine speed which may beused briefly when the engine is warm and af-ter it has been run in properly. Before reach-ing this range, you should change to a highergear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or forautomatic gearboxes put the selector lever in“D” or take your foot off the accelerator ped-al.

We recommend that you avoid high revs andthat you follow the recommendations on thegear-change indicator. Consult the additionalinformation in ››› page 32, Gear-changeindicator.

CAUTION

Never allow the rev counter needle 1

››› Fig. 120 to go into the red zone on the

scale for more than a very brief period, other-wise there is a risk of engine damage.


Changing up a gear early will help you to savefuel and minimise emissions and enginenoise.

Indications on the display

A variety of information can be viewed on theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 120 3 , de-pending on the vehicle equipment:

● Bonnet, rear lid and doors open››› page 33.

● Warning and information messages››› page 33.

● Distance travelled ››› page 107.

● Time ››› page 106.

● Navigation instructions.

● Outside temperature ››› page 32.

● Compass ››› page 106.

● Shift lever position ››› page 180.

● Recommended gear (manual gearbox)››› page 32.

● Multifunction display (MFD) and menuswith different setting options ››› page 30.

● Service interval display ››› page 37. »

105

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Second speed display ››› page 30.

● Speed warning function ››› page 37.

● Start-Stop system status display››› page 191.

● Active cylinder management display(ACT®)* ››› page 188

● Signs recognised by the traffic signal de-tection system ››› page 222

● Low consumption driving status (ECO)››› page 106

● Identifying letters on engine (MKB).

Distance travelled

The odometer registers the total distancetravelled by the car.

The odometer (trip) shows the distancetravelled since the last odometer reset. Thelast digit of the trip recorder indicates distan-ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.

● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 120 4 to re-set the trip recorder to 0.

● Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3seconds and the previous value will be dis-played.

Time

● To set the time, keep the button ››› Fig. 1204 pressed for more than 3 seconds to select

the hour or minute display.

● To continue setting the time, press the up-per or lower part of the button 4 . Hold but-ton down to scroll through the numbersquickly.

● Press the button 4 again in order to finishsetting the time.

The time can also be set via the buttonand SETUP function button in the Easy Con-nect system ››› page 110.

Compass

With the ignition on and the navigation sys-tem on, the cardinal point corresponding tothe direction of travel of the vehicle is dis-played on the instrument panel.

Selector lever position

The selected gear is displayed on the side ofthe selector lever and on the instrument pan-el display. In positions D and S, and with theTiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis-played.

Recommended gear (manual gearbox)

The recommended gear in order to save fuelis displayed on the instrument panel whileyou are driving ››› page 32.

Second speed display (mph or km/h)

In addition to the speedometer, the speedcan also be displayed in a different unit ofmeasurement (in miles or in km per hour).

This option cannot be deactivated in modelsdestined for countries in which the secondspeed must always be visible.

The second speed display can be adjusted inthe Easy Connect system via the buttonand the SETUP function button ››› page 110.

Speed warning

When the speed setting is exceeded, this willbe indicated on the instrument panel display.This is very useful, for example when usingwinter tyres that are not designed for drivingat the maximum speed of the vehicle››› page 37.

The speed warning settings can be adjustedin the Easy Connect system via the buttonand the SETUP function button ››› page 110.

Start-Stop operating display

Updated information relating to the status isdisplayed on the instrument panel››› page 191.

Low consumption driving status (ECO)*

Depending on the equipment, when driving,the “ECO” display appears on the instrumentpanel when the vehicle is in low consump-tion status due to active cylinder manage-ment (ACT®)* ››› page 188.

106


Identifying letters on engine (MKB)

Hold the button ››› Fig. 120 4 down for morethan 15 seconds to display the identifyingletters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To dothis, the ignition must be switched on andthe engine switched off.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warningand control lamps on page 109.

WARNING

Even though outside temperatures are abovefreezing, some roads and bridges may be icy.

● At outside temperatures above +4°C(+39°F), even when the “ice crystal symbol”is not visible, there may still be patches of iceon the road.

● Do not rely on the outside temperature in-dicator!

Note

● Different versions of the instrument panelare available and therefore the versions andinstructions on the display may vary. In thecase of displays without warning or informa-tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively bythe warning lamps.

● Depending on the equipment, some set-tings and instructions can also be carried outin the Easy Connect system.

● When several warnings are active at thesame time, the symbols are shown succes-sively for a few seconds and will stay on untilthe fault is rectified.

Odometer

Fig. 121 Instrument panel: odometer and re-set button.

The distance covered is displayed in “kilome-tres” or miles “m”. It is possible to changethe measurement units (kilometres“km”/miles “m”) in the radio/Easy Connect*.Please refer to the Easy Connect* InstructionsManual for more details.

Odometer/trip recorder

The odometer shows the total distance cov-ered by the vehicle.

The trip recorder shows the distance that hasbeen travelled since it was last reset. It is

used to measure short trips. The last digit ofthe trip recorder indicates distances of 100metres or tenths of a mile.

The trip recorder can be set to zero by press-ing 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 121.

Fault display

If there is a fault in the instrument panel, theletters DEF will appear in the trip recorderdisplay. Have the fault repaired immediately,as far as is possible.

Coolant temperature gauge

For vehicles with no coolant temperaturegauge, a control lamp appears for highcoolant temperatures ››› page 266. Pleasenote ››› .

The coolant temperature gauge 2

››› Fig. 120 only works when the ignition isswitched on. In order to avoid engine dam-age, please read the following notes for thedifferent temperature ranges.

Engine cold

If only the diodes in the lower part of thescale light up, this indicates that the enginehas not yet reached operating temperature.Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration anddo not make the engine work hard. »

107

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Normal temperature

If in normal operations, the diodes light upuntil the central zone, it means that the en-gine has reached operating temperature. Athigh outside temperatures and when makingthe engine work hard, the diodes may contin-ue lighting up and reach the upper zone. Thisis no cause for concern, provided the controllamp does not light up on the instrumentpanel digital display.

Heat range

When the diodes light up in the upper area ofthe display and the control lamp appears on the instrument panel display, the coolanttemperature is excessive ››› page 266.

CAUTION

● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,avoid high revs, driving at high speed andmaking the engine work hard for approxi-mately the first 15 minutes when the engineis cold. The phase until the engine is warm al-so depends on the outside temperature. Ifnecessary, use the engine oil temperature*››› page 35 as a guide.

● Additional lights and other accessories infront of the air inlet reduce the cooling effectof the coolant. At high outside temperaturesand high engine loads, there is a risk of theengine overheating.

● The front spoiler also ensures proper distri-bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is

moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can re-duce the cooling effect, which could causethe engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis-tance.

Fuel - Gas level

Fig. 122 Fuel gauge.

Displays 2 and 6 ››› Fig. 120 only workwhen the ignition is switched on. When thedisplay reaches the reserve mark, the lowerdiode lights up in red and the control lamp appears ››› page 104. When the fuel level isvery low, the lower diode flashes in red.

The yellow control lamp lights up when thereserve level has been reached.

The green warning lamp lights up when thevehicle is running in natural gas operatingmode.

The green warning lamp switches off whenthe natural gas is exhausted. The enginechanges to operate with petrol.

Problem: If the vehicle is left parked for along time immediately after refuelling, thenatural gas level indicator may not accuratelyindicate the same level shown after refuellingwhen the vehicle is started up again. This isnot due to a leak in the system, but to a dropin pressure in the gas tank for technical rea-sons after a cooling phase just after refuel-ling.

Fuel level - Petrol/Diesel

Fig. 123 Fuel gauge.

The display 6 ››› Fig. 120 only works whenthe ignition is switched on. When the displayreaches the reserve mark, the lower diode

108


lights up in red and the control lamp ap-pears ››› page 104. When the fuel level is verylow, the lower diode flashes in red.

The distance to empty fuel level is displayedon the instrument panel 3 ››› Fig. 120.

The capacity of the fuel tank of your vehicle isgiven in the Technical data section››› page 50.

CAUTION

Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An ir-regular fuel supply could cause misfiring. Inthis way the unburned fuel can reach the ex-haust system, which could cause the catalyticconverter to overheat resulting in damage.

Control lamps

Warning and control lamps


The control and warning lamps are indicatorsof warnings, ››› , faults ››› or certain func-tions. Some control and warning lamps comeon when the ignition is switched on, andswitch off when the engine starts running, orwhile driving.

Depending on the model, additional textmessages may be viewed on the instrument

panel display. These may be purely informa-tive or they may be advising of the need foraction ››› page 104, Instruments.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in thevehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-times a symbol may be displayed on the in-strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps arelit, an audible warning is also heard.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and messages are ignor-ed, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or maycause accidents and severe injuries.

● Never ignore the warning lamps or textmessages.

● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

● Park the vehicle away from traffic and en-sure that there are no highly flammable ma-terials under the vehicle that could come intocontact with the exhaust system (e.g. drygrass, fuel).

● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-dent for the driver and for other road users. Ifnecessary, switch on the hazard warninglamps and put out the warning triangle to ad-vise other drivers.

● Before opening the bonnet, switch off theengine and allow it to cool.

● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is ahazardous area and could cause severe inju-ries ››› page 262.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and textmessages when they appear may result infaults in the vehicle.

109

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Introduction to the EasyConnect system*

System settings (CAR)*

CAR menu


To select the settings menus, press the EasyConnect button and the SETUP functionbutton.

The actual number of menus available andthe name of the various options in these me-nus will depend on the vehicle’s electronicsand equipment.

Pressing the menu button will always takeyou to the last menu used.

When the function button check box is activa-ted , the function is active.

Pressing the menu button will always takeyou to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menusare automatically saved on closing those me-nus.

Function buttons in thevehicle settingsmenu

Page

ESC system ››› page 176

Tyres ››› page 275

Driver assistance ››› table on page 27

Parking and manoeuvring ››› page 225

Vehicle lights ››› table on page 27

Mirrors and windscreen wipers ››› table on page 27

Opening and closing ››› table on page 27

Multifunction display ››› table on page 27

Date and time ››› table on page 27

Units ››› table on page 27

Service ››› page 105

Factory settings ››› table on page 27

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, withthe risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connectsystem while driving could distract you fromtraffic.

110

Communications and multimedia

Communications and multi-media

Steering wheel controls*

General information

The steering wheel includes a multifunctionmodule from where it is possible to controlthe audio, telephone and radio/navigationfunctions without needing to distract thedriver.

There are two versions of the multifunctionmodule:

● Audio system + telephone without voicecontrol version (MID): for controlling the au-dio functions available (radio, audio CD,MP3, iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth sys-tem from the steering wheel.

● Audio system + telephone with voice con-trol version (HIGH): for controlling the audiofunctions available (radio, audio CD, MP3,iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth systemfrom the steering wheel.

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment.111

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Operating the telephone and audio system without voice control (MID)

Fig. 124 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation

ATurn: Turn volume up/down

Press: MuteTurn: Turn volume up/down




Press: Mute

BShort press: access to the tele-phone menu in the instrument

panela).

Short press: access to the tele-phone menu in the instrument

panela).


panela).

Short press: answer/hang upcalls, enable/open the tele-

phone menu.Hold down: reject an incomingcall/switch to private mode/re-

diala).


panela).

C Search for last stationShort press: switch to the previ-

ous songHold down: quick rewind

No function No function No function

D Search for the next stationShort press: switch to the next

songHold down: fast forward

No function No function No function

E , FChange menu on instrument

panela)Change menu on instrument




panela)

G MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source

112


Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation

HTurn: Next/previous presetb)

Press: Acts on the MFDTurn: Next/previous songb)

Press: Acts on the MFDTurn: No function

Press: Acts on the MFDTurn: Acts on the MFD

Press: Confirm

Turn: Changes menu or memoryon instrument panel

Press: Operates on instrumentpanel

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

Operating the telephone and audio system with voice control (HIGH)

Fig. 125 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

ATurn: Turn volume up/down





Press: Mute

B

Short press: access to the tele-phone menu on the dash pan-

ela).Hold down: rediala)





Short press: answer/hang upcalls, enable/open the tele-

phone menu.Hold down: reject an incoming

call/switch to private/redialmode


ela).Hold down: rediala) »

113

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

C Search for last stationShort press: switch to the previ-

ous songHold down: quick rewind

No function No functionb) Radio/media functionality (ex-cept AUX )

D Search for the next stationShort press: switch to the next

songHold down: fast forward

No function No functionb) Radio/media functionality (ex-cept AUX )

E , FChange menu on instrument

panelChange menu on instrument




panel

G Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) No functionb) Enable/disable voice control

H

Turn: Next/previous presetc)

Press: Acts on the MFD or con-firms the menu option of thedash panel depending on the

menu option

Turn: Next/previous songc)

Press: Acts on the MFD or con-firms the menu option of thedash panel depending on the

menu option

Turn: Acts upon the dash panelmenu depending on where it is

locatedPress: Acts on the MFD or con-firms the menu option of thedash panel depending on the

menu option



menu option



menu option

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX).c) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

114


Multimedia

USB/AUX-INPort

Fig. 126 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

Depending on the special characteristics andthe country, the vehicle may have aUSB/AUX-IN port.

The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in thestorage compartment area of the centre con-sole ››› Fig. 126.

The operating description is located in the re-spective Instruction Manuals of the audiosystem or the navigation system.

Connectivity Box*

Fig. 127 Centre console: Connectivity Box

Depending on the special features and thecountry, the vehicle may have a ConnectivityBox.

With the Connectivity Box you can chargeyour mobile device wirelessly with Qi1) tech-nology as well as reduce the radiation in thevehicle and have better reception.

The Connectivity Box can be found in thestorage compartment area of the centre con-sole ››› Fig. 127.

The operating description is located in the re-spective Instruction Manuals of the audiosystem or the navigation system.

Note

Your mobile device must support the Qi wire-less inductive charging interface standard forproper operation.

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mobilephone wirelessly.

115

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Opening and closing

Central locking system

Description


The vehicle can be locked and unlocked viathe central locking system. There are severalmethods, depending on the vehicle equip-ment:

● key with remote control ››› page 118,

● lock on driver door (emergency opening››› page 10) or

● interior central locking switch ››› page 119.

Unlocking one side of the vehicle only

When you lock the vehicle with the key, thedoors and the rear lid are locked. When youopen the door, you can either unlock only thedriver door, or all the vehicle doors. To selectthe required option, use Easy Connect*››› page 119.

Automatic locking (Auto Lock)*

The Auto Lock function locks the doors andthe rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speedof about 15 km/h (9 mph).

The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni-tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehiclecan also be unlocked via the central lockingswitch or by pulling one of the inside doorhandles. The Auto Lock function can beswitched on and off on the sound system oron the Easy Connect* system ››› page 119.

In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, the doors will be automaticallyunlocked to facilitate access and assistance.

Anti-theft alarm system*

If the anti-theft alarm system senses interfer-ence with the vehicle it triggers an audibleand visible alarm.

The anti-theft alarm system is automaticallyswitched on when locking the vehicle. Itswitches off when the vehicle is unlockedfrom a distance.

When the driver door is unlocked with thekey, you should switch on the ignition within15 seconds. Otherwise the alarm will be trig-gered. On some export versions, the alarm istriggered immediately when you open a door.

To deactivate the alarm, press the button on the remote control key, or switch on theignition. After a certain time, the alarm willautomatically switch off.

Switch off the vehicle interior monitoring andtow-away protection if you wish to prevent

the alarm from being triggered accidentally››› page 126.

Turn signals

The turn signals will flash twice when the ve-hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicleis locked.

If it does not flash, this indicates that one ofthe doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is notclosed correctly.

Accidental lock-out

The central locking system prevents you frombeing locked out of the vehicle in the follow-ing situations:

● If the driver door is open, the vehicle can-not be locked with the central locking switch››› page 119.

Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,when all the doors and the rear lid have beenclosed. This prevents the accidental lockingof the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especially children) inthe vehicle if it is locked from the outside andthe anti-theft security system* is enabled, asthe doors and windows cannot then beopened from the inside. Locked doors coulddelay assistance in an emergency, potentiallyputting lives at risk.

116

Opening and closing

Note

● Never leave any valuable items in the vehi-cle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not asafe.

● If the diode on the driver door sill lights upfor about 30 seconds when the vehicle islocked, the central locking system or anti-theft alarm* is not working properly. Youshould have the fault repaired at a SEAT Offi-cial Service or specialised workshop.

● The vehicle interior monitoring of the anti-theft alarm* system will only function as in-tended if the windows and the sunroof* areclosed.

Car key

Fig. 128 Vehicle key

Fig. 129 Vehicle key with alarm button

Vehicle key

With the vehicle key the vehicle may belocked or unlocked remotely ››› page 116.

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-cle. The range of the vehicle key with remotecontrol and new battery is several metresaround the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehi-cle using the remote control key, this shouldbe re-synchronised ››› page 123 or the bat-tery changed ››› page 122.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle maybe used.

Control lamp on the vehicle key

When a button on the vehicle key is pressed,the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 128 (arrow)once briefly, but if the button is held down for

a longer period the control lamp flashes sev-eral times, such as in convenience opening.

If the vehicle key control lamp does not lightup when the button is pressed, replace thekey's battery ››› page 122.

Unfolding and folding the key shaft

Press button 1 ››› Fig. 128 or ››› Fig. 129 tounlock and unfold the key shaft.

To fold the shaft away, press button 1 andfold the key shaft in until it locks in place.

Alarm button*

Only press alarm button 2 in the event of anemergency! When the alarm button is press-ed, the vehicle horn is heard and the turn sig-nals are switched on for a short time. Whenthe alarm button is pressed again, the alarmis switched off.

Spare key

To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,the vehicle chassis number is required.

Each new key contains a microchip whichmust be coded with the data from the vehicleelectronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will notwork if it does not contain a microchip or themicrochip has not been encoded. This is alsotrue for keys which are specially cut for thevehicle. »

117

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can beobtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe-cialised workshop or an approved key servicequalified to create this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchron-ised before use ››› page 123.

CAUTION

All of the vehicle keys contain electronic com-ponents. Protect them from damage, impactsand humidity.

Note

● Only use the key button when you requirethe corresponding function. Pushing the but-ton unnecessarily could accidentally unlockthe vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also pos-sible even when you are outside the radius ofaction.

● Key operation can be greatly influenced byoverlapping radio signals close to the vehicleworking in the same range of frequencies, forexample, radio transmitters or mobile tele-phones.

● Obstacles between the remote control andthe vehicle, bad weather conditions and dis-charged batteries can considerably reducethe range of the remote control.

● If the buttons of the vehicle key are press-ed ››› Fig. 128 or ››› Fig. 129 or one of the cen-tral locking buttons ››› page 119 is pressedrepeatedly in short succession, the centrallocking briefly disconnects as protection

against overloading. The vehicle is then un-locked. Lock it if necessary.

Unlocking/Locking by remote control


The vehicle will be locked again automatical-ly if you do not open one of the doors or therear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking thecar. This function prevents the vehicle fromremaining unlocked if the unlocking button ispressed by mistake. This does not apply ifyou press the button for at least one sec-ond.

In vehicles with a security central lockingfeature (selective unlocking of side doors)››› page 118, when the button is pressedonce, only the driver door and the fuel tankflap are unlocked. When the button is press-ed a second time, all the vehicle doors areunlocked.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Descrip-tion on page 116.

Note

● Do not use the remote control key until thevehicle is visible.

● Other functions of the remote control key››› page 128, Convenience opening/closing.

Selective unlocking system

The selective unlocking system allows you toonly unlock the driver door and the fuel tankflap. All other doors and the rear lid remainlocked.

Unlocking the driver door and tank flap

– Press button on the remote control keyonce, or turn the key once to open.

Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and thetank flap simultaneously.

– Within 5 seconds, press button on theremote control key twice, or turn the key toopen twice within 5 seconds.

The anti-theft security system* and the anti-theft alarm* are immediately disabled if youunlock only the driver door, without unlock-ing the other doors.

In vehicles with Easy Connect*, you can pro-gramme the security central locking systemdirectly ››› page 119.

118

Opening and closing

Programming the central locking sys-tem

You can use Easy Connect* to select whichdoors are unlocked with the central lockingsystem. Using the radio or the Easy Connect*system, you can select whether the vehicleautomatically closes with the “Auto Lock”programme at speeds of more than 15 km/h(9 mph).

Programming the unlocking of the doors (ve-hicles with Easy Connect)

– Select: control button Systems or Vehi-cle systems > Vehicle settings >Central locking > Unlocking doors.

Programming the Auto Lock (vehicles withradio)

– Select: SETUP button > control button Central locking > Locking whiledriving.

Programming the Auto Lock (vehicles withEasy Connect)

– Select: control button Systems or Vehi-cle systems > Vehicle settings >Locking while driving.

Unlocking doors You can choose to un-lock all the doors or only the driver doorwhen you unlock the vehicle. In all the op-tions, the fuel tank flap is also unlocked.

With the Driver setting, when you press the button on the remote control key only the

door on the driver's side is unlocked. If thatbutton is pressed twice, the rest of the doorsand the rear lid will be unlocked.

In vehicles with a conventional key, turn thekey in the door lock, in the direction of open-ing, twice within 2 seconds.

If the button is pressed, all the vehicledoors are locked. At the same time, a confir-mation signal* is heard.

Auto Lock/Locking while driving. Ifyou select on, all the vehicle doors arelocked at speeds above 15 km/h (9 mph).

Central locking switch


Please note the following when using thecentral locking switch to lock your vehicle:

● It is not possible to open the doors or therear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).

● The LED in the central locking switch lightsup when all the doors are closed and locked.

● You can open the doors individually fromthe inside by pulling the inside door handle.

● In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, doors locked from the inside willbe automatically unlocked to facilitate accessand assistance.

WARNING

● The central locking switch also operateswhen the ignition is switched off and auto-matically locks all the vehicle doors when thebutton is pressed.

● The central locking switch does not operateif the vehicle is locked from the outside andthe anti-theft security system is switched on.

● Locked doors could delay assistance in anemergency, potentially putting lives at risk.Do not leave anyone, especially children, inthe vehicle.

Note

Your vehicle will lock automatically when itreaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)(Auto Lock) ››› page 116. You can unlock thevehicle again using button on the centrallocking switch.

119

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Unlocking and locking the vehiclewith Keyless Access*

Fig. 130 Keyless Access locking and ignitionsystem: In the proximity of the car.

Fig. 131 Keyless Access locking and ignitionsystem: sensor surface A for unlocking in-side the door handle and sensor surface B

for locking on the exterior of the handle.

››› table on page 2

Depending on the equipment, the vehiclemay have the Keyless Access system.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-tion system to unlock and lock the vehiclewithout actively using its key. For this, all thatis required is for a valid vehicle key to be inan area near the vehicle ››› Fig. 130 and oneof the sensor surfaces on the door handles tobe touched ››› Fig. 131 ››› .

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked viathe front doors only. When doing so, the re-mote control key must be no further than ap-prox. 1.5 m from the door handle.

It does not matter where you carry the key, forinstance whether it is in your jacket pocket orin a briefcase.

Once the doors have been locked, they can-not be opened again immediately. This willenable you to check that the doors are prop-erly closed.

If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlockonly the corresponding door or the entire ve-hicle. The necessary adjustments can be per-formed in vehicles with a driver informationsystem ››› page 27.

General information

If a valid key is located in the proximity of thecar ››› Fig. 130, the Keyless Access lock andignition system gives the key entry as soonas one of the sensor surfaces on the door

handles is touched. The following featuresare then available without having to use thevehicle key actively:

● Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle usingthe handles of the front doors or the soft-touch/handle on the rear lid.

● Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using thesensor of the driver or passenger door han-dle.

● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the en-gine with the starter button ››› page 167.

The central locking and locking systems oper-ate in the same way as a normal locking andunlocking system. Only the controls change.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with adouble flash of the indicator lights; lockingby a single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors andthe rear lid are closed leaving the last keyused inside the vehicle and none outside,the vehicle will not lock immediately. All thevehicle's indicator lights will flash four times.The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-onds if you fail to open any door or the rearlid.

If you unlock the vehicle but fail to open anydoor or the rear lid, the vehicle will lock againafter a few seconds.

120

Opening and closing

Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless-Entry)

● Hold one of the front door handles. In do-ing this, the sensor surface ››› Fig. 131 A (ar-row) is touched on the handle and the vehi-cle unlocks.

● Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info-tainment system configuration, pulling thedoor handle twice will unlock all doors.

On vehicles without a “Safe” security sys-tem: shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Ex-it)

● Switch the ignition off.

● Close the driver's door.

● Touch the locking sensor surface B (arrow)of the handle of one of the front doors once.The door being operated must be closed.

On vehicles with a “Safe” security system:shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Exit)


● Close the driver's door.

● Touch the sensor surface B (arrow) of thehandle of one of the front doors once. The ve-hicle locks with the “Safe” security system››› page 122. The door being operated mustbe closed.

● Touch the sensor surface B (arrow) of thehandle of one of the front doors twice to lock

the vehicle without activating the “Safe” se-curity system ››› page 122.

Unlocking and locking the rear lid

When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-id vehicle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 130.

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the rear lid locks automatically.If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rearlid will not lock automatically after closing it.

What happens when locking the vehicle witha second key

If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle andit is locked from the outside with a secondvehicle key, the key inside the vehicle isblocked for engine ignition ››› page 167. Inorder to enable engine ignition, the buttonon the key inside the vehicle needs to bepressed.

Automatically disabling sensors

If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for along period of time, the proximity sensors onthe passenger doors are automatically disa-bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-dles is often activated in a unusual mannerwith the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branchesof a bush rubbing against it), all proximity

sensors are disabled for a certain period oftime.

Sensors will again be enabled:

● After a time.

● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-ton on the key.

● OR: if the rear lid is open.

● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually withthe key.

Convenience functions

To close all the electric windows and theglass roof using the convenience function,keep a finger for a few seconds on the lock-ing sensor surface ››› Fig. 131 B (arrow) ofthe door handle until the windows and roofhave closed.

The doors may be opened by touching thesensor surface of the door handle dependingon the settings that have been activated inthe infotainment system with the buttonand the SETUP and Opening and closing func-tion buttons.

CAUTION

The sensor surfaces on the door handlescould engage if hit with a water jet or highpressure steam if there is a valid vehicle keyin the proximity. If at least one of the win-dows is open and the sensor surface B on »

121

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

one of the handles permanently activates, allwindows will close.

Note

● If the vehicle battery has little or no charge,or the vehicle key battery is almost or entire-ly out of charge, you will probably not be ableto lock or unlock the vehicle with the KeylessAccess system. The vehicle can be unlockedor locked manually ››› page 87.

● To control the proper locking of the vehicle,the release function is disabled for approx. 2seconds.

● If the message Keyless access systemfaulty is displayed on the screen of thedash panel, abnormalities may occur in theoperation of the Keyless Access system. Con-tact a specialised workshop. SEAT recom-mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

● Depending on the function set on the info-tainment system for the mirrors, the exteriormirrors will unfold and the surround lightingwill come on when unlocking the vehicle us-ing the sensor surface on the driver and pas-senger door handles ››› page 141.

● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle orthe system fails to detect one, a warning willdisplay on the dash panel screen. This couldhappen if any other radio frequency signal in-terferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mo-bile device accessory) or if the key is coveredby another object (e.g. an aluminium case).

● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a lay-er of salt, how the sensors on the door han-dles operate may be affected. In this case,clean the vehicle.

● If the vehicle is equipped with an automaticgearbox, it may only be locked in the gearstick is in position P.

Anti-theft security system (Safelock)*

The following message is displayed on the in-strument panel to remind the driver thatwhen the vehicle is closed from the outside,the anti-theft security system is switched on. Do not forget the Safelock.Please see Instruction Manual. Thevehicle cannot be opened from inside. Thismakes it more difficult for unauthorised per-sons to break into the vehicle ››› in De-scription on page 116.

The anti-theft security system can be switch-ed off each time the vehicle is locked:

● Turn the key a second time to the lock posi-tion, in the door lock, within two seconds. Ifnecessary, remove the protective cover onthe driver door handle ››› page 10 or else

● Press on the remote control key for asecond time within 2 seconds.

The flashing frequency of the diode in thedoor sill immediately confirms the process.Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence

for a brief period, then it stops for approxi-mately 30 seconds and, lastly continuesflashing slowly.

Replacing the battery

Fig. 132 Vehicle key: opening the batterycompartment

Fig. 133 Vehicle key: removing the battery

SEAT recommends you ask a specialisedworkshop to replace the battery.

122

Opening and closing

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-cle key, under a cover.

Changing the battery

● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 117.

● Remove the cover from the back of the ve-hicle key ››› Fig. 132 in the direction of the ar-row ››› .

● Extract the battery from the compartmentusing a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 133.

● Place the new battery in the compartmentas shown ››› Fig. 133, pressing in the oppo-site direction to that shown by the arrow››› .

● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 132, pressingit onto the vehicle key casing in the oppositedirection to that shown by the arrow until itclicks into place.

CAUTION

● If the battery is not changed correctly, thevehicle key may be damaged.

● Use of unsuitable batteries may damagethe vehicle key. For this reason, always re-place the dead battery with another of thesame voltage, size and specifications.

● When fitting the battery, check that the po-larity is correct.


Please dispose of your used batteries correct-ly and with respect for the environment.

Synchronising the vehicle key

If the button is pressed frequently outsideof the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-ing the key. In this case, the key must be re-synchronised as described below:

● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 117.

● If necessary, remove the cover from thedriver door lever ››› page 10.

● Press the button on the vehicle key. Forthis, it must remain with the vehicle.

● Open the vehicle within one minute usingthe key blade. The key has been synchron-ised.

● If necessary, fit the cap.

Childproof lock3 Applies to vehicles with 5 doors:

Fig. 134 Childproof lock on the left hand sidedoor.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doorsfrom being opened from the inside. This sys-tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicleelectronic opening and locking systems. Itonly affects rear doors. It can only be activa-ted and deactivated manually, as describedbelow:

Activating the childproof lock

– Unlock the vehicle and open the door inwhich you wish to activate the childprooflock.

– With the door open, rotate the groove inthe door using the ignition key, clockwisefor the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 134 and »

123

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

anti-clockwise for the right hand sidedoors.

Deactivating the childproof lock

– Unlock the vehicle and open the doorwhose childproof lock you want to deacti-vate.

– With the door open, rotate the groove inthe door using the ignition key, anti-clock-wise for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 134and clockwise for the right hand sidedoors.

Once the childproof lock is activated, thedoor can only be opened from the outside.The childproof lock can be activated or deac-tivated by inserting the key in the groovewhen the door is open, as described above.

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult tobreak into the vehicle or steal it.

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turnedon when the vehicle is locked with the key.

● The turn signal light will flash twice onopening and deactivating the alarm.

● The turn signal light will flash once on clos-ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered forabout 30 seconds accompanied by soundand optical (flashing) warning signals andwill be repeated about ten times when thevehicle is locked and the following unauthor-ised actions are attempted:

● Opening a door that is mechanically un-locked using the vehicle key without switch-ing on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (incertain markets, such as the Netherlands,there is no 15 second waiting time and thealarm is activated immediately on openingthe door).

● A door is opened.

● The bonnet is opened.

● The rear lid is opened.

● When the ignition is switched on with anon-authorised key.

● When the vehicle battery is disconnected.

● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicleswith interior monitoring ››› page 126).

● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 126).

● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 126).

● When the vehicle is transported on a ferryor by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system orvehicle interior monitoring ››› page 126).

● When a trailer connected to the anti-theftalarm system is disconnected.

How to turn OFF the alarm

Unlock the vehicle with the unlocking buttonon the key or turn on the ignition with a validkey.

Note

● After 28 days, the indicator light will beswitched off to prevent the battery from ex-hausting if the vehicle has been left parkedfor a long period of time. The alarm systemremains activated.

● If, after the audible warning goes off, an-other monitored area is accessed (e.g. therear lid is opened after a door has beenopened), the alarm is triggered again.

● The anti-theft alarm is not activated whenthe vehicle is locked from within using thecentral locking button .

● If the driver door is unlocked mechanicallywith the key, only the driver door is unlocked,the rest of the doors remain locked. Onlywhen the ignition has been turned on will theother doors be available - but not unlocked -and the central locking button will be activa-ted.

124

Opening and closing

● If the vehicle battery is run down or flatthen the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor-rectly.

● Vehicle monitoring remains active even ifthe battery is disconnected or not working forany reason.

● The alarm is triggered immediately if one ofthe battery cables is disconnected while thealarm system is active.

Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system*

It is a monitoring or control function incorpo-rated in the anti-theft alarm* which detectsunauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-sound.

Activation

– It is automatically switched on when theanti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation

– Open the vehicle with the key, either me-chanically or by pressing the button onthe remote control. The time period fromwhen the door is opened until the key is in-serted in the contact should not exceed 15seconds, otherwise the alarm will be trig-gered.

– Press the button on the remote controltwice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen-sors will be deactivated. The alarm systemremains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system are automatically switched onagain next time the vehicle is locked.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-towsensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switchedon. In order to activate it, all the doors andthe rear lid must be closed.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interiormonitoring and the anti-tow system, it mustbe done each time that the vehicle is locked;if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system should be switched off if animalsare left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,their movements will trigger the alarm) orwhen, for example, the vehicle is transportedor has to be towed with only one axle on theground.

False alarms

Interior monitoring will only operate correctlyif the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-serve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a false alarm:

● Open windows (partially or fully).

● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially orcompletely).

● Movement of objects inside the vehicle,such as loose papers, items hanging fromthe rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note

● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm isactivated without the volumetric sensor func-tion, relocking will activate the alarm with allits functions, except the volumetric sensor.This function is reactivated when the alarm isswitched on again, unless it is deliberatelyswitched off.

● If the alarm has been triggered by the volu-metric sensor, this will be indicated by aflashing of the warning lamp on the driverdoor when the vehicle is opened. The flash isdifferent to the flash indicating the alarm isactivated.

● The vibration of a mobile phone left insidethe vehicle may cause the vehicle interiormonitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensorsreact to movements and shakes inside the ve-hicle.

● If on activating the alarm, any door or therear lid is open, only the alarm will be activa-ted. The vehicle interior monitoring and theanti-tow system will only be activated onceall the doors are closed (including the rearlid).

125

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Deactivating the vehicle interior moni-toring and anti-tow systems*

Fig. 135 Vehicle interior monitoring/tow-away protection button.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will betriggered if movements are detected in theinterior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's in-clination is changed (e.g. during transport).You can prevent the alarm from being trig-gered accidentally by switching off the vehi-cle interior monitoring and/or tow-away pro-tection.

– To switch off the vehicle interior monitoringand tow-away protection, switch off the ig-nition and press button ››› Fig. 135. The in-dicator on the button will light up.

– When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicleinterior monitoring and the tow-away pro-tection are switched off until the next timethe door is opened.

If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)*››› page 122 is switched off, the vehicle interi-or monitoring and the tow-away protectionare automatically switched off.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Descrip-tion on page 116.

Rear lid (luggage compart-ment)

Tailgate automatic lock

Where the vehicle has been locked by press-ing the button on the remote control withthe rear lid open, the rear lid will lock auto-matically when closed.

The automatic tailgate locking time extensionfunction can be activated. Where this func-tion is activated and once the rear lid hasbeen unlocked by pressing the button onthe remote control key ››› page 118, the rearlid can be re-opened for a certain length oftime.

Where required, the automatic tailgate lock-ing time extension function can be activatedor deactivated at an Authorised SEAT Service,which will provide all the necessary informa-tion.

Before the vehicle locks automatically, thereis a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle.Therefore, we recommend you always lockthe vehicle by pressing the button on theremote control or by using the central lockingbutton.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro-duction on page 87.

● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk ofaccident or injury.

● The rear lid must not be opened when thereverse or rear fog lights are lit. This maydamage the tail lights.

● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it downwith your hand on the rear window. The glasscould smash. Risk of injury!

● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it.If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv-ing.

● Closing the rear lid without observing andensuring it is clear could cause serious injuryto you and to third parties. Make sure that noone is in the path of the rear lid.

● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into theinterior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!

● If you only open the rear lid, do not leavethe key inside. The vehicle cannot be openedif the key is left inside.

126

Opening and closing

Electric windows

Opening and closing of the electricwindows*

Fig. 136 Detail of the driver door: controls forthe windows (5-door vehicle with front andrear electric windows).


The front and rear electric windows can beoperated by using the controls on the driverdoor. The other doors each have a switch fortheir own window.

Always close the windows fully if you parkthe vehicle or leave it unattended ››› .

You can use the electric windows for approx.10 minutes after switching off the ignition ifneither the driver door nor the front passen-ger door has been opened and the key hasnot been removed from the ignition.

Safety switch * (only in 5-door vehicles)

Safety switch 5 on the driver door can beused to disable the electric window buttonsin the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on reardoors are activated.

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doorsare deactivated.

The safety control symbol lights up in yel-low if the buttons on the rear doors areswitched off.

WARNING


● Incorrect use of the electric windows canresult in injury.

● Never close the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise couldcause serious injury to you and third parties.Make sure that no one is in the path of a win-dow.

● The engine may accidentally be started andbe out of control.

● If the ignition is switched on, the electricequipment could be activated with risk of in-jury, for example, in the electric windows.

● The doors can be locked using the remotecontrol key. This could become an obstaclefor assistance in an emergency situation.

● Therefore always take the key with youwhen you leave the vehicle.

● The electric windows will work until the ig-nition has been switched off and one of thefront doors has been opened.

● If necessary, use the safety switch to disa-ble the rear electric windows. Make sure thatthey have been disabled.

Note

If the window is not able to close because itis stiff or because of an obstruction, the win-dow will automatically open again››› page 127. If this happens, check why thewindow could not be closed before attempt-ing to close it again.

Roll-back function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-jury when the electric windows close.

● If a window is obstructed when closing au-tomatically, the window stops at this pointand lowers immediately ››› .

● Next, check why the window does not closebefore attempting it again.

● If you try within the following 10 secondsand the window closes again with difficultyor there is an obstruction, the automatic clos-ing will stop working for 10 seconds. »

127

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● If the window is still obstructed, the win-dow will stop at this point.

● If there is no obvious reason why the win-dow cannot be closed, try to close it again bypulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-dow closes with maximum force. The roll-back function is now deactivated.

● If more than 10 seconds pass, the windowwill open fully when you operate one of thebuttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Openingand closing of the electric windows* onpage 127.

● The roll-back function does not prevent fin-gers or other parts of the body gettingpinched against the window frame. Risk ofaccident.

Convenience opening/closing

Use the convenience opening/closing func-tion to easily open/close all the windows andthe sliding/tilting sunroof* from the outside.

Convenience open function

– Press and hold button on the remotecontrol key until all the windows and thesliding/tilting sunroof* have reached thedesired position, or

– First unlock the vehicle using button onthe remote control key and then keep thekey in the driver door lock until all the win-dows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* havereached the required position.

Convenience close function

– Press and hold button on the remotecontrol key until all the windows and thesliding/tilting sunroof* are closed ››› , or

– Keep the key in the driver door in the "lock"position until all the windows and the slid-ing/tilting sunroof* are closed.

Programming convenience opening in theEasy Connect*

– Select: function button CAR > control but-ton Vehicle systems* > Vehicle set-tings > Central locking > Open thewindow by holding button down orelse > Front window on/off or elseRoof on/off*.

WARNING

● Take care when closing the sliding/tiltingsunroof* and windows. There is a risk of suf-fering injury.

● For safety reasons, you should only use theremote control open and close functions with-in about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid in-juries, always keep an eye on the windowsand the sliding/tilting sunroof* when press-

ing the button to close them. The windowsstop moving as soon as the button is re-leased.

One-touch opening and closing*

One-touch opening and closing means youdo not have to hold down the button.

Buttons ››› Fig. 136 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 havetwo positions for opening windows and twofor closing them. This makes it easier to openand close windows to the desired position.

One-touch closing

– Pull up the window button briefly up to thesecond position. The window closes fully.

One-touch opening

– Push down the window button briefly up tothe second position. The window opensfully.

Resetting one-touch opening and closing

The automatic open and close function willnot work if the battery has been temporarilydisconnected. The function can be restoredas follows:

– Close the window as far as it will go by lift-ing and holding the electric window switch.

128

Opening and closing

– Release the switch and then lift it again for1 second. This will re-enable the automaticfunction.

If you push (or pull) a button to the firststage, the window will open (or close) untilyou release the button. If you push or lift thebutton briefly to the second stage, the win-dow will open (one-touch opening) or close(one-touch closing) automatically. If you op-erate the button while the window is openingor closing, it stops at this position.

Panoramic sliding sunroof*

Opening or closing the panoramicsliding sunroof


The panoramic sliding sunroof will only workwith the ignition on. It can be opened orclosed for a few minutes after the ignitionhas been switched off, provided the driverdoor and the front passenger door are notopened.

WARNING

Careless or uncontrolled use of the panoram-ic sliding sunroof can cause serious injuries.

● Only open or close the panoramic slidingsunroof and the sun blind* when nobody is inthe way.

● The panoramic sliding sunroof can be oper-ated for up to about ten minutes after the ig-nition has been switched off, provided thedriver door and the front passenger door arenot opened.

CAUTION

Check that when the rear lid is open, it doesnot touch loads carried on the roof. When aroof carrier is fitted, DO NOT open the panor-amic roof*.

Note

● Leaves and other loose objects that accu-mulate on the sun roof rails should be regu-larly cleaned away either by hand or with avacuum.

● In case of a fault in the operation of thepanoramic sliding sunroof, the anti-trap func-tion will not operate correctly. Contact a spe-cialised workshop.

Opening and closing the sun blind*3 Valid for vehicles: with sun blinds

Fig. 137 On the interior roof lining: switchesfor the sun blind.

Function Action

Opening com-pletely (automaticfunction)

Press button ››› Fig. 137 1 briefly.

Stop automaticoperation

Press button 1 or button 2

briefly.

To set the inter-mediate position

Press button 1 or button 2 untilthe correct position is set.

Closing complete-ly (automaticfunction)

Press the button 2 briefly.

Once the ignition has been switched off, youcan still open or close the sun blind for a fewminutes provided the driver door and thefront passenger door are not opened.

129

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Convenience closing of the panoramicsliding sunroof

The panoramic sliding sunroof can beopened or closed from outside the vehicleusing the vehicle key:

● Keep the vehicle unlocking or locking but-ton pressed. The panoramic sliding sunroofis adjusted or closes.

● Release the unlock or lock button to stopthe function.

During convenience closing, the windowsand the panoramic sliding sunroof close atthe same time.

Note

The rotary button of the panoramic slidingsunroof remains in the last position selectedif the roof is closed using convenience clos-ing from outside the vehicle, and will have tobe re-positioned the next time you drive.

Roll-back function of the panoramicsliding sunroof and the sun blind*

The anti-trap function reduces the risk of in-jury when opening and closing the panoram-ic sliding sunroof and sun blind ››› . Whenit encounters an obstacle while closing, itrolls back and opens again.

● Check why the panoramic sliding sunroofor the sun blind does not close.

● Try and close them again.

● If the panoramic sliding sunroof or sunblind is still obstructed, it will stop at the cor-responding position. Close it without the an-ti-trap function.

Closing without the roll-back function

● The switch should be in the “closed posi-tion” ››› page 13 1 .

● Panoramic sliding sunroof: Within five sec-onds of triggering the anti-trap function, pullthe control all the way back ››› page 13(arrow 5 ) until the panoramic sliding sun-roof closes fully.

● Sun blind: Within five seconds of triggeringthe anti-trap function, press button››› Fig. 137 2 until the sun blind closes fully.

● The panoramic sliding sunroof and sunblind close without the anti-trap function.

● If the panoramic sliding sunroof still cannotbe closed, visit a specialised workshop.

WARNING

Closing the panoramic sliding sunroof or sunblind without the anti-trap function can causeserious injuries.

● Always close the panoramic sliding sunroofcarefully.

● Nobody should be in the way of the panor-amic sliding sunroof or sun blind, especiallywhen they are closed without the anti-trapfunction.

● The anti-trap function does not prevent fin-gers or other parts of the body gettingpinched against the window frame and caus-ing injury.

Note

The anti-trap function is activated if the win-dows and the panoramic sliding sunroof areclosed from the outside of the vehicle usingthe ignition key for convenience closing››› page 128.

130



Lights

Side light and dipped beam headlight


The legal requirements regarding the use ofvehicle lights in each country must be ob-served.

The driver is personally responsible for thecorrect use and adjustment of the lights in allsituations.

Audible warnings to advise the driver thatthe lights have not been switched off

If the key is not in the ignition and the driverdoor is open, an audible warning signal isheard in the following cases: this is a remind-er to turn off the lights.

● When the parking light is on ››› page 131.

● When the light switch is in position or.

WARNING

The side lights or daytime running lights arenot bright enough to illuminate the roadahead and to ensure that other road users areable to see you.

● Always use your dipped beam head lights ifit is raining or if visibility is poor.

WARNING

If the headlights are set too high and notused correctly, there is a risk of dazzling ordistracting other road users. This could resultin a serious accident.

● Always make sure that the headlights arecorrectly adjusted.

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lights consist of individ-ual lights, integrated in the front headlights.With the daylight driving lights on, only theselights switch on ››› .

The daytime running lights switch on everytime the ignition is switched on, if the switchis in positions or , according to the levelof exterior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , alight sensor automatically switches dippedbeam on and off (including the control andinstrument lighting) or the daytime runninglights depending on the level of exteriorlighting.

WARNING

● Never drive with daytime lights if the roadis not well lit due to weather or lighting con-ditions. Daytime lights do not provideenough light to illuminate the road properlyor be seen by other road users.

● The rear lights do not come on with thedaytime driving light. A vehicle which doesnot have the rear lights on may not be visibleto other drivers in the darkness, in the caseof heavy rain or in conditions of poor visibili-ty.

Turn signal and main beam lever


Push the lever all the way down to turn offthe corresponding function.

Convenience turn signals

For the convenience turn signals, move thelever as far as possible upwards or down-wards and release the lever. The turn signalwill flash three times.

The convenience turn signals are activatedand deactivated in the Easy Connect systemvia the button and the SETUP functionbutton ››› page 110. »

131

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

In vehicles that do not have the correspond-ing menu, this function can be deactivated ina specialised workshop.

WARNING

Improper or lack of use of the turn signals, orforgetting to deactivate them can confuseother road users. This could result in a seri-ous accident.

● Always give warning when you are going tochange lane, overtake or when turning, acti-vating the turn signal in good time.

● As soon as you have finished changinglane, overtaking or turning, switch the turnsignal off.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the headlights may cause ac-cidents and serious injury, as the main beammay distract or dazzle other drivers.

Note

● If the convenience turn signals are operat-ing (three flashes) and the other convenienceturn signals are switched on, the active partstops flashing and only flashes once in thenew part selected.

● The turn signal only works when the igni-tion is switched on. The hazard warninglights also work when the ignition is switch-ed off.

● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, thecontrol lamp will stop flashing (trailer turnsignals) and the vehicle turn signal will flashat double speed.

● The main beam headlights can only beswitched on if the dipped beam headlightsare already on.

● In cold or damp weather conditions, theheadlights, tail lights and turn signals maymist up inside temporarily. This is normal andin no way effects the useful life of the vehiclelighting system.

Automatic dipped beam control *

The automatic dipped beam control is merelyintended as an aid and is not able to recog-nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , thevehicle lights and the instrument panel andswitch lighting switch on and off automatical-ly in the following situations ››› in Daytimerunning lights on page 131:

Automatic switchingon

Automatic switchingoff

The photo sensor detectsdarkness, for example,when driving through atunnel.

When adequate lighting isdetected.

Automatic switchingon

Automatic switchingoff

The rain sensor detectsrain and activates thewindscreen wipers.

When the windscreen wip-ers have been inactive fora few minutes.

WARNING

If the road is not well lit and other road userscannot see the vehicle well enough or at all,accidents may occur.

● The automatic dipped beam control ()only switches on the dipped beam whenthere are no changes in brightness, and not,for example when it is foggy.

Main beam assist*


Main beam assist (Light Assist)

The main beam assist acts within the limitsof the system and depending on environmen-tal and traffic conditions. Once switched on,the system is activated as of a speed ofabout 60 km/h (37 mph) and is deactivatedbelow about 30 km/h (18 mph) ››› .

When the system is activated and the cameradetects other vehicles that may be dazzled,the main beam is automatically switched off.Otherwise, the main beam is automaticallyswitched on.

132


The main beam assist generally detects illu-minated areas and deactivates the mainbeam when passing through a town, for ex-ample.

Switching the main beam assist on and off

Func-tion

Use

Activate:

– Switch the ignition on and turn the lightswitch to position .– From the base position, move the mainbeam and turn signal lever forwards››› page 131. When the warning lamp isdisplayed on the instrument panel display,the main beam assist is switched on.

To switchsystem

off:

– Switch off the ignition.– OR: turn the light switch to a different po-sition to ››› page 131.– OR: with main beam on, move the mainbeam and turn signal lever backwards.– OR: move the main beam and turn thesignal lever forwards to manually switchthe main beam on. The main beam assistwill then be deactivated.

Malfunctions

The following conditions may prevent themain beam headlight control from turning offthe headlights in time or from turning off al-together:

● In poorly lit towns with highly reflectivesigns.

● Other insufficiently lit road users (such aspedestrians or cyclists).

● On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps)and when oncoming vehicles are partially ob-scured.

● When the drivers of other oncoming vehi-cles (such as a truck) can see over a guardrail in the centre of the road.

● If the camera is damaged or the power sup-ply is cut off.

● In fog, snow and heavy rain.

● With dust and sand turbulence.

● With loose gravel in the field of vision ofthe camera.

● When the field of vision of the camera ismisted up, dirty or covered by stickers, snow,ice, etc.

WARNING

The convenience features of the main beamassist should not encourage the taking ofrisks. The system is not a replacement fordriver concentration.

● You are always in control of the main beamand adapting it to the light, visibility and traf-fic conditions.

● It is possible that the main beam headlightcontrol does not recognise all driving situa-tions and is limited under certain circumstan-ces.

● When the field of vision of the camera isdirty, covered or damaged, operation of themain beam control may be affected. This alsoapplies when changes are made to the vehi-cle lighting system, for example, if additionalheadlights are installed.

CAUTION

To avoid affecting the operation of the sys-tem, take the following points into considera-tion:

● Clean the field of vision of the camera regu-larly and make sure it is free of snow and ice.

● Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-era.

● Check that the windscreen is not damagedin the area of the field of vision of the camera.

Note

Main beam and headlight flasher can beturned on and off manually at any time withthe turn signal and main beam lever››› page 131.

133

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Fog lights

Fig. 138 Dash panel: light control.

The warning lamps or also show, on thelight switch or instrument panel, when thefog lights are on.

● Switching on front fog lights* : pull thelight switch to the first point ››› Fig. 138 1 ,from positions , or .

● Switching on the rear fog light : com-pletely pull the light switch 2 from position, or .

● To switch off the fog lights, press the lightswitch or turn it to position .

Note

The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behindyou. You should use the rear fog light onlywhen visibility is very poor. For this reason,when you exceed approximately 60 km/h (38mph), a warning will appear on the instru-ment panel: Turn off the fog light!.

Cornering lights*1)

When turning slowly or on very tight bends,the cornering lights are activated automati-cally. The cornering lights may be integratedin the fog lights and are switched on only atspeeds of less than 40 km/h (25 mph).

When reverse gear is engaged, the corneringlights on both sides of the vehicle switch on,in order to better illuminate the area for park-ing.

Function “Coming home”

This function may be connected/disconnec-ted through the radio menu. The “ComingHome” and/or “Leaving Home” delay timemay also be set (default: 30 sec).

Vehicle withhalogenheadlights

In the “Coming Home” function, the day-time running lights (DRL), the rear sidelights and the licence plate lights areturned on.

Vehicle withfull-LEDheadlights

In the “Coming Home” function, the dip-ped beams and the daytime runninglights (DRL), the rear side lights and thelicence plate lights are switched on.

Automatic* activation of “Coming Home”

For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota-ry light switch in position ).

● Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition with the rotary light switchin position ››› page 24.

● The automatic “Coming Home” function isonly active when the light sensor detectsdarkness.

● When the car door is opened, the “ComingHome” lighting comes on.

Manual “Coming Home” activation

For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota-ry light switch without position ).

● Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition.

● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-mately 1 second.

1) This function is not available on vehicles equippedwith full-LED headlights.

134


● Activated for any position of the rotary lightswitch.

● When the car door is opened, the “ComingHome” lighting comes on. The headlights areturned off 60 seconds after the vehicle dooris opened.

Deactivation

● If no door has been closed, they go out au-tomatically after 60 seconds.

● After the last door has been closed, theheadlights will be switched off after the“Coming Home” delay (as established in theradio menu) has elapsed.

● On turning the light switch to position ››› page 24.

● When the ignition is switched on (whenstarting the engine).

Function “Leaving Home”

The “Leaving Home” function is only availa-ble for vehicles with a light and rain sensor(rotary light switch in position ).

This function may be connected/disconnec-ted through the radio menu. The “LeavingHome” function switch-off delay may also beset (default: 30 sec).

Vehicle withhalogenheadlights

In the “Leaving Home” function, the day-time running lights (DRL), the rear sidelights and the licence plate lights areswitched on.

Vehicle withfull-LEDheadlights

In the “Leaving Home” function, the dip-ped beams, the daytime running lights(DRL), the rear side lights and the li-cence plate lights are switched on.

Activation

● When the vehicle is unlocked using the re-mote control.

● The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-ted when the rotary light switch is in position and the light sensor detects darkness.

Deactivation

● When the “Leaving Home” delay periodends (default: 30 sec).

● When the vehicle is locked using the re-mote control.

● When the light control is switched into aposition other than .

● With the ignition is switched on.

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 139 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn-ing lights.


The hazard warning lights are used to drawthe attention of other road users to your vehi-cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance frommoving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazardwarning lights ››› .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;for an automatic gearbox, move the gearlever to P. »

135

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the atten-tion of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you whenyou leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously whenthe hazard warning lights are switched on.The two turn signal turn signal lamps and the turn signal lamp in the switch willflash at the same time. The simultaneoushazard warning lights also work when the ig-nition is switched off.

Emergency braking warning

If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50mph), the brake light flashes several timesper second to warn the vehicles driving be-hind. If you continue braking, the hazardwarning lights will come on automaticallywhen the vehicle comes to a standstill. Theyswitch off automatically when the vehiclestarts to move again.

WARNING

● The risk of an accident increases if your ve-hicle breaks down. Always use the hazardwarning lights and a warning triangle to drawthe attention of other road users to your sta-tionary vehicle.

● Due to the high temperatures that the cata-lytic converter can reach, never park in anarea where the catalytic converter could come

into contact with highly inflammable materi-als, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. Thiscould start a fire.

Note

● The battery will run down if the hazardwarning lights are left on for a long time,even if the ignition is switched off.

● The use of the hazard warning lights de-scribed here is subject to the relevant statu-tory requirements.

Parking lights

When the parking light is switched on, (rightor left turn signal), the front side light andthe rear light on the corresponding side ofthe vehicle stay lit. The parking lights can on-ly be activated with the ignition switched offand the turn signal and main beam lever inthe central position, before being triggered.

Parking light on both sides

With the ignition switched off and the lightswitch in position , when locking the vehi-cle from the outside, the parking lights onboth sides of the vehicle light up. In doingso, only the side lights of both headlightslight up, and additionally the tail lights willdo so partially.

Motorway light*

The motorway light is available on vehiclesequipped with full-LED lights.

The function is connected/disconnected viathe corresponding Easy Connect systemmenu.

● Activation: when going above 110 km/h(68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip-ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-er's visibility distance.

● Deactivation: when reducing the speed ofthe car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dip-ped beam returns to its normal position.

Driving abroad

The light beam of the dipped beam lights isasymmetric: the side of the road on whichyou are driving is lit more intensely.

When a car that is manufactured in a countrythat drives on the right travels to a countrythat drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-mally necessary to cover part of the headlightbulbs with stickers or to change the adjust-ment of the headlights to avoid dazzling oth-er drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certainlight values that must be complied with fordesignated points of the light distribution.This is known as “Tourist light”.

136


The light distribution that the halogen andfull-LED headlights of the SEAT Leon rangehave allows the specific “tourist light” valuesto be met without the need for stickers orchanges in the settings.

Note

“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. Ifyou are planning a long stay in a country thatdrives on the other side, you should take thevehicle to an Authorised Technical Service tochange the headlights.

Headlight range control, lighting ofthe instrument and control panel

Fig. 140 Next to the steering wheel: Head-light range control

Lighting of the instrument panel, screensand controls*

Depending on the model, lighting of the in-strument panel and controls can be adjustedin the Easy Connect system, using the button and the function button SETUP

››› page 27.

Headlight range control

The headlight range control is modified ac-cording to the value of the headlight beamand the vehicle load status. This offers thedriver optimum visibility and the headlightsdo not dazzle oncoming drivers ››› .

The headlights can only be adjusted whenthe dipped beam is switched on.

To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 140:

Value Vehicle load statusa)

–Two front occupants, luggage compart-ment empty

1All seats occupied, luggage compartmentempty

2All seats occupied, luggage compartmentfull With trailer and minimum drawbar load

3Driver only, luggage compartment full Withtrailer and maximum drawbar load

a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in thetable, it is possible to select intermediary positions.

OR:

Using the radio menu (see Easy Connect> Adjusting Lights > Headlampheight adjustment ››› page 27).

Setting 0Two front occupants, luggage compart-ment empty

Setting 1All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment empty

Setting 2All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment full. With trailer and minimumdrawbar load

Setting 3Driver only, luggage compartment full.With trailer and maximum drawbar load

Dynamic headlight range control

The control is not mounted in vehicles withdynamic headlight range control. The head-light range is automatically adjusted accord-ing to the vehicle load status when they areswitched on.

Instrument panel lighting

With the ignition on and without light activa-tion, the instrument panel lighting remainsactivated in daytime light conditions. Thelighting is reduced as the exterior light di-minishes. In some cases, e.g. when drivingthrough a tunnel without the functionactive, the instrument panel lighting mayeven switch off. The objective of this function »

137

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

is to provide the driver with a visual indica-tion that he or she should activate thedipped beam.

WARNING

Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean thatthe headlights dazzle and distract other driv-ers. This could result in a serious accident.

● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle loadstatus so that it does not blind other drivers.

Interior and reading lights1)



Glove compartment and luggage compart-ment lighting*

When opening and closing the glove com-partment on the front passenger side and therear lid, the respective light will automaticallyswitch on and off.

Footwell lighting*

The lights in the footwell area below the dash(driver and front passenger sides) will switchon when the doors are opened and will de-crease in intensity while driving. The intensityof these lights can be adjusted using the ra-dio menu (see Easy Connect > LightSettings > Interior lighting››› page 27).

Note

The reading lights switch off when the vehi-cle is locked using a key or after several mi-nutes if the key is removed from the ignition.This prevents the battery from discharging.

Visibility

Sun visors

Fig. 141 Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-senger sun visors:

● Lower the sun visor towards the wind-screen.

● The sun visor can be pulled out of itsmounting and turned towards the door››› Fig. 141 1 .

● Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon-gitudinally backwards.

1) Depending on the level of equipment fitted in thevehicle, LEDs can be used for the following interiorlights: front courtesy light, rear courtesy light, foot-well light and sun visor light.

138


Vanity mirror light

There may be a vanity mirror, with a cover, onthe rear of the sun visor. When the cover isopened 2 a light comes on.

The lamp goes out when the vanity mirrorcover is closed or the sun visor is pushedback up.

WARNING

Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.

● Always store sun blinds and visors in theirhousing when not in use.

Note

The light above the sun visor automaticallyswitches off after a few minutes in certainconditions. This prevents the battery fromdischarging.

Sun blind*3 Applies to the model: LEON ST

Fig. 142 Rear window: sun blind.

Rear window sun blind*

– Pull out the visor and hook it into the hooksin the centre of the top of the door frame››› Fig. 142.

Windscreen wiper and windowwiper systems

Window wiper lever


CAUTION

If the ignition is switched off with the wind-screen wipers active, they complete their

wipe before returning to the rest position.Ice, snow and other obstacles on the wind-screen may damage the wiper and the wind-screen wiper motor.

● If necessary, remove snow and ice from thewindscreen wipers before starting your jour-ney.

● Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wipersfrom the glass. SEAT recommends a de-icerspray for this operation.

● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers ifthe windscreen is dry. Cleaning with thewindscreen wipers while dry can cause dam-age.

● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it mayhelp to leave the vehicle parked with the wip-ers in service position ››› page 63.

Note

● The windscreen and window wipers onlyfunction when the ignition is switched on andthe bonnet or rear lid, respectively, areclosed.

● The interval wipe speed varies according tothe vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle ismoving, the more often the windscreen iscleaned.

● The rear wiper is automatically switched onwhen the windscreen wiper is on and the caris in reverse gear.

139

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Windscreen wiper functions

Windscreen wiper performance in different sit-uations

If the vehicle is at astandstill

The activated position provision-ally changes to the previous posi-tion.

During automaticwipe

The air conditioner comes on forapproximately 30 seconds in airrecirculation mode to prevent thesmell of the windscreen washerfluid entering the inside the vehi-cle.

For the interval wipe

Intervals between wipes dependon the vehicle's speed. The high-er the vehicle speed the shorterthe intervals.

Heated windscreen washer jets

The heating only thaws the frozen jets, itdoes not thaw the water in the washer hoses.When the ignition is switched on the heatedwindscreen washer jets automatically adjustthe heat depending on the ambient tempera-ture.

Headlight wash/wipe system

The headlight washers/wipers clean theheadlight lenses.

After the ignition is switched on, the first andevery fifth time the windscreen washer isswitched on, the headlights are also washed.

Therefore, the windscreen wiper lever shouldbe pulled towards the steering wheel whenthe dipped beam or main beam are on. Anyincrusted dirt (such as insects) should becleaned regularly (e.g. when refuelling).

To ensure the headlight washers work cor-rectly in winter, any snow which has got intothe bumper jet supports should be cleanedaway. If necessary, remove snow with an anti-icing spray.

Note

The wiper will try to wipe away any obstaclesthat are on the windscreen. The wiper willstop moving if the obstacle blocks its path.Remove the obstacle and switch the wiperback on again.

Rain sensor*

Fig. 143 Windscreen wiper lever: adjustingthe rain sensor A

Fig. 144 Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of thewindscreen wiper intervals, depending onthe amount of rain ››› . The sensitivity of therain sensor can be adjusted manually. Man-ual wipe ››› page 139.

Move the lever to the required position››› Fig. 143:

Rain sensor off.

Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-sary.

Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor

– Set control to the right: highly sensi-tive.

– Set control to the left: less sensitive.

When the ignition is switched off and thenback on, the rain sensor stays on and startsoperating again when the windscreen wipersare in position 1 and the vehicle is travel-ling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph).

0

1

A

140


Rain sensor modified behaviour

Possible causes of faults and mistaken read-ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 144 ofthe rain sensor include:

● Damaged blades: a film of water on thedamaged blades may lengthen the activationtime, reduce the washing intervals or resultin a fast and continuous wipe.

● Insects: insects on the sensor may triggerthe windscreen wiper.

● Salt on roads: in winter, salt spread in theroads may cause an extra long wipe when thewindscreen is almost dry.

● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotuseffect) or traces of detergent (car wash) mayreduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor ormake it react more slowly, later or not at all.

● Cracked windscreen: the impact of a stonewill trigger a single wipe cycle with the rainsensor on. Next the rain sensor detects thereduction in the sensitive surface area andadapts accordingly. The behaviour of the sen-sor will vary with the size of the damagecaused by the stone.

WARNING

The rain sensor may not detect enough rainto switch on the wipers.

● If necessary, switch on the wipers manuallywhen water on the windscreen obstructs visi-bility.

Note

● Clean the sensitive surface of the rain sen-sor regularly and check the blades for dam-age ››› Fig. 144 (arrow).

● To remove wax and coatings, we recom-mend a window cleaner containing alcohol.

Mirror

Anti-dazzle rear vision mirrors

Your vehicle is fitted with an interior rear vi-sion mirror with a manual or automatic* con-trol for anti-dazzle position.

Interior rear vision mirror with manual set-ting for anti-dazzle position

– Position the small lever of the lower edgeof the mirror to face towards the rear.

WARNING

In the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluidmay leak. This could cause irritation to theskin, eyes and respiratory organs. If youcome into contact with this liquid, it must berinsed with large quantities of water. If neces-sary, get medial help.

CAUTION

In the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluidmay leak. This liquid attacks plastic surfaces.Clean it with a wet sponge as soon as possi-ble.

Note

● If the light incident in the interior rear vi-sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sunblind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror withautomatic setting will not operate perfectly.

● When the interior lights are on or reversegear engaged, the mirrors do not darken withautomatic adjustment for anti-dazzle posi-tion.

141

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Adjusting the exterior rear view mir-rors

Fig. 145 Driver door: control for the exteriormirror.


Synchronized regulation of the exterior mir-rors

● In the Settings - Convenience menu,select whether or not the exterior mirrorsshould move in synchronisation.

● Turn the knob to position L1).

● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. Theright exterior mirror will be adjusted at thesame time (synchronised).

● If necessary the right exterior mirror adjust-ment may need correcting. turn the control toposition R1).

● In the Easy Connect system the exterior mir-rors can be adjusted using the buttonand the function button SETUP .

Tilt function for front passenger exterior mir-ror*

When parking backwards, and in order to beable to see the kerb, the passenger side mir-ror can be automatically tilted towards thepassenger to provide a better view of thekerb. The control must be in the position R1)

for this feature to be operational.

The mirror returns to its original position assoon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h(9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re-turns to its original position if the position ofthe control is adjusted.

Storing the rear view mirror settings for thetilt function


● Access the Easy Connect system, MenuCAR , function “Rear view mirrors and wind-

screen wipers” and select “lower while re-versing” ››› page 110.

● Select the R1) position on the control.

● Select reverse gear.

● Adjust the front passenger exterior mirrorso that you can see, for example, the kerbarea well.

● Release the reverse gear.

● The adjusted position for the rear view mir-ror is stored.

Fold in the exterior mirrors after parking(convenience function)*

The Easy Connect system, Menu CAR , func-tion “Rear view mirrors and windscreen wip-ers” can be used to have the exterior mirrorsfold in when the vehicle is parked››› page 110.

When the vehicle is locked with the remotecontrol, by pressing for more than approxi-mately 1 second the exterior mirrors are fol-ded in automatically. When the vehicle isopened with the remote control, the exteriormirrors are deployed automatically.

WARNING

Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors give alarger field of vision. However, they make ob-jects look smaller and further away than theyreally are. If you use these mirrors to esti-mate the distance to vehicles behind you

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is symmet-rical.

142

Seats and head restraints

when changing lane, you could misjudge thedistance. Risk of accident!

CAUTION

● If one of the mirror housings is knocked outof position (e.g. when parking), the mirrorsmust first be fully retracted with the electriccontrol. Do not readjust the mirror housing byhand, as this will interfere with the mirror ad-juster function.

● Before washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash, please make sure to retract the ex-terior mirrors to prevent them from beingdamaged. Electrically retractable exteriormirrors must not be folded in or out by hand.Always use the electrical power control.

Note

If the electrical adjustment should fail to op-erate, both of the mirrors can be adjusted byhand by lightly pressing the edge of the mir-ror glass.


Adjusting the seats and headr-ests

Manual adjustment of seats


WARNING

The safe driving chapter contains importantinformation, tips, suggestions and warningsthat you should read and observe for yourown safety and the safety of your passengers››› page 65.

WARNING

● Adjust the front seats only when the vehi-cle is stationary. Failure to follow this instruc-tion could result in an accident.

● Be careful when adjusting the seat height.Careless or uncontrolled adjustment cancause injuries.

● The front seat backrests must not be re-clined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts andthe airbag system might not protect as theyshould, with the subsequent danger of injury.

Electric driver's seat adjustment*


WARNING

● If the electric front seats are used negli-gently or without paying due attention, it cancause serious injury.

● The front seats can also be electrically ad-justed when the ignition is switched off. Nev-er leave a child or any other person who mayneed help in the vehicle.

● In the event of an emergency, electrical ad-justment can be stopped by pressing anycontrol.

CAUTION

To avoid damaging the electrical componentsof the front seats, please refrain from kneel-ing on the seat or applying sharp pressure ata single point to the seat cushion and back-rest.

Note

● It may not be possible to electrically adjustthe seat if the vehicle battery is very low.

● If the engine is started while the seats arebeing electrically adjusted, the adjustmentwill stop.

143

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Adjusting the front head restraints


Adjust the head restraint ››› page 14 sothat as far as possible the top of the head re-straint is level with the top of your head.When this is not possible, try to get as closeas possible to this position.

Adjusting the rear head restraints

Fig. 146 Rear centre head restraint: releasepoint.

When transporting people in the back seat,place the head restraints of the occupiedseats at a minimum of the next socket up››› .

Adjusting the head restraints

– To set the head restraint higher, grasp thesides with both hands and move it up-wards, until you see it engage.

– To set the head restraint lower down, pressthe 1 ››› Fig. 146 button and move itdownwards.

Removing the head restraint

To remove the head restraint, the correspond-ing backrest must be partially folded forward.

– Unlock the backrest ››› page 147.

– Move the head restraint upwards until it ar-rives to the top.

– Press button 1 ››› Fig. 146, while simulta-neously pressing on the security hole 2

››› Fig. 146 with a flat screwdriver a maxi-mum of 5 mm wide, and remove the headrestraint.

– Move the backrest until it engages properly››› .

Fitting the head restraint

To mount the external head restraints, thecorresponding backrest must be partially fol-ded forward.

– Unlock the backrest ››› page 147.

– Insert the head restraint bars into theguides until they perceptibly engage. It

should not be possible to remove the headrestraint from the backrest.

– Move the backrest until it engages properly››› .

WARNING

● Please observe the general notes››› page 69.

● Remove the rear head restraints only whenit is necessary for the placement of a childseat ››› page 82. After removing a child seat,remount the head restraint immediately.Travelling with the head restraints removedor improperly adjusted increases the risk ofsevere injuries.

Seat functions

Introduction

WARNING

Inappropriate use of the seat functions cancause severe injuries.

● Assume the proper sitting position beforeyour trip and remain in it throughout. This al-so applies to the other occupants.

● Always keep hands, fingers, feet and otherparts of the body away from the operating ra-dius and the adjustment of seats.

144


Seat heating

Fig. 147 In the centre console: front seatsheating switch

The seat cushions can be heated electricallywhen the ignition is switched on. The back-rest is also heated in some versions.

The seat heating should not be engaged inany of the following conditions:

● The seat is unoccupied.

● The seat has a covering.

● There is a child seat installed in the seat.

● The seat cushion is wet or damp.

● The indoor or outdoor temperature is great-er than 25°C (77°F).

Activate

Press the button or . Seat heating isswitched on fully.

Adjusting the heating output

Press the button or repeatedly until thedesired intensity level is reached.

Deactivating

Press the button or until all warninglamps switch off.

WARNING

People who, because of medications, paraly-sis or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) cannotperceive pain or temperature, or have a limi-ted perception thereof, may suffer burns tothe back, buttocks or legs when using seatheating, an occurrence that may entail a verylengthy recovery period or from which it maynot be possible to recover fully. Seek medicaladvice if you have doubts regarding yourhealth.

● People with limited pain and temperaturethresholds must never use seat heating.

WARNING

If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can ad-versely affect the operation of the seat heat-ing, increasing the risk of burns.

● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior tousing the seat heater.

● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that iswet or damp.

● Do not leave clothing that is wet or dampon the seat.

● Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION

● To avoid damaging the heating elements ofthe seat heaters, please do not kneel on theseat or apply sharp pressure to a single pointon the seat cushion or backrest.

● Liquids, sharps objects and insulating ma-terials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damagethe seat heating.

● In the event of smells, switch off the seatheating immediately and have it inspected bya specialised workshop.


The seat heating should remain on only whenneeded. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuelwaste.

Front centre armrest

The centre armrest can be adjusted to variouslevels.

Adjusting the centre armrest

– To adjust the tilt, lift the armrest from thestarting position so that it is engaged.

– To return the armrest to the starting posi-tion, remove the armrest from the upperfixed position and lower it. »

145

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

The armrest can be moved backwards andforwards.

Folding down the passenger seatbackrest*

3 Applies to the model: LEON ST

Fig. 148 Front passenger seat: lever for fold-ing down the backrest.

The front passenger seat can be folded downto increase the storage space.

● Pull lever 1 ››› Fig. 148 and push the seatbackrest 2 until the backrest is horizontal.

WARNING

When the front passenger seat is foldeddown it cannot be occupied.

folding down and raising the rear seatbackrest

3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC

Fig. 149 Clip to support the seat belt.

Fig. 150 Backrest release lever.

The backrests can be folded forward individu-ally or together.

Folding the backrest forwards

– Place the side seat belts in the trim clip››› Fig. 149.

– Slide the head restraint(s) downwards››› page 144.

– Press the release lever ››› Fig. 150 1 in thedirection of the arrow.

– Fold the backrest forwards.

Converting the table to a seat

– Raise the backrest until it engages in itsupright position ››› . The red marking onthe tab ››› Fig. 150 2 should no longer bevisible when the backrest is properly se-cured.

WARNING

The safe driving chapter contains importantinformation, tips, suggestions and warningsthat you should read and observe for yourown safety and the safety of your passengers››› page 65.

WARNING

● Make sure that the rear backrest is securelylocked in position so that the seat belt canprovide proper protection on the centre rearseat.

● The rear backrest must always be securelylatched so that objects stored in the luggage

146


compartment will not fly forward through theinterior during sudden braking.

CAUTION

● With the backrest inclined there is a dangerof damaging the rear head restraints whenadjusting the front seats backwards.

● When folding the backrest forwards, makesure to place the side seat belts in the trimclip to prevent them from being damaged bybecoming trapped in the backrest lock.

Folding down and lifting the rear seatbackrest


Fig. 151 On the rear seat backrest: releasecatch 1 ; red mark 2 .

Fig. 152 In the luggage compartment: leversfor remote release of the left part 1 and rightpart 2 of the rear seat backrest.

The rear seat backrest is split and each partbe lowered separately to extend the luggagecompartment.

When the rear seat backrest is lowered no-body else can travel in the correspondingseats (not even a child).

Lowering the rear seat backrest with the un-lock button

● Lower the head restraint properly.

● Push the unlock button ››› Fig. 151 1 for-wards and at the same time lift the backrest.

● The rear seat backrest is not engaged whenthe red marking of the button 2 is visible.

Lowering the rear seat backrest with the re-mote release lever

● Lower the head restraint properly.

● Open the rear lid.

● Pull the remote release lever of the left part››› Fig. 152 1 or right part 2 of the backrestin the direction of the arrow. The releasedpart of the rear seat backrest is folded auto-matically down and forwards.

● If this occurs, close the rear lid.

The rear seat backrest is not engaged whenthe red marking of the button ››› Fig. 151 2

is visible.

Folding up the rear seat backrest

● Lift the backrest and press it firmly into thelock until it engages ››› .

● It should not be possible to see the redmark of the unlock button 2 .

● The backrest must be properly engaged.

WARNING

Serious injuries can be caused if the rear seatbackrest is lowered or lifted without due careand attention.

● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrestwhile driving.

● Do no trap or damage the seat belt whenraising the rear seat backrest.

● When lowering or lifting the rear seat back-rest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and otherbody parts out of its path. »

147

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● For the rear seat belts to offer the necessa-ry protection all the parts of the rear backrestmust be properly engaged. This is particular-ly important in the case of the centre rearseat. If someone is seated in a seat whosebackrest is not properly engaged they will flyforward, along with the backrest, during anaccident or a sudden driving or braking ma-noeuvre.

● A red signal on the button 2 warns thatthe backrest is not engaged. Always checkthat the red marking is not visible when thebackrest is in the upright position.

● When the rear seat backrest is lowered or isnot properly engaged nobody else can travelin the corresponding seats (not even a child).

CAUTION

Serious damage can be caused to the vehicleand other objects if the rear seat backrest islowered or lifted without due care and atten-tion.

● Before lowering the rear seat backrest, al-ways adjust the front seats so that neitherthe head restraints nor the cushions of therear backrest can hit them.

Transport and practicalequipment

Storage compartments

Storage areas under the front seats*

Fig. 153 Storage compartment under thefront seats.

There is a storage compartment with a coverunder each front seat.

The drawer* is opened by pulling on the han-dle of the cover ››› Fig. 153.

To close the drawer, press the cover until itlocks into position.

WARNING

● The drawers will hold a maximum weight of1.5 kg.

● Do not drive with the drawer cover open.There is an injury risk for passengers if thecargo is released in case of sudden braking oran accident.

Folding table*3 Applies to the model: LEON ST

Fig. 154 Left-hand front seat: folding table.

– To open the tray, open it up in the directionof the arrow ››› Fig. 154.

WARNING

● The folding trays may not be folded downwhilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone isseated on the second row of seats. There is arisk of injury during a sudden braking ma-noeuvre! The tray must therefore be closedand properly secured whilst the vehicle is inmotion.

148

Transport and practical equipment

● Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders.During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres,sudden braking or an accident, the hot drinkcould be spilled. Danger of scalding.

CAUTION

When driving, do not leave open cans in thecup holders. The drink might be spilt on brak-ing, for example, and could damage the vehi-cle.

Drink holders

Fig. 155 Centre console: front drink holders.

Front drink holders

– Place drinks in the holder ››› Fig. 155.Placement of two drinks is possible. Thereis also the possibility of placing larger plas-tic bottles in the trims of the doors.

WARNING

● Do not place any hot drinks in the drinkholder while the vehicle is moving. Hot drinkscould spill and cause burns, which may causean accident.

● Do not use hard china cups or glasses.These could cause injury in the event of anaccident.

CAUTION

You should avoid putting open drinks con-tainers in the drink holders. The drinks couldotherwise spill over and cause damage to e.g.the electrical equipment or the seat covers.

Glove compartment

Fig. 156 Glove compartment

Opening/closing

– To open the glove compartment, pull thehandle in the direction of the arrow.

– To close the glove compartment, move thecover upwards until it engages.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CDplayer is located in the glove compartment.Separate operating instructions are enclosedfor this equipment in the corresponding In-struction Manual.

WARNING

The cover of the glove compartment shouldalways be closed while driving. Failure to fol-low this instruction could result in an acci-dent.

Other storage compartments

You will find more object holders, compart-ments and supports in other parts of the ve-hicle:

● In the top of the glove compartment in ve-hicles that do not have a CD reader. The loadof the compartment should not exceed1.2 kg.

● In the centre console under the centre arm-rest*.

● In the driver side panel there is a remova-ble box for access to fuses and relays. The »

149

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

load of the compartment should not exceed0.2 kg.

● Coat hooks in the door frames ››› .

● Other storage compartments are found inthe rear seat, to the left and the right of theseats.

WARNING

● Please make sure that any items of clothinghanging from the coat hooks do not obstructyour view to the rear.

● The coat hooks should only be used forlightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavyor sharp objects in the pockets.

● Do not use clothes hangers to hang up theclothing, as this could interfere with the func-tion of the head-protection airbags.

Power sockets

Fig. 157 Centre console: front/rear 12-voltpower socket.

Fig. 158 Detailed view of the side trim in theluggage compartment: 12-volt power socket(applies only to the LEON ST model).

In the centre console

– Remove the connector located in the centreconsole of the power socket ››› Fig. 157.

– Insert the plug of the electrical applianceinto the power socket.

In the luggage compartment (applies only tothe LEON ST model)

– Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 158.

– Insert the plug of the electrical applianceinto the power socket.

Electrical equipment can be connected to the12 volt power socket. The appliances connec-ted to each power socket must not exceed apower rating of 120 Watt.

WARNING

The power socket works only when the igni-tion is on. Improper use may cause seriousinjury or even fire. Children should thereforenot be left in the vehicle unattended if thebutton is also left behind. Otherwise there isa possibility that they may be injured.

CAUTION

Always use the correct type of plugs to avoiddamaging the sockets.

Note

The use of electrical appliances with the en-gine switched off will cause a battery dis-charge.

150


Storing objects

Loading the luggage compartment


All luggage and other loose objects must besafely secured in the luggage compartment.Unsecured objects which shift back and forthcould impair the driving safety or drivingcharacteristics of the vehicle by shifting thecentre of gravity.

– Distribute the load evenly in the luggagecompartment.

– Place heavy objects as far forward as possi-ble in the luggage compartment.

– Place the heavy objects first.

– Secure heavy objects to the fitted fasteningrings ››› page 157.

WARNING

● Loose luggage and other objects in the lug-gage compartment could cause serious inju-ries.

● Always stow objects in the luggage com-partment and secure them on the fasteningrings.

● Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob-jects.

● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring

vehicle occupants or passers-by. This in-creased risk of injury will be further increasedif a loose object is struck by an inflating air-bag. If this happens, objects may shoot out-ward like a missile. Risk of fatal injury.

● Please note that the centre of gravity mayshift when transporting heavy objects; thismay affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjustyour speed and driving style accordingly, toavoid accidents.

● Never exceed the allowed axle weights orallowed maximum weight. If said weights areexceeded, the driving characteristics of thevehicle may change, leading to accidents, in-juries and damage to the vehicle.

● Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe-cially when the rear lid is open. Childrencould climb into the luggage compartment,closing the door behind them; they will betrapped and run the risk of death.

● Never allow children to play in or aroundthe vehicle. Close and lock all the doors andrear lid when you leave the vehicle. Beforeyou lock the vehicle, make sure that there areno adults or children in the vehicle.

Note

● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reducefogging of the windows. Used air escapesthrough ventilation slits in the side trim ofthe luggage compartment. Ensure that theventilation slots are never covered.

● Straps for securing the load to the fasten-ing rings are commercially available.

Luggage compartment cover3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC

Fig. 159 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing and installing the rear shelf.

Fig. 160 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing and installing the rear shelf. »

151

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

The luggage compartment cover blocks theview into the luggage compartment.

Removing

● Unhook the loops ››› Fig. 159 B from theirhooks A .

● Remove the shelf from the side supports››› Fig. 160 pulling it up and out.

● If necessary, the rear shelf can be storedunder the luggage compartment variablefloor ››› page 153

Fitting

● Insert the rear shelf horizontally so that itcoincides with the “plate” on the axis of thesupports ››› Fig. 160 and press down until itclicks into place.

● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 159 B onto the rearlid ››› .

WARNING

● The luggage compartment cover must al-ways be fixed properly (risk of accident).

● The luggage compartment cover should notbe used as a storage shelf. Articles placed onthis cover could cause injury to vehicle occu-pants in an accident or if the brakes are ap-plied suddenly.

Retractable rear shelf3 Applies to the model: LEON ST

Fig. 161 In the luggage compartment: retract-ing or pulling out the rear shelf.

Fig. 162 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing the rear shelf.

Opening the rear shelf

● Pull evenly on the rear shelf using its han-dle ››› Fig. 161 1 in a backwards directionuntil it audibly clicks into place.

Retracting the rear shelf

● Press the handle of the rear shelf in the di-rection of the arrow to release it ››› Fig. 161.

The shelf will automatically move towards theend and will retract completely.

Removing the rear shelf

● Press the support of the rear shelf››› Fig. 162 1 in the direction of the arrow.

● Remove the rear shelf through the supportand upwards.

152


● The rear shelf can be stored under the lug-gage compartment variable floor when thelatter is in the top position (except for vehi-cles equipped with natural gas engine CNG)››› page 154.

Fitting the rear shelf

● Place the rear shelf in the housing providedin the left side cover.

● Engage the support of the rear shelf››› Fig. 162 1 in the right housing.

● Check that the support ››› Fig. 162 1 isproperly engaged.

WARNING

Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car-ried on the rear shelf can cause serious injuryin case of sudden manoeuvring or braking orin case of an accident.

● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy objectsor in bags on the rear shelf.

● Never carry animals on the rear shelf.

CAUTION

To retract the rear shelf, press on its handlein a downwards only direction; if you press itupwards it may lead to its axles breaking.

Storing the rear shelf3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC

Fig. 163 In the luggage compartment: coversfor storing the rear shelf.

Fig. 164 In the luggage compartment: fittingthe storage compartment shelf.

The rear shelf can be stored under the lug-gage compartment variable floor.

● Remove the left and right covers››› Fig. 163.

● Press the rear shelf until it engages in itshousing ››› Fig. 164.

● Put the left and right covers in their originalposition.

153

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Storing the rear shelf3 Applies to the model: LEON ST

Fig. 165 In the luggage compartment: hous-ing for storing the rear shelf.

Fig. 166 In the luggage compartment: hous-ing for storing the rear shelf.

The rear shelf can be stored under the lug-gage compartment variable floor.

● Remove covers ››› Fig. 165 A left and right.

● Press the head of the rear shelf in the direc-tion of the arrow until it engages in its hous-ing ››› Fig. 166.

● Put the left and right covers in their originalposition.

Use of the net partition behind thefront seat*


Fig. 167 In the luggage compartment: pullingout and securing the net partition.

Fig. 168 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing the net partition.

Pulling out and securing the net partition

● Pull up handle ››› Fig. 167 2 to remove thenet from the casing 4 .

● Hook in the net partition on the right side3 (magnified image).

● Hook in the net partition in the left sidehousing 1 pulling the rod.

The net partition is properly assembled whenthe T-shaped ends are firmly secured in thecorresponding housings 3 and 1 .

Retracting the net partition

● Unhook the rod from the housings 3 and1 .

● Roll up the net into the casing 4 loweringit with your hand.

154


Removing the net partition

● Fold the rear seat backrests forward.

● Press the left or right release catch››› Fig. 168 in the direction of the arrow 1 .

● Remove the casing from the support in thedirection of the arrow ››› Fig. 168 2 .

Fitting the net partition


● Fit the casing in the right and left supports.

● Press the casing into the left and right sup-ports in the opposite direction to the arrow››› Fig. 168 2 until it engages.

The red markings on the release buttonsshould no longer be visible.

WARNING

● Always secure objects, even when the netpartition is properly assembled.

● There should be nobody behind the assem-bled partition when the vehicle is moving.

CAUTION

Incorrect handling of the net partition couldcause damage.

● Do not “release” the net partition whenlowering it, as the net and other vehicle partscould be damaged. Roll down the net parti-tion by hand.

Use of the net partition with the rearseat backrests lowered


Fig. 169 Assembling the net partition in therear seat backrests.

Fig. 170 In the luggage compartment: netpartition hooked into the rear seat backrests.

Fitting the net partition


● Remove the net partition from the side sup-ports.

● Place the net casing in the rail slots in thedirection of the arrows ››› Fig. 169 1 .

● Push the casing towards the left side of thevehicle in the direction of arrow ››› Fig. 169

2 and as far as it will go.

● Check that the net is secure.

Pulling out and securing the net partition

● Pull up handle ››› Fig. 170 2 to remove thenet from the casing ››› Fig. 170 4 .

● Hook in the net partition on the right side››› Fig. 170 3 (magnified image).

● Hook in the net partition in the left sidehousing ››› Fig. 170 1 pulling the rod.

The net partition is properly assembled whenthe T-shaped ends are firmly secured in thecorresponding housings ››› Fig. 170 3 and

1 .

Retracting the net partition

● Remove the rod from the housings in thetrims of the roof side members.

● Roll up the net into the casing ››› Fig. 1704 lowering it with your hand. »

155

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Removing the net partition

● Pull the net casing out approximately 5 cmin the opposite direction to the arrow››› Fig. 169 2 .

● Remove the casing from the rails by pullingin the opposite direction to the arrows››› Fig. 169 1 .

● Lift the rear seat backrests.

WARNING

During a sudden driving or braking manoeu-vre, or in the event of an accident, objectscould be flung though the interior and causeserious or fatal injuries.

● Always secure objects, even when the netpartition is properly assembled.

● There should be nobody behind the assem-bled partition when the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

The rear seat backrests should only be liftedagain once the net partition has been disas-sembled.

CAUTION

Incorrect handling of the net partition couldcause damage.

● Do not “release” the net partition whenlowering it, as the net and other vehicle partscould be damaged. Roll down the net parti-tion by hand.

Tailboard for transporting long items*

Fig. 171 On the rear seat backrest: openingthe tailboard.

Fig. 172 In the luggage compartment: open-ing the tailboard.

On the rear seat, behind the central armrest,there is a tailboard for transporting longitems in the interior, such as skis.

To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objectsshould be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) beforethey are inserted through the tailboard.

When the armrest is down, nobody may trav-el in the centre rear seat.

Opening the tailboard

● Lower the centre armrest.

● Pull the release lever in the direction of thearrow and push the tailboard cover››› Fig. 171 1 down and forwards.

● Open the rear lid.

● Insert the long objects through the gapfrom the luggage compartment.

● Secure the objects with the seatbelt.

● Close the rear lid.

Closing the tailboard

● Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. Thered mark on the luggage compartment sideshould never be visible.

● Close the rear lid.

● Lift the centre armrest if necessary.

Note

The tailboard can also be opened from theluggage compartment. To do so, press the re-lease lever down, in the direction of the ar-row, and the cover upwards ››› Fig. 172.

156


Fastening rings*

Fig. 173 In the luggage compartment: fasten-ing rings (LEON/LEON SC model except ver-sions with spare wheel and CNG).

Fig. 174 In the luggage compartment: fasten-ing rings (LEON ST model).

In the front and rear part of the luggage com-partment there are fastening rings to securethe luggage ››› Fig. 174.

In order to use the fastening rings, they mustbe lifted beforehand1).

WARNING

If unsuitable or damaged belts or retainingstraps are used, they could break in the eventof braking or an accident. Objects could thenbe launched across the passenger compart-ment and cause serious or fatal injuries.

● Always use belts or retaining straps thatare suitable and in a good condition.

● Belts and retaining straps should be se-curely fastened to the fastening rings.

● Objects in the luggage compartment thatare unsecured could move suddenly and mod-ify the handling of the vehicle.

● Secure all objects, little and large.

● Never exceed the maximum tensile load ofthe fastening ring when securing objects.

● Never secure a child seat to the fasteningrings.

Note

● The maximum tensile load that the fasten-ing rings can support is 3.5 kN.

● Belts and securing systems for the appro-priate load can be obtained from specialiseddealerships. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership for this.

● The fastening rings are rendered unusablefor versions with spare wheel and CNG.

1) Valid only for the LEON ST model.157

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Retaining hooks

Fig. 175 In the luggage compartment: retain-ing hooks (LEON/LEON SC model).

Fig. 176 In the luggage compartment: retain-ing hooks (LEON ST model).

At the rear of the luggage compartment, onthe left and right, there are fixed retaininghooks ››› Fig. 176.

The retaining hooks have been designed tosecure light shopping bags.

In the front and rear part of the luggage com-partment there are fastening rings to securethe luggage ››› Fig. 173 and ››› Fig. 174.

WARNING

Never use the retaining hooks as fasteningrings. In case of sudden braking or an acci-dent, the hooks could break.

CAUTION

Each hook is designed for a maximum load of2.5 kg.

Net bag*

Fig. 177 In the luggage compartment: netbag hooked up at floor level (LEON ST model).

Fig. 178 In the luggage compartment: rings1 and hooks 2 for securing the net bag

(LEON ST model).

The luggage compartment prevents light lug-gage from moving. The net bag has a zip andcan be used to store small objects.

The net bag can be hooked up to the luggagecompartment in different ways.

Hooking the net bag into the luggage com-partment floor

● As applicable, lift the front fastening rings››› Fig. 177 2 .

● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings2 ››› . The bag zip should be facing up-

wards.

● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings1 .

158


Hook the net bag next to the load threshold

● Secure the short net hooks to the fasteningrings ››› Fig. 178 1 ››› . The bag zip shouldbe facing upwards.

● Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .

Removing the net bag

The hooked up net bag is taut ››› .

● Remove the hooks and the net bag strapsfrom the fastening rings and from the baghooks.

● Store the net bag in the luggage compart-ment.

WARNING

To secure the elastic net bag on the fasteningrings it must be stretched out. Once hookedup it is taut. If the net bag is hooked up or un-hooked incorrectly the hooks could cause in-juries.

● Always secure the net hooks properly sothat they do not suddenly release from thefastening rings when hooking or unhookingthem.

● On hooking or unhooking them, protectyour eyes and face in case the hooks are re-leased suddenly.

● Always hook up the net bag hooks in thedescribed order. If a hook is unexpectedly re-leased the risk of injury is increased.

Luggage compartment variable floor3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC

Fig. 179 Luggage compartment: variablefloor

Fig. 180 Luggage compartment: variablefloor

Variable floor in the tilted position

When the variable floor is tilted you can ac-cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.

● Lift the variable floor using handle››› Fig. 179 1 , pull it back and push thebackrest of the rear seat until the movablepart of the floor is resting on it.

● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 180(arrows).

159

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Luggage compartment variable floor3 Applies to the model: LEON ST

Fig. 181 Luggage compartment variablefloor: positions.

Fig. 182 Luggage compartment variablefloor: grooves tilted.

Variable floor in the high position

● Lift the floor using handle ››› Fig. 181 1

and pull it back until the front of the floor hasfully passed the supports 2 .

● Move the floor forward over the supports asfar as the rear seat backrest and then lowerthe floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in the low position

● Lift the floor using handle ››› Fig. 181 1

and pull it back until the front of the floor hasfully passed the supports 2 .

● Now match the front part with the lowergrooves of the supports and slide the floorforwards as far as the rear seat backrest andlower the floor at the same time with the han-dle 1 .

Variable floor in the tilted position

When the variable floor is tilted you can ac-cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.

● Lift the variable floor using handle››› Fig. 181 1 and pull it back until the frontof the floor has fully passed the tiltedgrooves ››› Fig. 182 3 .

● Run the floor through these grooves withthe help of handle 1 as the rear seat back-rest and until the floor is resting in thegrooves.

WARNING

During a sudden driving or braking manoeu-vre, or in the event of an accident, objectscould be flung though the interior and causeserious or fatal injuries.

● Always secure objects, even when the lug-gage compartment floor is properly lifted.

● Only objects that do not protrude morethan 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-ried between the rear seat and the raised lug-gage compartment floor.

● Only objects that do not weigh than ap-proximately 7.5 kg may be carried betweenthe rear seat and the raised luggage compart-ment floor.

CAUTION

● The maximum weight that can be loaded onthe luggage compartment variable floor inthe top position is 150 kg.

● Do not let the luggage compartment floorfall when closing it. Always carefully guide itdownwards in a controlled manner. Other-wise, the lining and the floor of the luggagecompartment could be damaged.

Note

SEAT recommends the use of straps to secureobjects to retaining rings.

Roof carrier

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross

160


bars or conventional roof carrier systems can-not be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in theroof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-proved cross bars and roof carrier systemscan be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roof carri-er system should be disassembled.

● When they are not used.

● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.

● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING

When heavy or bulky loads are transportedon the roof carrier system, car driving per-formance is affected, as the centre of gravityshifts and there is greater wind resistance.

● Always secure the load properly using beltsor retaining straps that are suitable and in agood condition.

● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a neg-ative effect on aerodynamics, the centre ofgravity and driving performance.

● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-fic conditions.

CAUTION

● Remove the cross bars and the roof carriersystem before entering a car wash.

● Vehicle height is increased by the installa-tion of cross bars or a roof carrier system andthe load secured on them. For this purpose,check that your vehicle's height does not sur-pass the headspace limit, for example, for un-derpasses or for entering garage doors.

● Cross bars, a roof carrier system and theload secured on them should not interferewith the roof aerial or hamper the path of thepanoramic sun roof ››› page 129 and the rearlid.

● On opening the rear lid make sure that itdoes not knock into the roof load.


When cross bars and a roof carrier system areinstalled, the increased air resistance meansthat the vehicle uses more fuel.

Attach the cross bars of the roof carri-er system

Fig. 183 Leon/Leon SC: attachment points forthe roof railings for the roof carrier system. »

161

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Fig. 184 Leon ST: attachment points for theroof railings for the roof carrier system.

The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe-cial roof carrier systems. For safety reasons,special fixtures must be used to safely trans-port luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards orboats on the roof. Suitable accessories canbe acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roof car-rier system properly. Always take the assem-bly instructions that come with the crossbarsand the roof carrier system in question intoaccount.

LEON model

The front and rear attachment points 1 and2 are only visible when the doors are open

››› Fig. 183 A.

Leon SC model

The front and rear attachment points 1 areonly visible when the doors are open. The

rear attachment points 3 are marked on thetop edge of the glass with arrow heads››› Fig. 183 B.

LEON ST model

The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-ings. The attachment points can be seen onbottom of the roof railing ››› Fig. 184.

WARNING

Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-bars and the roof carrier system may causethe whole system to detach from the roof andcause an accident and injuries.

● Always take the manufacturer assembly in-structions into account.

● Use only crossbars and the roof carrier sys-tem when they are in perfect condition andare properly secured.

● Secure the crossbars and the roof carriersystem properly.

● Check threaded joints and attachmentstravelling and if necessary tighten them afteryou have travelled a short distance. Whenmaking long trips, check the threaded jointswhenever you stop for a rest.

● Always fit the special roof carrier systemscorrectly for wheels, skis and surfboards, etc.

● Do not modify or repair the crossbars orroof carrier system.

Note

Always read the assembly instructions thatcome with the crossbars and the roof carriersystem carefully and keep them in the vehi-cle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbarsand the roof carrier system are properly in-stalled ››› .

Maximum authorised roof load

The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg.This figure comes from the combined weightof the roof carrier, the cross bars and the loaditself on the roof ››› .

Always check the weight of the roof carriersystem, the cross bars and the weight of theload to be transported and weigh them ifnecessary. Never exceed the maximum au-thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrierwith a lower weight rating, you will not beable to carry the maximum authorised roofload. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-mum weight limit for the roof carrier which islisted in the fitting instructions.

162

Air conditioning

Distributing a load

Distribute loads uniformly and secure themcorrectly ››› .

Check attachments

Once the cross bars and roof carrier systemhave been installed, check the bolted con-nections and attachments after a short jour-ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-cy.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised roof loadcan result in accidents and considerable vehi-cle damage.

● Never exceed the maximum authorisedload on the roof and on the axles or the vehi-cle's maximum authorised weight.

● Never exceed the load capacity of the crossbars and the roof carrier system, even if themaximum authorised roof load has not beenreached.

● Secure heavy items as far forward as possi-ble and distribute the vehicle load uniformly.

WARNING

If the load is loose or not secured, it could fallfrom the roof carrier system or cause acci-dents and injuries.

● Always use belts or retaining straps thatare suitable and in a good condition.

● Secure the load properly.

Air conditioning

Heating, ventilation and cool-ing

Introduction


Viewing Climatronic information

On the screen of Climatronic control unit andon the screen of the factory-fitted Easy Con-nect system, the theoretical values of thetemperature zones are shown.

The unit of temperature measurement can bechanged in the Easy Connect system.

Dust and pollen filter

The dust and pollen filter with its activatedcharcoal cartridge serves as a barrier againstimpurities in the air taken into the vehicle in-terior.

The dust and pollen filter must be changedregularly so that air conditioner performanceis not adversely affected.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely dueto use in areas with very high levels of airpollution, the filter must be changed morefrequently than stated in the Service Sched-ule.

WARNING

Reduced visibility through the windows in-creases the risk of serious accidents.

● Always ensure that all windows are free ofice and snow, and that they are not fogged,so as to maintain good visibility of everythingoutside.

● The maximum heat output required to de-frost windows as quickly as possible is onlyavailable when the engine has reached itsnormal running temperature. Only drive whenyou have good visibility.

● Always ensure that you use the heatingsystem, fresh air system, air conditioner andthe heated rear window to maintain good visi-bility to the outside.

● Never leave the air recirculation on for along period of time. If the cooling system isswitched off and air recirculation modeswitched on, the windows can mist over veryquickly, considerably limiting visibility.

● Switch air recirculation mode off when it isnot required.

WARNING

Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and re-duce driver concentration possibly resultingin a serious accident.

● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off oruse the air recirculation for long periods oftime; the air in the vehicle interior will not berefreshed. »

163

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

CAUTION

● Switch the air conditioner off if you think itmay be broken. This will avoid additionaldamage. Have the air conditioner checked bya specialised workshop.

● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT rec-ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.

Note

● When the cooling system is turned off, aircoming from the outside will not be dried. Toprevent fogging of the windows, SEAT recom-mends leaving the cooling system (compres-sor) turned on. To do this, press the button . The button lamp should light up.

● The maximum heat output required to de-frost windows as quickly as possible is onlyavailable when the engine has reached itsnormal running temperature.

● Keep the air intake slots in front of thewindscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en-sure heating and cooling are not impaired,and to prevent the windows from mistingover.

Adjust using the Easy Connect sys-tem*

3 Applies to vehicles with a Media SystemTouch/Colour.

In the Easy Connect system it is also possibleto perform various adjustments to the Clima-tronic.

Open the air conditioner menu

● Press the button of the Climatroniccontrols.

● OR: press the MENU button in Easy Con-nect. With the rotating switch select the airconditioner menu and open it.

On the touch screen you can see and changethe current settings, for example, the temper-ature set for the driver and passenger sides,the air distribution and the fan speed. Withbutton the driver and passenger sidetemperatures are synchronised ››› Book-let Media System Touch/Colour, chapter Airconditioning.

To switch a function on or off, or to select asubmenu, you must press the correspondingfunction button.

For more information about functions››› page 110.

Func-tion

buttonFunction

OFF Switch off and switch on the Climatronic.

SETUP

The air conditioning settings submenu isopened. It is possible to make the followingadjustments:Function button Air conditioning profile : to ad-just the level of the fan in AUTO mode. Youcan choose between low, medium andhigh.Function button Automatic air recirculation toswitch on and off automatic air recircula-tion ››› page 166.BACK function button to close the sub-

menu.

Adjust using the Easy Connect sys-tem*

3 Applies to vehicles with a Media System Plus/NaviSystem.

In the Easy Connect system it is also possibleto perform various adjustments to the Clima-tronic.

Open the air conditioner menu

● Press the button of the Climatroniccontrols.

On the top of the screen you can see andchange the current settings, such as, for ex-ample, the temperature set for the driver side

164

Air conditioning

and for that of passenger. Temperatures upto +22 °C (+72 °F) are shown with blue ar-rows, and temperatures over +22 °C (+72 °F)with red arrows.

To switch a function on or off, or to select asubmenu, you must press the correspondingfunction button.

Functionbutton

Function

Air condi-tioning pro-

file

Adjust the fan level in AUTO mode. Youcan choose between low, medium andhigh.

OFF Climatronic is switched off.

ON Climatronic is switched on.

SETUP

The air conditioning settings submenuis opened. It is possible to make the fol-lowing adjustments:Function button Air conditioning profile : toadjust the level of the fan in AUTOmode. You can choose between low, me-dium and high.Function button Automatic air recirculation

to switch on and off automatic air recir-culation ››› page 166.BACK function button to close the

submenu.

Functionbutton

Function

Automaticsupplemen-tary heating

Activate/deactivate the automatic acti-vation of the supplementary heating forcolder countries (only for engines withsupplementary heating). With the optiondeactivated, depending on the outsidetemperature the heating may need moretime than normal to reach a comfortabletemperature.

Air conditioning user instructions

The interior cooling system only works whenthe engine is running and fan is switched on.

The air conditioner operates most effectivelywith the windows and the panoramic slidingsunroof closed. However, if the vehicle hasheated up after standing in the sun for sometime, the air inside can be cooled more quick-ly by opening the windows and the panoram-ic sliding sunroof briefly.

Climatronic: change the temperature unit onthe screen of the radio or on the factory-fit-ted navigation system

Changing the temperature display from Cel-sius to Fahrenheit on radio or on the factory-fitted navigation system is done using themenu on the instrument panel››› page 30.

The cooling system cannot be activated

If the air conditioning system cannot beswitched on, this may be caused by the fol-lowing:

● The engine is not running.

● The fan is switched off.

● The air conditioner fuse has blown.

● The outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +3°C (+38°F).

● The air conditioner compressor has beentemporarily switched off because the enginecoolant temperature is too high.

● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the airconditioner checked by a specialised work-shop.

Special Characteristics

If the humidity and temperature outside thevehicle are high, condensation can drip offthe evaporator in the cooling system andform a pool underneath the vehicle. This isnormal and does not indicate a leak!

Note

After starting the engine, any residual humid-ity in the air conditioner could mist over thewindscreen. Switch on the defrost function assoon as possible to clear the windscreen ofcondensation.

165

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Air outlets

Fig. 185 On the dash panel: air vents

Air vents

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-lation in the vehicle interior, air vents››› Fig. 185 1 should remain open.

● Turn the corresponding thumbwheel (de-tail) in the required direction to open andclose the air vents. When the thumbwheel isin the position, the corresponding air ventis closed.

● Change the air direction using the ventila-tion grille lever.

There are other additional, non-adjustable airvents in the dash panel 2 , in the footwelland in the rear area of the interior.

Note

Food, medicine and other heat or cold sensi-tive objects should never be placed in front ofthe air outlets as they may be damaged ormade unsuitable for use by the air comingfrom the air vents.

Air recirculation mode

Basic points

Air recirculation:

Manual recirculation

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambientair from entering the interior.

When the outside temperature is very high,selecting manual air recirculation mode for ashort period refreshes the vehicle interiormore quickly.

For safety reasons, air recirculation mode isswitched off when the button is press-ed or the air distributor turned to .

Switching the manual air recirculation modeon and off

To switch system on: press the button un-til the warning lamp lights up.

To switch system off: press the button un-til the warning lamp goes off.

166

Driving

Functioning mode of automatic air recircula-tion (air conditioning menu)

With the automatic air recirculation mode ac-tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabininterior is enabled. If the system detects ahigh concentration of hazardous substancesin the ambient air, air recirculation mode isswitched on automatically. When the level ofimpurities drops to within a normal range, re-circulation mode is switched off.

The system is unable to detect unpleasantsmells.

The air recirculation will not connect auto-matically in versions without humidity sensorand in the following external conditions:

● The outside temperature is lower than +3°C(+38°F).

● The cooling system is switched off and theoutside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F).

● The cooling system is switched off, the out-side temperature is below +15°C (+59°F) andthe windscreen wipers are switched on.

Activation/deactivation of automatic air recir-culation is done in the air conditioner menu,under Configuration.

WARNING


● If the cooling system is switched off and airrecirculation mode switched on, the windowscan mist over very quickly, considerably limit-ing visibility.

● Switch air recirculation mode off when it isnot required.

CAUTION

Do not smoke when air recirculation isswitched on in vehicles with an air condition-er. The smoke taken in could lie on the cool-ing system vaporiser and on the activatedcharcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen fil-ter, leading to a permanently unpleasantsmell.

Note

Climatronic: air recirculation mode is activa-ted to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasantodours from entering the vehicle interiorwhen it is in reverse and while the automaticwindscreen wiper is working.

Driving

Ignition lock

Switching the ignition on and startingthe engine with the key

Fig. 186 Ignition key positions.


Diesel engines can take a few seconds longerthan usual to start on cold days. Thereforethe clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or thebrake pedal (automatic gearbox) must re-main pressed until the engine starts up. Dur-ing preheating, the warning lamp remainslit.

The preheating time depends on the coolantand exterior temperatures. With the engine atoperating temperature, or at outside temper-atures above +8°C, the warning lamp will »

167

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

light up for about one second. This meansthat the engine starts immediately.

If the engine does not immediately start up,interrupt the starting process and try againafter 30 seconds. To start the engine again,return the key to position 1 .

Start-Stop System*

If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stopsystem* switches off the engine, the ignitionremains switched on.

Automatic gearbox: before leaving the vehi-cle, make sure that the ignition is switchedoff and the selector lever is in position P.

Driver messages on the instrument paneldisplay

Press the clutchThis message appears on vehicles with amanual gearbox if the driver tries to start theengine without having the clutch pedalpressed. The engine will only start if youpress the clutch pedal.

Press the brakeThis message appears on vehicles with anautomatic gearbox if the driver tries to startthe engine without having the brake pedalpressed.

Select N or PThis message appears if you try to start orstop the engine when the selector lever ofthe automatic gearbox is not in position P orN. The engine can only start or stop in certainpositions.

Engage position P; the vehiclecan move; doors can only close inposition P.For safety reasons, this driver message ap-pears and an audible warning sounds if theselector lever of the automatic gearbox is notin position P after you switch off the ignition.Put the selector lever in position P, otherwisethe vehicle could roll away.

Gear change: selector lever inthe drive position!This driver message is displayed when theselector lever is not in the position P whenthe driver door is opened. Additionally, abuzzer will sound. Put the selector lever inposition P, otherwise the vehicle could rollaway.

Ignition is switched onThis driver message is displayed and a buz-zer is sounded when the driver door isopened with the ignition switched on.

WARNING

● Never run the engine in confined spaces, asthe exhaust gases are poisonous.

CAUTION

Avoid high engine speeds, full throttle andextreme load conditions until the engine hasreached its normal operating temperature,otherwise this can damage the engine.


Do not warm up the engine by idling it. Youshould drive off as soon as you start the en-gine. This will help avoid unnecessary ex-haust emissions.

Note

● If it is difficult to turn the ignition key tothe position 1 , turn the steering wheel toboth sides to release the steering lock.

● When starting from cold, the engine may bea little noisy for the first few seconds until oilpressure has built up in the hydraulic valvelifters. This is quite normal, and no cause forconcern.

● If the vehicle battery is disconnected andreconnected, the key must remain in the posi-tion 1 for around 5 seconds before startingup.

168

Driving

● Vehicles with automatic gearbox: afterswitching off the ignition, you can only re-move the ignition key if the selector lever isin position “P” (parking lock). Next, the se-lector lever is locked.

Switching off the engine with the key

Switching off the engine

– Stop the vehicle.

– Turn the ignition key to position 1

››› Fig. 186.

Engaging the steering wheel lock

In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the igni-tion key can only be removed when the selec-tor lever is in position P.

– Remove the key from the ignition in posi-tion 1 ››› Fig. 186 ››› .

– Turn the steering wheel until you hear it en-gage.

Possible vehicle theft is prevented with thesteering lock engaged.

WARNING

● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-cle is stationary. The brake servo and powersteering functions will not be completely cov-ered under warranty. More force may also beneeded to turn the steering wheel or to brake.

As you cannot steer and brake in the normalmanner, there is a greater risk of accidentsand serious injury.

● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-ing could suddenly lock, making it impossibleto steer the vehicle: risk of accident!

● Always take the key with you when youleave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-tant if there are children in the vehicle, asthey might otherwise be able to start the en-gine or use power-operated equipment (e.g.the electric windows), which could cause in-juries.

CAUTION

If the engine has been running under highload for a long time, there is a risk of heatbuilding up in the engine compartment afterit has been switched off; this could cause en-gine damage. For this reason, you should idlethe engine for approximately 2 minutes be-fore you switch it off.

Note

● After the engine is switched off the radiatorfan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even ifthe ignition is switched off. It is also possiblethat the fan turns itself on once more if thecoolant temperature increases due to theheat accumulated in the engine compartmentor due to its prolonged exposure to solar ra-diation.

● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stopsystem* switches off the engine, the ignitionremains switched on. Make sure that the igni-tion is switched off before leaving the vehi-cle, otherwise the battery could discharge.

Starter button*

Fig. 187 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: starter button.

The vehicle engine can be started with astarter button (Press & Drive). To do so, theremust be a valid key inside the vehicle in thearea of the front or rear seats.

Opening the driver's door when exiting thevehicle activates the electronic lock on thesteering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off manually

Briefly push the starter button without touch-ing the brake or clutch pedal ››› . »

169

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

For vehicles with both manual and automatictransmission, the starter button textSTART ENGINE STOP flashes like a heartbeat

when the system is preset for switching theignition on and off.

Automatic ignition switch-off

If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve-hicle key with them but leaving the ignitionon, the ignition is switched off automaticallyafter a certain time. If at that time the dippedbeam is on, the parking lights will stay on forapprox. 30 minutes. The side light can beturned off by blocking the vehicle››› page 116 or manually ››› page 131.

Emergency starting function

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,an emergency start-up will be required. Therelevant message will appear in the dashpanel display. This may happen when, for ex-ample, the battery of the vehicle key buttonis very low or flat:

● Immediately after pushing the starter but-ton, keep the vehicle key next to the righttrim of the steering column.

● The ignition connects and the engine startsautomatically.

Emergency disconnection

If the engine does not switch off after brieflypressing the starter button, an emergencydisconnect will be required:

● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-ond ››› .

● The engine turns off automatically.

Engine restart feature

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicleafter the engine stops, you will only have 5seconds to restart it. A warning will displayon the dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible tostart the engine without a valid key insidethe vehicle.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition on ve-hicles with the Start-Stop system

The ignition is switched off automaticallywhen the vehicle is stopped and the auto-matic engine shutdown is active, if:

● The driver's seat belt is not fastened,

● the driver does not step on any pedal,

● the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, ifthe dipped beam is on, the side light re-mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat-tery is sufficiently charged). If the driver locks

the vehicle or manually turns off the light, theside light goes out.

WARNING

Any accidental movement of the vehicle couldresult in serious injury.

● When switching on the ignition, do notpress the brake or clutch pedal, otherwisethe engine could start immediately.

WARNING

If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-out due care, this may cause accidents andserious injury.

● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthor-ised person could lock the vehicle, start theengine or connect the ignition and, in thisway, operate electronic equipment (e.g. thewindows).

Note

● Before leaving the vehicle, always discon-nect the ignition manually and, if appropri-ate, take into account the instructions on thescreen of the dash panel.

● If the vehicle is stationary for a long timewith the ignition on, the vehicle batterymight be discharged and it might not be pos-sible to start the engine.

● In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay inthe engine starting if it requires preheating.

170

Driving

● If during the STOP phase you press theSTART ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is

switched off and the button flashes.

● If the indication “Start-Stop system deacti-vated: Start the engine manually” is dis-played on the dash panel display, theSTART ENGINE STOP button will blink.

Starting the engine3 Valid for vehicles: with starter button.

StepStarting the engine with the starter but-ton ››› page 169.

1.Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5 isperformed.

1a.In vehicles with a manual gearbox: press andhold the clutch down until the engine starts.

2.Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selectorlever in position P or N.

3.

Briefly press the starter button ››› Fig. 187 with-out pressing the accelerator. For the engine tostart there must be a valid key in the vehicle.After starting the engine, the light of theSTART ENGINE STOP button changes to a fixed

light indicating that the engine has started.

4.If the engine does not start, stop and wait forapprox. 1 minute before trying again. If neces-sary, perform an emergency start ››› page 170.

5.Disconnect the electronic parking brake whenyou are about to start driving ››› page 172.

WARNING

Never leave the vehicle with the engine run-ning, especially if a gear or gear range is en-gaged. The vehicle could then suddenly moveor something strange could happen thatwould cause damage, fire or serious injury.

WARNING

Cold start sprays could explode or cause asudden increase in the engine speed.

● Never use sprays to cold start the engine.

CAUTION

● The starter motor or the engine may bedamaged if you try to start the engine whiledriving or if you restart it immediately afterswitching it off.

● If the engine is cold, avoid high enginespeeds, pushing the engine too hard and rap-id acceleration.

● Do not start the engine by pushing the ve-hicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could enterthe catalytic converter and damage it.

Note

● Do not wait until the engine warms up withthe vehicle stationary; if you have good visi-bility through the windows, start driving im-mediately. This helps the engine reach oper-ating temperature faster and reduces emis-sions.

● Electrical components with a high powerconsumption are switched off temporarilywhen the engine starts.

● When starting with a cold engine, noiselevels may briefly increase. This is quite nor-mal, and no cause for concern.

● When the outside temperature is below+5°C (+41°F), if the engine is diesel, somesmoke may appear under the vehicle whenthe fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.

Stopping the engine3 Valid for vehicles: with starter button.

StepSwitch off the engine with the starterbutton ››› page 169.

1. Stop the vehicle completely ››› .

2.Press and hold the brake pedal until the step4 is performed.

3.If you are driving an automatic vehicle, placethe selector lever in position P.

4.Connect the electronic parking brake››› page 172.

5.

Briefly press the start-up button ››› Fig. 187.The START ENGINE STOP button blinks again. Ifthe engine fails to switch off, perform an emer-gency disconnect ››› page 170.

6.If the vehicle is equipped with a manual gear-box, put it into 1st or reverse. »

171

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while the vehicleis moving. This could cause loss of control ofthe vehicle, accidents and serious injury.

● The airbags and belt tensioners do notwork when the ignition is switched off.

● The brake servo does not work with the en-gine off. Therefore, you need to press thebreak pedal harder to brake the vehicle.

● Power steering does not work when the en-gine is not running. You need more strengthto steer when the engine is switched off.

● If the ignition is switched off, the steeringcolumn could be locked, making it impossibleto control the vehicle.

CAUTION

If the engine is made to work hard for a longtime, it may overheat after being switchedoff. To prevent damage to the engine beforeswitching it off, leave it idle for approx. 2 mi-nutes in neutral.

Note

After switching off the engine, the cooling fanmay continue to operate in the engine com-partment for a few more minutes, even withthe ignition off. The radiator fan is automati-cally switched off.

“My Beat” Function

For vehicles with a convenience key there isthe “My Beat” function. This feature providesan additional indication of the vehicle igni-tion system.

When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by openingthe doors with the remote control, theSTART ENGINE STOP button flashes, drawing at-

tention to the relevant starter system button.

Upon switching the ignition on/off, the lightof the START ENGINE STOP button flashes. Withthe engine switched off, after a few seconds,the STOP ENGINE START button stops flashingand goes out.

With the engine running, theSTART ENGINE STOP button light stays on, indi-

cating that the engine is running. Uponswitching the ignition off with theSTART ENGINE STOP button, it starts flashing

again.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the“My Beat” function also offers additional in-formation:

● When the engine stops during the Stopphase, the light of the START ENGINE STOP but-ton stays on, since, even though the engineis off, the Start-Stop system is active.

● When the engine cannot be stated againwith the Start-Stop system, ››› page 191, andneeds to be started manually, the

START ENGINE STOP button flashes to indicatethis fact.

Braking and parking

Electronic parking brake*

Fig. 188 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: electronic parking brake button.

The electronic parking brake replaces thehandbrake.

Activating the electronic parking brake

The electronic parking brake can be activatedwhenever the vehicle is at a standstill, evenwhen the ignition is switched off. Activate itwhenever you leave or park the vehicle.

● Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 188 button.

● The parking brake is activated when thecontrol light of the ››› Fig. 188 button (arrow)

172

Driving

and the red control light of the display inthe dash panel are on.

● Release the button.

Releasing the electronic parking brake


● Press the button ››› Fig. 188. At the sametime step hard on the brake pedal or, if theengine is running, press the accelerator ped-al slightly.

● The control light of the ››› Fig. 188 button(arrow) and the red control light of the dis-play in the dash panel go out.

Automatic release of the electronic parkingbrake on starting the engine

The electronic parking brake is automaticallyswitched off when starting if, after the driv-er's door is closed and the driver's seat beltfastened, any of the following situations takeplace:

● On vehicles with an automatic gearbox: Agear range is engaged or the vehicle isswitched to another one and the acceleratorpedal is lightly pressed.

● In vehicles with a manual gearbox: Theclutch pedal is pressed fully before startingoff and the accelerator is pedal lightly press-ed.

● To facilitate certain manoeuvres there areexceptions that allow the automatic parking

brake to be released without the driver's seatbelt being fastened.

The parking brake can be prevented from be-ing automatically released by continuouslypulling up the ››› Fig. 188 switch whenstarting off.

The electronic parking brake is not discon-nected until the button is released. Thiscan facilitate starting off when a heavy loadis towed ››› page 234.

Automatic activation of the electronic park-ing brake when exiting the vehicle incorrect-ly

In vehicles with automatic transmission, theelectronic parking brake is activated auto-matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectlyif:

● The selector lever is in the D/S or R posi-tion or in the Tiptronic selection track.

● AND: the vehicle is stationary.

● AND: the driver door is open.

Emergency braking function

Only use the emergency brake function if youare unable to stop the vehicle with the footbrake ››› .

● Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 188 button inthis position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At

the same time, an acoustic warning can beheard.

● To stop the braking process, release thebutton or press the accelerator.

WARNING

The improper use of the electronic parkingbrake can cause accidents and serious injury.

● Never use the electronic parking brake tostop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency.The braking distance can be much longer. Al-ways use the foot brake.

● Never accelerate from the engine when agear range or a gear is engaged and the en-gine is running. The vehicle could move, evenif the electronic parking brake is activated.

CAUTION

To prevent the vehicle from unintentionallymoving when parking it, first apply the elec-tronic parking brake and then remove yourfoot from the brake pedal.

Note

● In vehicles with a manual gearbox, releas-ing the clutch and accelerating at the sametime automatically disconnects the electronicparking brake.

● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not bepossible to disconnect the electronic parkingbrake. Use the jump-start ››› page 61. »

173

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● When the electronic parking brake is ap-plied or released, noises may be heard.

● The system performs automatic and audi-ble tests sporadically in the parked vehicle ifsome time elapses without the electronicparking brake being used.

Using the handbrake

Fig. 189 Handbrake between the front seats.

The handbrake should be applied firmly toprevent the vehicle from accidentally rollingaway.

Always apply the handbrake when you leaveyour vehicle and when you park.

Applying the handbrake

– Pull the handbrake lever up firmly››› Fig. 189.

Releasing the handbrake

– Pull the lever up slightly and press the re-lease knob in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 189 and guide the handbrake leverdown fully ››› .

Always pull the handbrake all the way up, sothere is less risk of driving off with it still en-gaged ››› .

The handbrake warning lamp lights upwhen the handbrake is applied and the igni-tion switched on. The warning lamp turns offwhen the handbrake is released.

If you drive faster than 6 km/h (4 mph) withthe handbrake on, the following message*will appear on the instrument panel: HAND-BRAKE ON. You will also hear an audiblewarning.

WARNING

● Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi-cle when it is in motion. The braking distanceis considerably longer, because braking isonly applied to the rear wheels. Risk of acci-dent!

● If the handbrake is only partially released,this will cause the rear brakes to overheat,which can impair the function of the brakesystem and could lead to an accident. This al-so causes premature wear on the rear brakepads.

CAUTION

Always apply the handbrake before you leavethe vehicle. Put it in 1st gear as well.

Parking

The handbrake should always be firmly ap-plied when the vehicle is parked.

Always note the following points when park-ing the vehicle:

– Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

– Apply the handbrake.

– Put it in 1st gear.

– Switch the engine off and remove the keyfrom the ignition. Turn the steering wheelslightly to engage the steering lock.

– Never leave a vehicle key in the vehicle.

Additional notes on parking the vehicle ongradients:

Turn the steering wheel so that the vehiclerolls against the kerb if it started to roll.

● If the vehicle is parked facing downhill,turn the front wheels so that they point to-wards the kerb.

● If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turnthe front wheels so that they point away fromthe kerb.

174

Driving

● Secure the vehicle as usual by applying thehandbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear.

WARNING

● Take measures to reduce the risk of injurywhen you leave your vehicle unattended.

● Never park where the hot exhaust systemcould ignite inflammable materials, such asdry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.

● Never allow vehicle occupants to remain inthe vehicle when it is locked. They would beunable to open the vehicle from the inside,and could become trapped in the vehicle inan emergency. In the event of an emergency,locked doors will delay assistance to vehicleoccupants.

● Never leave children alone in the vehicle.They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex-ample, by releasing the handbrake or thegearbox lever.

● Depending on weather conditions, it maybecome extremely hot or cold inside the vehi-cle. This can be fatal.

Brakes

New brake pads

For the first 400 km (250 miles), new brakepads have not yet reached their maximumbraking capacity, and need to be “run in”first. However, you can compensate for theslightly reduced braking effect by applying

more pressure on the brake pedal. Avoidoverloading the brakes while running themin.

Wear

The rate of wear on the brake pads dependsa great deal on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is operated. This isa particular problem in urban traffic andshort stretches, or with very sporty driving.

Depending on the speed, the braking forceand the environmental conditions (for exam-ple, the temperature, air humidity, etc.)noises may be produced on braking.

Wet roads or road salt

In certain situations (for example, on drivingthrough flooded areas, in severe downpoursor after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-tion could be delayed if the discs and padsare damp, or frozen in winter. In this case thebrakes should be “dried” by pressing thebrake pedal several times.

At high speed and with the windscreen wip-ers activated, the brake pads will brieflytouch the brake discs. This takes place, al-though unnoticeable to the driver, at regularintervals to improve the response time of thebrakes when they are wet.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also betemporarily reduced if the vehicle is drivenfor some distance without using the brakes

when there is a lot of salt on the road in win-ter. The layer of salt that accumulates on thediscs and pads can be removed by gently ap-plying the brakes a few times.

Corrosion

There may be a tendency for corrosion toform on the discs and dirt to build up on thebrake pads if the vehicle is used infrequentlyor the brakes are not used very often.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or ifrust has formed on the disks, it is advisableto clean off the pads and disks by brakingfirmly a few times at a moderately high speed››› .

Fault in the brake system

If the brake pedal travel should ever increasesuddenly, this may mean that one of the twobrake circuits has failed. Drive immediatelyto the nearest specialised workshop andhave the fault repaired. Drive there slowlyand remember that you will have to applymore pressure on the brake pedal and allowfor longer stopping distances.

Low brake fluid level

Malfunctions can occur in the brake system ifthe brake fluid level is too low. The brake flu-id level is monitored electronically. »

175

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Brake servo

The brake servo increases the pressure youapply to the brake pedal. It works only whenthe engine is running.

WARNING

● Apply the brakes heavily to clean the brakesystem only in a suitable traffic situation. Donot put other road users in danger: there isrisk of causing an accident.

● Ensure the vehicle does not move while inneutral, when the engine is stopped. Failureto follow this instruction could result in anaccident.

● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and issubjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles canform in the brake system. This reduces the ef-ficiency of the brakes.

CAUTION

● Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving yourfoot on the pedal when it is not necessary tobrake. This overheats the brakes, resulting inlonger stopping distances and greater wear.

● Before driving down a long, steep gradient,it is advisable to reduce speed and select alower gear. This makes use of engine brakingand relieves the brakes. If you still have touse the brakes, it is better to brake firmly atintervals than to apply the brakes continu-ously.

Note

● If the brake servo is out of action, for exam-ple when the car is being towed, you willhave to press the brake pedal considerablyharder than normal to make up for the lack ofservo assistance.

● If you wish to equip the vehicle with acces-sories such as a front spoiler or wheel covers,it is important that the flow of air to the frontwheels is not obstructed, otherwise thebrakes can overheat.

Braking and stability systems

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

The ESC helps to improve safety. It reducesthe tendency to skid and improves the stabil-ity and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESCdetects critical handling situations, such asvehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspinon the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehi-cle by braking individual wheels or by reduc-ing the engine torque. The warning lamp willflash on the instrument panel when the ESCis intervening .

ESC includes the Anti-lock brake system(ABS), the brake assist system, the tractioncontrol system (ASR), electronic differentiallock (EDL), electronic self-locking*, selectivetorque control* and tractor-trailer sway miti-

gation*. ESC also helps stabilise the vehicleby changing the torque.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-der braking until the vehicle has reached avirtual standstill. You can continue to steerthe vehicle even when the brakes are on full.Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do notpump the brakes. You will feel the brake ped-al pulsate while the ABS is working.

Brake assist system

The brake assist system can reduce the re-quired braking distance. The braking force isautomatically boosted if you press the brakepedal quickly in an emergency. You mustkeep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-ger has passed.

Traction control system (ASR)

In the event of wheelspin, the traction controlsystem reduces the engine torque to matchthe amount of grip available. This helps thecar to start moving, accelerate or climb a gra-dient.

Electronic differential lock (EDL)

When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakesthe spinning wheel and directs the power tothe other driven wheel. This function is activeup to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).

176

Driving

To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheelfrom overheating, the EDL cuts out automati-cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve-hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switchon again automatically when the brake hascooled down.

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation*

If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will controlthe following: Tractor-trailers tend to sway.When the swaying of the trailer is felt by thevehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto-matically brake the towing vehicle within thelimits of the system and mitigate the sway.Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not availablein all countries.

Electronic torque management (XDS)

When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turnat a higher speed than the inner wheel. Inthis way, the wheel that is turning faster (out-er wheel) receives less drive torque than theinner wheel. This may mean that in certainsituations the torque delivered to the innerwheel is too high, causing the wheels tospin. On the other hand, the outer wheel isreceiving a lower drive torque than it couldtransmit. This causes an overall loss of lateralgrip on the front axle, resulting in understeeror “lengthening” of the trajectory.

The XDS system can detect and correct thiseffect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the insidewheel and counter the excess driving torqueof that wheel. This means that the driver'sdesired trajectory is much more precise.

The XDS system works in combination withthe ESC and is always active, even when ASRtraction control is disconnected, or the ESC inSport mode or disconnected.

Multi-collision brake

In an accident, the multi-collision brake canhelp the driver by braking to avoid the risk ofskidding during the accident, which couldlead to further collisions.

The multi-collision brake works for front, sideor rear accidents, when the airbag controlunit records its activation level and the acci-dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h(6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes thevehicle, as long as the accident has not dam-aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on-board network

The following actions control automatic brak-ing during the accident:

● When the driver presses the accelerator,the automatic braking does not take place.

● When the braking pressure through press-ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brakeautomatically.

● Multi-collision braking will not be availableif ESC is malfunctioning.

WARNING

● The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDL, electronic self-locking differential or selective torque controlsystems cannot exceed the limits imposed bythe laws of physics. Always bear this in mind,especially on wet or slippery roads. If you no-tice the systems cutting in, you should re-duce your speed immediately to suit the roadand traffic conditions. Do not be encouragedto take risks by the presence of more safetysystems. If you do, an accident may occur.

● Please remember that the accident risk al-ways increases if you drive fast, especially incorners or on a slippery road, or if you followtoo close behind the vehicle in front of you.The ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDL, electronicself-locking and selective torque control sys-tems cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci-dents!

● Accelerate with caution on slippery surfa-ces (for example, icy or snow-covered). De-spite the control systems, the driven wheelscould spin, affecting the stability of the vehi-cle: risk of accident!

Note

● The ABS and ASR will only operate correctlyif the four wheels have identical tyres. Anydifferences in the rolling radius of the tyrescan cause the system to reduce engine powerwhen this is not desired. »

177

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● The regulating processes of the systemscan make noises when they intervene.

● If the warning lamp lights up, or alter-natively, there could be a fault ››› page 109.

Switching on/off the ESC and ASR

Fig. 190 Centre console: Button for switchingon/off the ESC and ASR

The ESC is switched on automatically whenthe engine is started, and only works whenthe engine is running and includes the ABS,EDS and ASR systems.

The ASR and ESC function should only beswitched off in situations in which traction isinsufficient, among others:

● When driving in deep snow or on surfacesthat are not very firm.

● To “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck.

Then switch the ASR and ESC function backon.

Depending on finishes and versions, it ispossible either to disconnect only the ASR orelse activate ESC Sport mode.

ESC in “Sport” mode

Sport mode can be connected via the EasyConnect ››› page 110 system menu. The ac-tion of the ESC and the ASR is limited ››› .

The control lamp lights up. For vehicleswith a driver information system*, the driverwill be shown the electronic stabilitycontrol (ESC) option: sport.Warning! Limited stability.

Disable ESC “Sport” mode

Through the Easy Connect system menu››› page 110. The warning lamp will switchoff. For vehicles with a driver information sys-tem*, the driver will be shown the elec-tronic stability control (ESC)option: on.

Disable ASR

The Easy Connect system menu is used toswitch off the ASR ››› page 110. The tractioncontrol system will be disabled.

The control lamp lights up. For vehicleswith a driver information system* the driverwill be informed that ASR is disabled.

Activate ASR

The Easy Connect system menu ››› page 110is used to switch on the ASR. The tractioncontrol system will be enabled.

The control lamp switches off. For vehicleswith a driver information system* the driverwill be informed that ASR is enabled.

Disconnection of the ESC

In some versions of the model, besides thetraction control system (ASR), the electronicstability programme (ESC) can also beswitched off.

● Press the button ››› Fig. 190 for approxi-mately 1 second to switch off the ASR func-tion.

● Press the button ››› Fig. 190 for approxi-mately 3 seconds to switch off the ElectronicStability programme (ESC), including the ASRfunction.

● The ASR and ESC function are reconnectedby pressing the button ››› Fig. 190.

● OR: activate or deactivate the ASR or ESCfunction in the Easy Connect system bymeans of the button and the functionbuttons SETUP and ESC System .

WARNING

You should switch on the ESC Sport mode on-ly if the traffic conditions and your driving

178

Driving

ability allow you to do so safely: risk ofskidding!

● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilisingfunction will be limited to allow for a sportierdrive. The driving wheels could spin and thevehicle could “skid”.

● If the ESC/ASR is deactivated, the vehiclestabilisation function is not available.

Note

If the ASR is disconnected or the ESC’s Sportmode is selected, cruise control* will beswitched off.

Hill driving assistant

The hill driving assistant helps the driver tomove off and upward on a hill when the vehi-cle is stationary.

The system maintains brake pressure for ap-proximately two seconds after the drivertakes his foot off the brake pedal to preventthe vehicle from lurching backward when it isstarted. During these 2 seconds, the driverhas enough time to release the clutch pedaland accelerate without the vehicle movingand without having to use the handbrake,making start-up easier, more comfortableand safer.

These are the basic operation conditions:

● being on a ramp or hill/slope,

● doors closed,

● vehicle completely stationary,

● engine running and foot on the brake,

● besides having a gear engaged or being inneutral for manual gear change and with theselector lever at position S, D or R for an au-tomatic gearbox.

This system is also active when reversing up-hill.

WARNING

● If you do not start the vehicle immediatelyafter taking your foot off the brake pedal, thevehicle may start to roll back under certainconditions. Depress the brake pedal or usethe hand brake immediately.

● If the engine stalls, depress the brake ped-al or use the hand brake immediately.

● When following a line of traffic uphill, if youwant to prevent the vehicle from rolling backaccidentally when starting off, hold the brakepedal down for a few seconds before startingoff.

Note

The Official Service or a specialist workshopcan tell you if your vehicle is equipped withthis system.

Manual gearbox

Changing gear


In some countries the clutch pedal must befully pressed down for the engine to start.

Selecting reverse gear

● Engage reverse gear only when the vehicleis stopped.

Changing down gears

While driving, changing down a gear must al-ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di-rectly below and when the engine speed isnot too high ››› . Changing down while by-passing one or various gears at high speedsor at high engine speeds can damage theclutch and the gearbox, even if the clutchpedal remains depressed ››› .

WARNING

When the engine is running, the vehicle willstart to move as soon as a gear is engagedand the clutch released. This is also the casewith the electronic parking brake switchedon.

● Never engage reverse gear when the vehi-cle is moving. »

179

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

If the gear is changed down inappropriatelyby selecting a gear that is too low, you maylose control of the vehicle, causing an acci-dent and serious injuries.

CAUTION

When travelling at high speeds or at high en-gine speeds, selecting a gear that is too lowcan cause considerable damage to the clutchand the gearbox. This can also occur if theclutch pedal is pressed and held and it doesnot engage.

CAUTION

To prevent damage and avoid prematurewear, please observe the following:

● Do not rest your hand on the gear leverwhile driving. The pressure applied by yourhand is transmitted to the gearbox selectorforks.

● Always ensure that the vehicle is complete-ly stopped before engaging the reverse gear.

● Always press the clutch to the floor whenchanging gears.

● Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” onhills with the engine on.

Automatic gearbox/DSG auto-matic gearbox*

Introduction


Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be-tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-mitted via two independent clutches. They re-place the torque converter found on conven-tional automatic gearboxes and allow forsmooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-hicle.

The tiptronic system allows the driver tochange gears manually if desired››› page 182, Changing gears in tiptronicmode*.

Selector lever positions


The selector lever position engaged is high-lighted on the display in the instrument clus-ter. With the selector lever in the manualgearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engagedgear is also indicated on the display.

P – Parking lock

When the selector lever is in this position,the driven wheels are locked mechanically.The parking lock must be engaged only whenthe vehicle is stationary ››› .

The interlock button (the button on the selec-tor lever handle) must be pressed in and si-multaneously the brake pedal must be de-pressed before moving the selector lever ei-ther in or out of position P.

R – Reverse gear

Reverse gear must be engaged only when thevehicle is stationary and the engine is idling››› .

To move the selector lever to position R, theinterlock button must be pressed in and atthe same time the brake pedal must be de-pressed. The reverse lights come on whenthe selector lever is in the R position with theignition on.

N – Neutral (idling)

With the selector lever in this position, thegear is in neutral.

D/S – Permanent drive (forward) position

The selector lever in the D/S position enablesthe gears to be controlled in normal mode (D)or Sport mode (S). To select Sport mode (S),move the selector lever backwards. Movingthe lever again will select normal mode (D).

180

Driving

The selected driving mode is shown on theinstrument panel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox automatical-ly selects the best gear ratio. This dependson the engine load, the road speed and thedynamic gear control programme (DCP).

Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sportydriving style. This setting makes use of theengine's maximum power output. When ac-celerating the gear shifts will be noticeable.

Press the brake pedal to move the selectorlever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta-tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)››› .

Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driv-ing in mountains) it can be advantageous toswitch temporarily to tiptronic mode››› page 182, in order to manually select gearratios to suit the driving conditions.

WARNING

● Take care not to accidentally press the ac-celerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped.The vehicle could otherwise start moving im-mediately (in some cases even if the parkingbrake is engaged) resulting in the risk of anaccident.

● Never move the selector lever to R or Pwhen driving. Failure to follow this instruc-tion could result in an accident.

● With selector lever in any position (exceptP) the vehicle must always be held with the

foot brake when the engine is running. This isbecause an automatic gearbox still transmitspower even at idling speed, and the vehicletends to “creep”. The accelerator pedal muston no account be pressed inadvertently whena gear is engaged with the vehicle stationary.The vehicle could otherwise start moving im-mediately (in some cases even if the parkingbrake is engaged) resulting in the risk of anaccident.

● While you are selecting a gear and the vehi-cle is stopped with the engine running, donot accelerate. Failure to follow this instruc-tion could result in an accident.

● As a driver you should never leave your ve-hicle if the engine is running and a gear is en-gaged. If you have to leave your vehicle whilethe engine is running, you must apply thehandbrake and engage the parking lock (P).

● To avoid accidents, apply the handbrakeand put the selector lever in position P beforeopening the bonnet and working on the vehi-cle with the engine running. Please alwaysobserve the important safety warnings››› page 262, Work in the engine compart-ment.

Note

● If the selector lever is moved accidentallyto N when driving, release the accelerator andlet the engine speed drop to idling before se-lecting gear range D or S again.

● Should the power supply to the selectorlever be interrupted in position P, the selector

lever will be locked. If this should happen themanual release can be used ››› page 43.

Selector lever lock

Fig. 191 Selector lever lock.

The selector lever lock prevents gears frombeing engaged inadvertently, so that the ve-hicle is not set in motion unintentionally.

The selector lever lock is released as follows:

– Switch the ignition on.

– Press the brake pedal and at the same timepress in the interlock button.

Automatic selector lever lock

With the ignition switched on, the selectorlever is locked in the positions P and N. Thebrake pedal must be pressed to release thelever while pressing the release button if theselector lever is in the position P. As a »

181

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

reminder for the driver, with the lever in posi-tions P or N the following message will beshown on the display:

When stationary, apply footbrakewhile selecting a gear.

Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta-tionary and at speeds of up to 5 km/h(3 mph). At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph)the lever lock is automatically deactivated inposition N.

The selector lever lock is not engaged if theselector lever is moved quickly through posi-tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). Thismakes it possible, for instance, to rock thevehicle “backwards and forwards” if it isstuck. The selector lever lock engages auto-matically if the brake pedal is not depressedand the lever is in position N for more thanabout two seconds.

Interlock button

The interlock button on the selector leverhandle prevents the driver from inadvertentlyengaging certain gears. Press the button into disengage the selector lever lock. The se-lector lever positions in which the interlockbutton has to be pressed are shown in the il-lustration, highlighted in colour ››› Fig. 191.

Safety interlock for ignition key

Once the ignition has been turned off, thekey may be removed only if the gear selector

is in position P. While the key is not in the ig-nition, the selector lever is locked in positionP.

Note

● If the selector lever lock does not engage,there is a fault. The transmission is interrup-ted to prevent the vehicle from accidentallymoving. Follow the procedure below in orderfor the selector lever lock to engage again:

– With a 6-speed gearbox: press the brakepedal and release it again.

– With a 7-speed gearbox: press the brakepedal. Move the selector lever to posi-tion P or N and subsequently engage agear.

● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehicledoes not move forwards or back. Proceed tothe next mode:

– When the vehicle does not move in therequired direction, the system may nothave the gear range correctly engaged.Press the brake pedal and engage thegear range again.

– If the vehicle still does not move in therequired direction, there is a system mal-function. Seek specialist assistance andhave the system checked.

Changing gears in tiptronic mode*

Fig. 192 Centre console: changing gear withtiptronic

Fig. 193 Steering wheel: automatic gearboxlevers

The tiptronic gives the driver the option tochange gears manually.

182

Driving

Changing gear manually with the selectorlever

It is possible to change to tiptronic mode,both when the vehicle is stopped and whiledriving.

– To switch to tiptronic mode, move the se-lector lever from position D/S to the right.As soon as the change is made the selectorlevel will be shown in the position M on theinstrument panel display (for example M4means that the fourth gear is engaged).

– Move the selector lever forwards + to se-lect a higher gear ››› Fig. 192.

– Move the selector lever backwards – toselect a lower gear.

Changing gear manually with the gearshiftpaddles*

The gearshift paddles can be used when theselector lever is in the position D/S or M.

– Press the gearshift paddle + to select ahigher gear ››› Fig. 193.

– Press the gearshift paddle – to select alower gear.

– With the selector lever in position D/S, if nopaddle is operated during a short period oftime, the gearbox control system switchesback to automatic mode. To switch to per-manent manual gear change using thegearshift paddles, move the selector leverfrom position D/S to the right.

When accelerating, the gearbox automatical-ly shifts up into the next gear shortly beforethe maximum engine speed is reached.

If you select a lower gear, the automatic gear-box will not shift down until there is no risk ofover-revving the engine.

When the kick-down feature is used, thegearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depend-ing on road speed and engine speed.

Driving tips

The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical-ly as the vehicle moves.

The engine can only start with the selectorlever in the position P or N. At low tempera-tures, below -10°C (50°F), the engine can on-ly start with the selector lever in the positionP.

Starting the vehicle

– Press and hold the brake pedal.

– Press and hold the interlock button (thebutton on the selector lever handle), movethe selector lever to the desired position,for instance D ››› page 180, and release theinterlock button.

– Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (aslight movement can be felt).

– Release the brake and press the accelerator››› .

Stopping briefly

– Apply the foot brake to hold the vehiclebriefly when stationary (for instance at traf-fic lights). Do not press the accelerator.

Stopping/Parking

If the driver door is opened and the selectorlever is not in position P, the vehicle couldmove. The driver message will be: Gearchange: selector lever in thedrive position!. Additionally, a buzzerwill sound.

– Press and hold the brake pedal ››› .

– Apply the handbrake.

– Move the selector lever to position P.

Holding the car on a hill

– Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-vent the vehicle from “moving backwards;if necessary, apply the handbrake” ››› .Do not try to stop the vehicle “rolling back”by increasing the engine speed when agear is engaged (pressing the accelerator)››› .

Moving off uphill in vehicles without Hillstart assistant*

– Apply the handbrake. »183

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

– Once you have engaged a gear press theaccelerator carefully and disengage thehandbrake.

Moving off uphill in vehicles with Hill startassistant*

– Once you have engaged a gear, release thefootbrake and press the accelerator››› page 179, Hill driving assistant.

Driving down hills: in some situations (onmountain roads or when towing a trailer orcaravan) it can be advantageous to switchtemporarily to the manual gearbox pro-gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec-ted manually to suit the driving conditions››› .

On level ground it is sufficient to move theselector lever to position P. On slopes, firstengage the parking brake and then put theselection lever into the P position. Thisavoids overloading the locking mechanismand it will be easier to move the selector lev-er from position P.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Selectorlever positions on page 181.

● Never allow the brake to rub and do not usethe brake pedal too often or for long periods.Constant braking causes overheating in thebrakes. This could significantly reduce brak-

ing power, increase braking distance or evenresult in the total failure of the brake system.

● To avoid rolling back on gradients alwayshold the vehicle with the footbrake or hand-brake if you have to stop.

CAUTION

● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do notattempt to stop it from rolling by depressingthe accelerator when a gear has been selec-ted. This could cause overheating and dam-age the automatic gearbox. Apply the hand-brake firmly or press the brake pedal in orderto prevent the vehicle from rolling back.

● If you allow the car to roll with the selectorlever in position N with the engine switchedoff, the automatic gearbox will be damagedas it will not be lubricated.

● In certain driving situations or traffic condi-tions, such as frequently starting, prolonged“creeping” of the vehicle or traffic jams withcontinuous stoppages, the gearbox couldoverheat causing damage! If the warninglamp lights up, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible and wait for the gearbox to cool››› page 187.

Kick-down feature

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-celeration to be reached.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed rightdown past the point of resistance at full throt-tle, the gearbox will shift down to a lowergear, depending on road speed and enginespeed. The upshift to the next higher gear isdelayed until the engine reaches maximumrpm.

WARNING

Please note that if the road surface is slip-pery or wet, the kick-down feature couldcause the driving wheels to spin, which couldresult in skidding.

Launch control programme3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6-SpeedDSG with diesel engines superior to 125 kW and pet-rol engines superior to 140 kW.

The Launch control programme enables maxi-mum acceleration.

Important: the engine must have reached op-erating temperature and the steering wheelmust not be turned.

The engine speed for launch-control is differ-ent on petrol and diesel engines. To use thelaunch-control you must disconnect the anti-slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Con-nect system menu ››› page 110. The warninglamp will stay switched on or will flashslowly depending on whether or not the vehi-cle has a driver information system*.

184

Driving

On vehicles with the driver information sys-tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently andthe corresponding text message Stabilitycontrol deactivated (temporary) ap-pears on the instrument panel to indicate thedeactivation status.

– When the engine is running, switch off thetraction control (ASR)1).

– Turn the selector lever to the position “S”or tiptronic, or else select the sport driv-ing mode from the SEAT Drive Profile*››› page 219.

– Press the brake pedal firmly with your leftfoot and hold it down for at least one sec-ond.

– With your right foot, press the acceleratordown to the full throttle or kick-down posi-tion. The engine speed will stabilise atabout 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about2,000 rpm (diesel engine).

– Take your left foot off the brake pedal.

WARNING

● Always adapt your driving style to the traf-fic conditions.

● Only use the launch control programmewhen road and traffic conditions permit, and

make sure your manner of driving and accel-erating the vehicle does not inconvenience orendanger other road users.

● Make sure that the ESC remains switchedon. Please note that when the ASR and ESCare deactivated, the wheels may start to spin,causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of acci-dent!

● After putting the vehicle into gear, the“sport” mode of the ESC should be deactiva-ted again by briefly pressing the OFF but-ton.

Note

● After using the Launch control programme,the temperature in the gearbox may have in-creased considerably. In this case, the pro-gramme could be disabled for several mi-nutes. The programme can be used again af-ter the cooling phase.

● Accelerating with the Launch control pro-gramme places a heavy load on all parts ofthe vehicle. This can result in increased wearand tear.

Downhill speed control*

The downhill speed control function helpsthe driver when driving down steep gradi-ents.

Downhill speed control is activated when theselector lever is in D/S and the driver appliesthe foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto-matically engages a lower gear that is suita-ble for the slope. The downhill speed controlfunction attempts to maintain the speed atwhich the vehicle was travelling when thefoot brake was applied (subject to the laws ofphysics and technical drive limitations). Itmay be necessary to adjust the speed againusing the foot brake in certain situations. Giv-en that the downhill speed control can onlychange down to 3rd gear, on very steep de-scents the tiptronic mode may be required. Inthis case, manually reduce the tiptronic to2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake andreduce the charge on the brakes.

Downhill speed control is deactivated assoon as the road levels out again or youpress the accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system*››› page 195, downhill speed control is acti-vated when you set a cruising speed. »

1) Vehicles without driver information system: thewarning lamp flashes slowly/Vehicles with driver in-formation system: the warning lamp stays on.

185

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

The downhill speed control cannot defy thelaws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot bemaintained constant in all situations. Alwaysbe prepared to use the brakes!

Inertia mode

The inertia mode enables the kinetic energyof the vehicle to be harnessed enabling cer-tain stretches to be driven without using theaccelerator. This enables fuel to be saved.Use the inertia mode to “let the vehicle roll”before, for example, arriving in a town.

Switching on inertia mode

Important: selector lever must be in positionD, gradients below 12 %.

– Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode››› page 219.

– Take your foot off the accelerator.

The driver message Inertia will be dis-played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12mph), the gearbox will automatically disen-gage and the vehicle will roll freely, withoutthe effect of the engine brake. While the vehi-cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode

– Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To make use of the braking force and switchoff the engine again, simply press the brakepedal briefly.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolongedsection with less energy) and the switchingoff using inertia (= shorter section withoutthe need for fuel) facilitates improved fuelconsumption and emission balance.

WARNING

● If the inertia mode has been switched on,take into account, when approaching an ob-stacle and releasing the accelerator pedal,that the vehicle will not decelerate in the usu-al manner: risk of accident!

● When using inertia mode while travellingdown hills, the vehicle can increase speed:risk of accident!

● If other users drive your vehicle, warn themabout inertia mode.

Note

● Inertia mode is only available in eco (SEATDrive Profile*) driving mode.

● The driver message Inertia is only dis-played with the current consumption. In iner-tia mode the gear will no longer be displayed(for example “E” will appear instead of “E7”).

● On downhill sections with gradients above15 %, the inertia mode will automatically beswitched off temporarily.

Backup programme

A backup programme is in place if a faultshould occur in the control system.

If all the positions of the selector lever areshown over a light background on the instru-ment panel display, there is a system faultand the automatic gearbox will operate inwith the backup programme. When the back-up programme is activated, it is possible todrive the vehicle, however, at low speeds andwithin a selected range of gears. In some ca-ses driving in reverse gear may not be possi-ble.

CAUTION

If the gearbox operates with the backup pro-gramme, take the vehicle to a specialisedworkshop and have the fault repaired withoutdelay.

Clutch

Clutch overheating! Pleasestop!

The clutch has overheated and could be dam-aged. Stop the vehicle and wait for the gear-box to cool with the engine at idling speedand the selector lever in position P. When thewarning lamp and the driver message switchoff, have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay. If the warning lamp

186

Driving

and the driver message do not switch off, donot continue driving. Seek specialist assis-tance.

Gearbox malfunctions

Gearbox: Fault! Stop the ve-hicle and place the lever in theposition P.

There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-ing. Seek specialist assistance.

Gearbox: System fault! Youmay continue driving.

Have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! Youcan continue driving with re-strictions. Reverse gear disa‐bled

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshopand have the fault repaired without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! Youcan continue driving in D untilswitching off the engine

Stop the vehicle in a safe place well awayfrom moving traffic. Seek specialist assis-tance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt yourdriving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. Whenthe warning lamp switches off, you can con-tinue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake andengage a gear again.

If the fault was caused by a gearbox with ahigh temperature, this driver message will bedisplayed when the gearbox has cooledagain.

Run-in and economical driving

Running-in the engine

A new vehicle should be run in over a dis-tance of 1500 km (1000 miles). For the first1,000 km the engine speed should not ex-ceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible enginespeed. In doing so, do not accelerate at fullthrottle and do not drive with a trailer! From1000 to 1500 km (600 to 1000 miles) youcan gradually increase the engine rpm androad speed.

During its first few hours of running, the in-ternal friction in the engine is greater thanlater on when all the moving parts have bed-ded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first 1,500km influences the future engine perform-ance. Subsequently, also drive at a moderaterate, especially when the engine is still cold:this will lead to less engine wear and tearand will prolong its useful life.

You should also avoid driving with the enginespeed too low. Change down to a lower gearwhen the engine no longer runs “smoothly”.If the engine revs too much, cut fuel injectionto protect the engine.

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority inthe design, choice of materials and manufac-ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage recy-cling

● Joints and connections designed for easydismantling

● Modular construction to facilitate disman-tling

● Increased use of single-grade materials.

● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked inaccordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 andISO 1629.

Choice of materials

● Use of recycled materials. »187

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Use of compatible plastics in the same partif its components are not easily separated.

● Use of recycled materials and/or materialsoriginating from renewable sources.

● Reduction of volatile components, includ-ing odour, in plastic materials.

● Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptionsdictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa-valent chromium.

Manufacturing methods

● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in theprotective wax for cavities.

● Use of plastic film as protection during ve-hicle transport.

● Use of solvent-free adhesives.

● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-tems.

● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-dues (RDF).

● Improvement in the quality of waste water.

● Use of systems for the recovery of residualheat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,etc.).

● The use of water-soluble paints.

Economical and environmentally-friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollutionand wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de-pends largely on driving style. Fuel consump-tion can be reduced by 10-15% with an eco-nomical driving style and proper anticipationof traffic conditions. The following sectiongives you some tips on lessening the impacton the environment and reducing your oper-ating costs at the same time.

Active cylinder management (ACT®)*


Depending on vehicle equipment, the activecylinder management (ACT®) may automati-cally deactivate some of the engine cylindersif the driving situation does not require toomuch power. When it is switched off, no fuelis injected into these cylinders, hence totalfuel consumption may be reduced. The num-ber of active cylinders can be seen on the in-strument panel display ››› page 31.

Foresight when driving

Acceleration causes the vehicle to consumemore fuel. If you think ahead when driving,you will need to brake less and thus acceler-ate less. Wherever possible, let the car rollslowly to a stop, with a gear engaged (for in-stance when you can see that the next traffic

lights are red). This takes advantage of theengine braking effect, reducing wear on thebrakes and tyres. Emissions and fuel con-sumption will drop to zero due to the overrunfuel cut-off.

Changing gear to save energy

An effective way of saving is to change in ad-vance to a higher gear. Running the engine athigh rpm in the lower gears uses an unneces-sary amount of fuel.

Manual gearbox: shift up from first to secondgear as soon as possible. In any case, we rec-ommend that you change to a higher gearupon reaching 2,000 rpm. Choosing the rightgear enables fuel savings. Select the highestpossible gear appropriate for the driving sit-uation (the engine should continue function-ing with cyclical regularity).

Automatic gearbox: accelerate gradually andwithout reaching the “kick-down” position.

Avoid driving at high speed

Avoid travelling at top speed, whenever pos-sible. Fuel consumption, emission of harmfulgases and noise pollution multiply dispropor-tionately as speed is increased. Driving atmoderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Reduce idling time

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idlingis automatically reduced. In vehicles without

188

Driving

the Start-Stop system it is worth switching offthe engine, for example, at level crossingsand at traffic lights that remain red for longperiods of time. When an engine has reachedoperating temperature, and depending onthe cylinder capacity, keeping it switched offfor a minimum of about 5 seconds alreadysaves more than the amount of fuel necessa-ry for restarting.

The engine takes a long time to warm upwhen it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-tant emissions are also especially high dur-ing this initial warm-up phase. It is thereforebest to drive off immediately after startingthe engine. Avoid running the engine at highspeed.

Regular maintenance

Regular servicing helps in saving fuel evenbefore the engine is started. A well-servicedengine gives you the benefit of improved fuelefficiency as well as maximum reliability andan enhanced resale value. A badly servicedengine can consume up to 10% more fuelthan necessary.

Avoid short journeys

The engine and catalytic converter need toreach their optimal operating temperature inorder to minimise fuel consumption andemissions.

A cold engine consumes a disproportionateamount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-ing temperature after about four kilometres(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will re-turn to a normal level.

Check tyre pressure

Always make sure the tyres are inflated to thecorrect pressures ››› page 272 to save fuel. Ifthe pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greaterrolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-ses tyre wear and impairs handling.

Do not use winter tyres all year round as theyincrease fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loads

Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-crease the fuel consumption, it is advisableto always check the luggage compartment tomake sure that no unnecessary loads are be-ing transported.

Since the luggage rack increases the aerody-namic drag of the vehicle, you should removeit when not needed. At speeds of 100-120km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12% of fuel.

Save electrical energy

The engine drives the alternator, thereby gen-erating electricity. This implies that any in-crease in power consumption also increasesfuel consumption! For this reason, switch off

any unneeded electrical devices. Devices thatuse a lot of electricity includes the blower ata high setting, the rear window heating orthe seat heating*.

Engine management and ex-haust gas purification system

Introduction

WARNING

● Because of the high temperatures whichcan occur in the exhaust purification system(catalytic converter or diesel particulate fil-ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex-haust can come into contact with flammablematerials under the car (e.g. on grass or atthe forest edge). Fire hazard!

● Do not apply wax underneath the vehiclearound the area of the exhaust system: Firehazard!

Note

While the control lamps , , or re-main lit, there may be engine problems, fuelconsumption may increase and the enginemay lose power.

189

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Catalytic converter3 Applies to vehicles with petrol engine

The vehicle must only be used with unleadedpetrol, otherwise the catalytic converter willbe irreparably damaged.

Never drive until the tank is empty; an irregu-lar supply of fuel can cause faulty combus-tion. In these cases, unburned fuel reachesthe exhaust system, which can overheat anddamage the catalytic converter.

Diesel particulate filter3 Applies to vehicles with diesel engine

The diesel engine particulate filter eliminatesmost of the soot from the exhaust gas sys-tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil-ter cleans itself. The diesel particulate filter iscleaned automatically without need for indi-cation by the warning lamp . This may benoticed because the engine idle speed in-creases and an odour may be detected.

If automatic filter purification cannot be car-ried out (because only short trips are taken,for example), soot will accumulate on the fil-ter and the Diesel particulate filter warninglamp will switch on.

Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc-ess by driving in the following manner: drivefor approximately 15 minutes at a minimumspeed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or 5th gear

(automatic gearbox: gear S). Maintain the en-gine speed at approximately 2,000 rpm. Therise in temperature causes the soot on the fil-ter to burn. On completion of the cleaningthe warning lamp will switch off. If the warn-ing lamp does not switch off, go immediatelyto a specialised workshop to rectify the prob-lem.

Engine management*

This warning lamp monitors the engine man-agement system for petrol engines.

The warning lamp (Electronic Power Con-trol) lights up when the ignition is switchedon while system operation is being verified. Itshould go out once the engine is started.

If there is a fault in the electronic enginemanagement system while you are driving,this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehi-cle to a specialised workshop as soon aspossible and have the engine checked.

Emission control system*

Control lamp flashes:

When there is misfiring that can damage thecatalytic converter. Reduce speed and drivecarefully to the nearest specialised workshopto have the engine checked.

The control lamp lights up:

If a fault has developed during driving whichhas reduced the quality of the exhaust gas(e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed anddrive carefully to the nearest specialisedworkshop to have the engine checked.

Engine pre-heating/fault system*

The warning lamp lights up to show that theglow plugs are preheating the diesel engine.

The control lamp lights up

If the control lamp lights up when the en-gine is started it means that the glow plugsare preheating. The engine can be startedstraight away when the lamp switches off.

Control lamp flashes

If a fault develops in the engine managementsystem while you are driving, the glow plugsystem lamp will flash . Take the vehicle toa specialised workshop as soon as possibleand have the engine checked.

190

Driver assistance systems

Driving tips

Driving through flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv-ing through water, for example, along a floo-ded road, please observe the following:

● The water should never come above thelower edge of the bodywork.

● Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNING

After driving through water, mud, sludge,etc., the braking effect can be delayed slight-ly due to moisture build-up on the discs andbrake pads. Applying the brakes carefullyseveral times will remove the moisture andrestore the full braking effect.

CAUTION

● Driving through flooded areas may severelydamage vehicle components such as the en-gine, transmission, running gear or electricalsystem.

● Whenever driving through water, the Start-Stop system* must be switched off››› page 191.

Note

● Check the depth of the water before enter-ing the flooded zone.

● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, orstop the engine in any situation.

● Note that vehicles travelling in the oppositedirection may splash water that could exceedthe maximum permitted water height for yourvehicle.

● Avoid driving through salt water (corro-sion).


Start-Stop system*

Description and operation


The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and re-duce CO2 emissions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati-cally switch off when the vehicle stops, whenstopping at traffic lights for example. The ig-nition remains switched on during the stop-ping phase. The engine automaticallyswitches back on when required.

As soon as the ignition is switched on, theStart-Stop function is automatically activa-ted.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stop mode

● The driver door must be closed.

● The driver must have their seat belt fas-tened.

● The bonnet must be closed.

● The vehicle must have travelled at morethan 4 km/h (2 mph) since the last stop.

● The vehicle cannot be towing a trailer. »

191

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-cle is stationary. The brake servo and powersteering functions will not be completely cov-ered under warranty. More force may also beneeded to turn the steering wheel or to brake.As you cannot steer and brake in the normalmanner, there is a greater risk of accidentsand serious injury.

● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-ing could lock making it impossible to steerthe vehicle.

● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-Stop system is switched off when working inthe engine compartment ››› page 193.

CAUTION

The Start-Stop system must always beswitched off when driving through floodedareas ››› page 193.

Stopping/Starting the engine

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

– When the vehicle is stopped, put it intoneutral and release the clutch pedal. Theengine will switch off. The warning lamp will appear on the instrument panel dis-play.

– When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-gine will start up again. The warning lampwill switch off.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox

– Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to astop and keep the brake pedal presseddown with your foot. The engine will switchoff. The warning lamp will appear in thedisplay.

– When you take your foot off the brake pedalthe engine will start up again. The warninglamp will switch off.

Additional information related to the auto-matic gearbox

The engine stops when the selector lever is inthe positions P, D, N and S, in addition towhen in manual mode. With the selector lev-er in position P, the engine will also remainswitched off when you take your foot off thebrake pedal. In order to start the engine upagain the accelerator must be pressed, or an-other gear engaged or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in position Rduring the stopping phase, the engine willstart up again.

Change from position D to P to prevent theengine from accidentally starting whenchanging and passing by position R.

Note

● You can control whether the engine shouldswitch off or not by reducing or increasing thebrake force applied. While the vehicle re-mains stopped, the engine will not stop if thebrake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic jamswith frequent stopping and starting for exam-ple. As soon as strong pressure is applied tothe brake pedal, the engine will stop.

● In vehicles with manual gearbox, duringthe stopping phases the brake pedal must re-main depressed to prevent the vehicle frommoving.

● If the engine “stalls” in vehicles with man-ual gearbox, it can be directly started upagain by immediately pressing the clutchpedal.

General notes

The system can interrupt the Start-Stop modefrequently for different reasons.

The engine does not switch off

Before the stopping phase, the system veri-fies whether certain conditions are met. Theengine does not switch off, in the followingsituations for example:

● The engine has not yet reached the mini-mum required temperature for the Start-Stopmode.

192


● The interior temperature selected for the airconditioner has not yet been reached.

● The interior temperature is very high/low.

● Defrost function button activated››› page 45.

● The parking aid* is switched on.

● The battery is very low.

● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-ing turned.

● If there is a danger of misting.

● After engaging reverse gear.

● In case of a very steep gradient.

● In the CUPRA version with automatic gear-box, when it is in Tiptronic mode or in itssports driving position (S).

The indication is shown on the instrumentpanel display, and in addition, the driver in-formation system* shows, .

The engine starts by itself

During a stopping phase the normal Start-Stop mode can be interrupted in the follow-ing situations: The engine restarts by itselfwithout involvement from the driver.

● The interior temperature differs from thevalue selected on the air conditioner.

● Defrost function button activated››› page 45.

● The brake has been pressed several timesconsecutively.

● The battery is too low.

● High power consumption.

Note

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, if theselector lever is placed in position D, N or Safter engaging reverse gear, the vehicle mustbe driven at a speed faster than 10 km/h (6mph) for the system to return to conditions inwhich the engine can be stopped.

Manually switching on/off the Start-Stop system

Fig. 194 Centre console: Start-Stop systembutton

If you do not wish to use the system, you canswitch it off manually.

– To manually switch on/off the Start-Stopsystem, press the button . The buttonsymbol remains lit up yellow when the sys-tem is switched off.

Note

The system is automatically switched on eachtime the engine is deliberately stopped dur-ing a stopping phase. The engine will startautomatically.

Driver messages on the instrumentpanel display

Start-Stop system deactivated.Start the engine manuallyThis driver message is displayed when cer-tain conditions are not met during the stop-ping phase and the Start-Stop system cannotrestart the engine. The engine must be star-ted manually.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Func-tion not availableThere is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Takethe vehicle to a workshop to have the faultrepaired.

193

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Auto Hold Function*


Fig. 195 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: Auto Hold function button.

The control light of the ››› Fig. 195 buttonremains on when the Auto Hold function isconnected.

Once connected, the Auto Hold function as-sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station-ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-od of time with the engine running, for exam-ple, when going up a slope, when stopped attraffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit-tent stops.

When connected, the Auto Hold function au-tomatically prevents the vehicle from rollingwhen stationary without pressing the brakepedal.

After detecting that the vehicle is stationaryand the brake pedal has been released, theAuto Hold function holds the vehicle. Thedriver can lift their foot off the brake pedal.

When the driver touches the accelerator ped-al or accelerates slightly to continue driving,the Auto Hold function releases the brake.The vehicle moves according to the slope ofthe road.

If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con-ditions required by the Auto Hold function isimpaired, it disconnects itself and the but-ton's control light goes out ››› Fig. 195. Theelectronic parking brake connects automati-cally, if necessary, to park the vehicle safe-ly ››› .

Conditions for keeping the vehicle stationarywith the Auto Hold function

● The driver door must be closed.

● The driver's seat belt must be fastened.

● The engine is running.

Switching the Auto Hold function on and off

Press the button ››› . The control lamp onthe button goes out when the Auto Hold func-tion is switched off.

Automatically engaging and disengaging theAuto Hold function

If the Auto Hold function was switched onwith the button before disengaging the ig-nition, the function will remain on after theignition is re-engaged.

If the Auto Hold function was not switchedon, it will automatically remain off next timethe ignition is engaged.

The Auto Hold function is automaticallyswitched on if the following conditions aremet:

All conditions must be met at the same time››› :

Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox

1. The vehicle is kept stationary with the brake ped-al on a flat surface or on a slope.

2. The engine rotates “correctly”.

Upon pressing theclutch and acceleratingat the same time, thebrake releases gradu-ally.

Upon accelerating, thebrake releases gradu-ally.

194


The Auto Hold function is automaticallyturned off if the following conditions aremet:

Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox

1.

If any of the conditions mentioned on››› page 194, Conditions for keeping the vehicle

stationary with the Auto Hold function are no lon-ger met.

2.If the engine is running irregularly or an anomaly

is detected.

3.If the engine is turned

off or stalls.If the engine is switch-

ed off.

4.The clutch and the ac-

celerator are pressed atthe same time.

If the accelerator ispressed.

5.

If any of the tyres hasonly minimal contact

with the ground, e.g. inthe case of axle articu-

lation.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into theAuto Hold function cannot defy the laws ofphysics; it only works within the limits of thesystem. The greater convenience provided bythe Auto Hold function should never temptyou to take any risk that may compromisesafety.

● Never leave the vehicle running and withthe Auto Hold function switched on.

● The Auto Hold function cannot always keepthe vehicle stationary uphill or downhill orstop it sufficiently, for example, on slipperyor frozen surfaces.

Note

Before entering a car wash, always switch offthe Auto Hold function, because if the elec-tronic parking brake is automatically connec-ted, it may cause damage.

Cruise control system (CCS)*

Operation

Fig. 196 Instrument panel display: CCS statusindications


The cruise control system (CCS) is able tomaintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceas-ing to accelerate, not by actively braking thevehicle ››› .

Control lamp

When the warning lamp is lit, cruise con-trol is active.

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

Displayed on the CCS screen

Status Fig. 196:

CCS temporarily switched off. The setspeed is displayed in small figures.

System error. Contact a specialised work-shop.

CCS switched on. The speed memory isempty.

The CCS is switched on. The set speed isdisplayed in large figures. »

A

B

C

D

195

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

Use of the cruise control could cause acci-dents and severe injuries if it is not possibleto drive at a constant speed maintaining thesafety distance.

● Do not use the cruise control in heavy traf-fic, if the distance from the vehicle in front isinsufficient, on steep roads, with severalbends or in slippery circumstances (snow,ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.

● Never use the CCS when driving off-road oron unpaved roads.

● Always adapt your speed and the distanceto the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,weather conditions, the condition of the roadand the traffic situation.

● To avoid unexpected operation of the cruisecontrol system, turn it off every time you fin-ish using it.

● It is dangerous to use a set speed which istoo high for the prevailing road, traffic orweather conditions.

● When travelling down hills, the CCS cannotmaintain a constant speed. The vehicle tendsto accelerate under its own weight. Select alower gear or use the foot brake to slow thevehicle.

WARNING


Operating the cruise control system*


The value indicated in the table in brackets(in mph, miles per hour) only refers to instru-ment panels with indications in miles.

Changing gear in CCS mode

The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutchpedal is pressed, intervening again automati-cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCS

When travelling down hills the CCS cannotmaintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicledown using the brake pedal and reducegears if required.

Automatic off

The cruise control system (CCS) is switchedoff automatically or temporarily:

● If the system detects a fault that could af-fect the working order of the CCS.

● If you press and maintain the acceleratorpedal for a certain time, driving faster thanthe stored speed.

● If the dynamic driving control systems in-tervene (e.g. ASR or ESC).

● If the airbag is triggered.

Adaptive Cruise Control ACC*

Introduction

Fig. 197 Detection area.


The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an exten-sion of the normal cruise control system(CCS) ››› .

The ACC function allows the driver to estab-lish a cruise speed of between 30 and 210km/h (18 and 150 mph), as well as the tem-porary distance required with regard to thevehicle in front. The ACC function will adaptthe vehicle's cruise speed at all times, main-taining a safe distance with the vehicle infront.

The ACC function is based on a radar sensorthat can measure the distance to the vehiclesin front.

196


If the vehicle is equipped with automaticgearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle untilit stops completely if a vehicle in front of itstops.

Driver intervention prompt

During driving, the ACC is subject to certainlimitations inherent in the system. In otherwords, in certain circumstances the driver willhave to adjust speed him or herself, as wellas the distance from other vehicles.

In this case, the instrument panel screen willwarn you to intervene by applying the brakeand a warning tone will be heard››› page 198.

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the ACC cannotovercome the system's inherent limitationsor change the laws of physics. If used negli-gently or involuntarily, it may cause seriousaccidents and injuries. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.

● Adapt your speed and safe distance to thevehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

● Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad,on steep roads, with several bends or in slip-pery circumstances such as snow, ice, rain orloose gravel, or on flooded roads.

● Never use the ACC when driving off-road oron unpaved roads. The ACC has been de-signed for use on paved roads only.

● The ACC does not react on approaching afixed obstacle, such as the tail of a trafficjam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stoppedat the traffic lights.

● The ACC only reacts to people if a pedes-trian monitoring system is available. In addi-tion, the system does not react to animals orvehicles crossing your path or approachinghead-on down the same lane.

● If the ACC does not reduce speed sufficient-ly, brake the vehicle immediately by applyingthe pedal.

● If you are driving using the spare wheel,the ACC system could automatically switchoff during the journey. Switch off the systemwhen starting off.

● If the vehicle continues to move involuntar-ily after a driver intervention prompt, brakethe vehicle by applying the pedal.

● If the dash panel displays a driver interven-tion prompt, adjust the distance yourself.

● The driver should be ready to accelerate orbrake by him/herself at all times.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar sen-sor is damaged, disconnect the ACC. This willavoid possible damage. If this occurs have itadjusted.

● Repairs to the radar sensor require special-ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-pose.

Note

● If the ACC system does not work as descri-bed in this chapter, do not use it until it hasbeen checked by a specialised workshop.SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealershipfor this purpose.

● Maximum speed with the ACC activated islimited to 210 km/h (150 mph).

● When the ACC is switched on, strangenoises may be heard during automatic brak-ing cause by the braking system.

197

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Indications on the display, warningand control lamps

Fig. 198 On the instrument panel display: (A)ACC temporarily inactive, vehicle detected infront, temporary distance adjusted. (B) ACCactive, vehicle detected in front, temporarydistance adjusted.

Status display

Indications on the display ››› Fig. 198:

Vehicle in front, the ACC is inactive.1

Distance margin selected, the ACC is in-active.

Vehicle detected in front. The ACC is ac-tive.

Adjustment of the temporary distancefrom the vehicle in front with a program-med speed.

Temporary distance adjustment from thevehicle in front with a programmedspeed.

Warning and control lamps

››› in Warning and control lamps onpage 109.

The speed reduction by the ACC tomaintain the distance from the vehi-cle in front is not sufficient.

Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention prompt.

The ACC is not currently available.a)

With the vehicle stationary, switch off the engine andstart it up again. Check the radar sensor visually for dirt,ice or knocks. If it is still unavailable, refer to a special-ised workshop to have the system inspected.

a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is incolour.

2

3

4

5

The ACC is active.

No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed speedremains constant.

If the symbol is white: the ACC is ac-tive.

A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC adjustsspeed and distance from the vehicle in front.

If the symbol is grey: the ACC is notactive.

The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.

It lights up green

The ACC is active.

Some warning and control lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.

WARNING


Note

When the ACC is connected, the indicationson the instrument panel screen may be con-cealed by warnings from other functions,such as an incoming call.

198


Radar sensor

Fig. 199 On the front bumper: radar sensor.

A radar sensor is installed on the front bump-er to determine the traffic situation››› Fig. 199 1 . This sensor can detect vehi-cles in front up to a distance of approximately120 m.

The radar sensor's visibility may be impairedby dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-fluences such as rain or mist. In this case theadaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work.The instrument panel displays the followingmessage: ACC: No sensor vision! Ifnecessary clean the radar sensor ››› .

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the ACC will automatically beavailable again. The message on the instru-ment panel screen will switch off and the ACCwill be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra-dar reverse reflection. This may occur, for ex-ample, in a closed car park or due to thepresence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on theroad or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar sen-sor should not be covered with adhesives,additional or similar headlights, as this maynegatively affect ACC operation.

If structural modifications are made to the ve-hicle, for example, if the suspension is low-ered or the front spoiler is modified, ACC op-eration may be affected. So structural modifi-cations should only be made by specialisedworkshops. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this purpose.

If work is done incorrectly on the front of thevehicle, the radar sensor could be damagedor lose its settings, and ACC operation maybe affected. So repair work should only bemade by specialised workshops. SEAT recom-mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-pose.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar sen-sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis-connect the ACC. This will avoid possibledamage. If this occurs have it adjusted.

● The sensor may become damaged or loseits settings when knocked, for example, dur-

ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro-mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.


● Clean away the snow with a brush and theice preferably with a solvent-free de-icerspray.

199

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Operating the Adaptive Cruise ControlACC

Fig. 200 On the left of the steering column:third lever for operating the Adaptive CruiseControl.


When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) isconnected, the green control lamp willlight up on the instrument panel, and theprogrammed speed and ACC status will bedisplayed ››› Fig. 198.

Conditions for the adaptive cruise control tobe activated

● The selector lever must be at the D or S po-sition or in the tiptronic selection track. Inmanual gearbox any forward gear must beengaged, except the 1st gear.

● In vehicles with manual gearbox, if there isno programmed speed, drive at least at30 km/h (18 mph).

Speed control

When the ACC is connected, speed can beprogrammed and adjusted. The programmedspeed must be different from the speed atwhich the vehicle travels if the distance is be-ing adjusted at the time.

What functions can be operated?

If you activate the ACC the current speed canbe programmed as the “control speed”.

During driving, control can be operated atany time and the speed also modified.

The following settings can also be adjusted:

● Distance.

● Driving Programme.

● Driving style.

Activating/Deactivating

Any speed1) between 30 and 210 km/h (19and 150 mph) can be adjusted.

Activating the ACC

● Pull the lever to position 1 ››› Fig. 200.ACC standby will be shown on the instrumentpanel display.

Programme speed and activate control

● Press the SET ››› Fig. 201 button to pro-gramme current speed.

● Automatic gearbox: apply the brake pedalto activate control with the vehicle stationary.

Deactivating the ACC

● Move the lever to position 0 until it en-gages. The text ACC: off appears.

Altering speed

● To increase or reduce speed step by step,press the lever up/down briefly ››› Fig. 201.

1) Different speed limits apply in each country anddepend on the unit indicated on the speedometer.

200


Any modification to the programmed speedis shown on the bottom left part of the instru-ment panel display.

Adjusting distance level

The distance according to speed with regardto the vehicle in front can be controlled onthe Easy Connect system on 5 levels››› page 27.

In wet road conditions, you should always seta larger distance with regard to the vehicle infront than when driving in dry conditions.

The following distances can be preselected:

● Very short

● Short

● Media

● Long

● Very long

You can use the Easy Connect system to ad-just the level of distance that should be ad-justed when the ACC is switched on with the button and the SETUP and Driver assistance

function buttons ››› page 27.

Adjusting the driving programme

In vehicles with driving profile selection(SEAT Drive Profile), the profile selected caninfluence acceleration behaviour››› page 219.

The following driving programmes items canbe selected:

● Normal

● Sport

● Eco

In vehicles without the driving profile selec-tion function, acceleration behaviour can beinfluenced by selecting a driving programmeon the Easy Connect system using the button and the SETUP and Driver assistance

function buttons ››› page 27.

The following conditions may lead the ACCnot to react:

● If the accelerator is pressed.

● If there is no gear engaged.

● If the ESC is controlling.

● If the driver is not wearing his/her seatbelt.

● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.

● If the vehicle is reversing.

● Driving faster than 210 km/h (150 mph).

WARNING

There is a danger of rear collision when theminimum distance to the vehicle in front isexceeded and the speed difference betweenboth vehicles is so great that a speed reduc-

tion by the ACC will not suffice. In this casethe brake pedal should be applied immedi-ately.

● The ACC may not be able to detect all situa-tions properly.

● “Stepping” on the accelerator may causethe ACC not to intervene in braking. Driverbraking will have priority over intervention bythe speed control or adaptive cruise control.

● Always be ready to use the brakes!

● Observe country-specific provisions gov-erning obligatory minimum distances be-tween vehicles.

Note

● The programmed speed is erased once theignition or the ACC are switched off.

● When the traction control system (ASR) isdeactivated during acceleration or else theESC is activated in Sport* Mode(››› page 110), the ACC switches off automati-cally.

● In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, theengine switches off automatically during theACC stopping phase and restarts automatical-ly to begin driving.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox

If the vehicle is equipped with automaticgearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until »

201

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

it stops completely if a vehicle in front of itstops.

The ACC will still be available for a few sec-onds. The vehicle will restart by itself if thevehicle in front moves (traffic jam assistant).

Disconnection criteria

The ACC will switch off if the driver appliesthe brake pedal or the driver's door isopened.

Restarting the vehicle with the ACC manually

The ACC can be activated again by movingthe lever to position 2 ››› Fig. 202.

CAUTION

● If your vehicle with ACC does not start upas expected, you can drive off by briefly step-ping on the accelerator.

● The Start-Stop system usually acts if youare driving with ACC.

Interrupting control


Important: the ACC is active.

Interrupting control during driving

● Move the lever to the position 3 . The ACCstandby message is displayed to the driver.or

● Brake.

● To resume the programmed speed, turn thelever to position 2 .

Interrupt speed control with the vehicle sta-tionary

Applies to vehicles with automatic gearbox:

● Move the lever to the position 3 . The ACCstandby message is displayed to the driver.

● To resume control, apply the brake and turnthe lever to position 2 .

WARNING

It is dangerous to activate control and resumethe programmed speed if the road, traffic orweather conditions do not permit this. Risk ofaccident!

Setting the distance

Fig. 203 Control lever: setting the distance.

● To display the distance currently program-med, briefly press the rocking button››› Fig. 203.

● To increase/reduce the distance one level,press the rocking button again towards theleft/right. The instrument panel displaymodifies the distance between both vehicles.

If the vehicle approaches another vehicle de-tected in front of it, the ACC reduces the

202


speed accordingly and then controls the ad-justed distance. If the vehicle detected infront accelerates, the adaptive cruise controlwill also accelerate up to the target speedprogrammed at most.

The greater the speed, the greater the dis-tance in metres should be ››› . We recom-mend the setting Distance 3.

WARNING

With regard to distance setting, the driver isresponsible for observing country-specificlegislation.

Driver messages

ACC not available

The system can no longer continue to guar-antee safe vehicle detection and will be de-activated. The sensor has lost its setting or isdamaged. Take the vehicle to a specialisedworkshop and have the fault repaired.

ACC: currently not available. No sensor vi-sion

ACC and Front Assist: currently not availa-ble. No sensor vision

This message will be displayed to the driver ifthe radar sensor's vision is impaired due, for

example, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt.Clean the sensor.

ACC: currently not available. Gradient toosteep

The maximum road slope has been excee-ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot beguaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched on.

ACC: only available in D, S or M

Select the D/S or M position on the selectorlever.

ACC: parking brake applied

The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake isapplied. The ACC is available once again afterthe parking brake is released.

ACC: currently not available. Interventionof stability control

The message for the driver is displayed whenthe electronic stability control (ESC) inter-venes. In this case, the ACC is automaticallyswitched off.

ACC: Take action!

The message for the driver is displayed if,when the vehicle starts up on a hill with amild slope, the vehicle rolls back even al-though the ACC is activated. Apply the braketo stop the vehicle from moving/collidingwith another vehicle.

ACC: speed limit

The message for the driver is displayed if, invehicles with manual gearbox, the currentspeed is too low for the ACC mode.

The speed to be stored must be at least30 km/h (18 mph). The speed limiterswitches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h(12 mph).

ACC: available as of the 2nd gear

The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear(manual gearbox).

ACC: engine speed

The message for the driver is displayed if,when the ACC accelerates or brakes, the driv-er does not shift up or down a gear in time,which means exceeding or not reaching thepermissible engine speed. The ACC switchesitself off. A buzzer warning is heard.

ACC: clutch pressed

Vehicles with a manual gearbox: pressing theclutch pedal for longer abandons controlmode.

Door open

Vehicles with automatic gearbox: the ACCcannot be activated with the vehicle station-ary and the door open.

203

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Function to avoid overtaking on thewrong side

Fig. 204 On the instrument panel display:ACC active, vehicle detected in an outer lane

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has a func-tion that helps avoid overtaking while drivingin inside lanes at certain speeds.

If another vehicle is detected travelling at aslower speed in an outer lane, it is displayedon the multifunction display ››› Fig. 204.

To avoid overtaking while driving in an insidelane the system will gently brake, and in ac-cordance with the speed will prevent the carfrom overtaking. The driver can interrupt thisintervention at any time.

Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise Con-trol ACC temporarily in certain situa-tions

In the following situations the AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC) should be deactivateddue to the system's limitations ››› :

● When changing lanes, on tight bends androundabouts, in acceleration and decelera-tion lanes on motorways or in sections withroad works to prevent involuntary accelera-tion to reach the programmed speed.

● When going through a tunnel, as operationcould be affected.

● On roads with several lanes, when other ve-hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak-ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will beovertaken on the right.

● In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as thevehicle in front might not be detected proper-ly or, in certain circumstances, might not bedetected at all.

WARNING

If the ACC does not switch off in the situa-tions described, serious accidents and inju-ries may occur.

● Always switch off the ACC in critical situa-tions.

Note

If you do not switch off the ACC in the afore-mentioned situations, you may commit a le-gal offence.

204


Special driving situations

Fig. 205 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy-clist ahead out of range of the radar sensor.

Fig. 206 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) Onevehicle turning and another stationary.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has certainphysical limitations inherent in the system.For example, certain reactions of the ACC, incertain circumstances, may be unexpected orcome late from the driver's point of view. Sopay attention in order to intervene if necessa-ry.

For example, the following traffic situationscall for the utmost attention:

Starting driving after a stopping phase (onlyvehicles with automatic gearbox)

After a stopping phase the ACC may begindriving automatically when the vehicle infront drives off.

Overtaking

When the turn signal lights up before the ve-hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, theACC accelerates the vehicle automaticallyand thus reduces the distance from the vehi-cle in front.

When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane,if the ACC does not detect another vehicle infront, it accelerates until it reaches the pro-grammed speed and maintains it.

System acceleration can be interrupted atany time by pressing the brake or moving thethird lever backwards ››› page 200.

Driving through a bend

On entering or exiting bends, the radar sen-sor may no longer determine the vehicle infront or react to a vehicle in the adjacent lane››› Fig. 205 A. In these situations the vehiclemay brake unnecessarily or fail to react to re-act to the vehicle in front. In this case, thedriver has to intervene by accelerating or in-terrupting the braking process by applyingthe brake or pushing the third lever back-wards ››› page 200.

Driving in tunnels

When driving through tunnels the radar sen-sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-nels. »

205

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Narrow or misaligned vehicles

The radar sensor can only detect narrow ormisaligned vehicles when they are withinrange ››› Fig. 205 B. This applies particularlyto narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. Inthese cases, you should brake as necessary.

Vehicles with special loads and accessories

Special loads and accessories of other vehi-cles that jut out over the sides, backwards orover the top may be out of the ACC's range.

Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi-cles with special loads and accessories orwhen overtaking them. In these cases, youshould brake as necessary.

Other vehicles changing lanes

Vehicles changing lanes a short distanceaway from your own can only be detectedwhen they are within range of the sensors.Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re-act ››› Fig. 206 C. In these cases, you shouldbrake as necessary.

Stationary vehicles

The ACC does not detect stationary objectswhile driving, such as traffic tails or damagedvehicles.

If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns ormoves over and there is a stationary vehiclein front of it, the ACC will not react to it

››› Fig. 206 D. In these cases, you shouldbrake as necessary.

Vehicles driving in the opposite directionand vehicles crossing your path

The ACC does not react to vehicles approach-ing from the opposite direction or vehiclescrossing your path.

Metal objects

Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheetsused in road works, can confuse the radarsensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly.

Factors that may affect how the radar sensoroperates

If laser sensor operation is impaired, due toheavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC isdeactivated temporarily. The relevant textmessage will appear in the dash panel dis-play. If necessary, clean the radar sensor.

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the ACC will automatically beavailable again. The message on the instru-ment panel screen will switch off and the ACCwill be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra-dar reverse reflection, for example in a closedcar park.

Trailer mode

When driving with trailer the ACC controlsless dynamically.

Overheated brakes

If the brakes overheat, for example afterabrupt braking or in long and steep slopes,the ACC may be deactivated temporarily. Therelevant text message will appear in the dashpanel display. In this case, adaptive cruisecontrol cannot be activated.

Adaptive cruise control can be reactivatedonce brake temperature has cooled suffi-ciently. The message will disappear from theinstrument panel display. If the message ACCnot available remains on for quite a longtime it means that there is a fault. Contact aspecialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis-iting a SEAT dealership.

WARNING

If the message ACC ready to start ap-pears on the instrument panel display andthe vehicle in front starts up, the vehicle willstart up automatically. In this case the radarsensor may not detect obstacles on the road.This could cause an accident and serious in-juries.

● Before driving off, check that the road isclear. If necessary, apply the brake.

206


Front Assist system includingCity emergency braking andpedestrian monitoring*

Introduction


The Front Assist system including City emer-gency braking and pedestrian monitoring canhelp avoid collisions.

The Front Assist system may warn the driver,within the constraints of the system, of im-pending collisions, prepare the vehicle foremergency braking in case of danger, providesupport during braking and apply automaticbraking.

The City emergency braking and pedestrianmonitoring functions are an integral part ofthe Front Assist system.

The Front Assist is not a replacement fordriver awareness.

Distance warning

If the system detects that safety is endan-gered by the proximity of the vehicle in front,it may warn the driver by means of a messageon the instrument panel when driving at aspeed of between approximately 60 km/h(37 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph)››› Fig. 207.

The warning moment varies depending onthe traffic situation and driver behaviour.

Advance warning

If the system detects a possible collision withthe vehicle in front, it may warn the driver bymeans of an audible warning and an indica-tion on the instrument panel when driving ata speed of between approximately 30 km/h(18 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph)››› Fig. 207.

The warning moment varies depending onthe traffic situation and driver behaviour. Atthe same time, the vehicle will prepare for apossible emergency braking ››› .

Critical warning

If the driver fails to react to the advancewarning, the system may actively intervene inthe brakes when driving at a speed of be-tween approximately 30 km/h (18 mph) and250 km/h (156 mph), generating a brief joltto warn of the imminent collision.

Automatic braking

If the driver also fails to react to the advancewarning, the system may brake the vehicleautomatically, by progressively increasingbraking effect driving at a speed of betweenapproximately 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and250 km/h (156 mph). By reducing speed incase of a possible collision, the system may

contribute to reducing the consequences ofan accident.

Front assist

If the Front Assist notices that the driver isnot braking sufficiently in case of a collisionhazard, the system can increase braking ef-fect and thus avert the collision when drivingat a speed of between approximately 4 km/h(2.5 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Frontassist only acts while the brake pedal ispressed down hard.

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the Front Assistcannot change the laws of physics. The driveris always responsible for braking in time. Ifthe Front Assist issues a warning, then, de-pending on the traffic circumstances, youmust brake immediately or dodge the obsta-cle.


● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-dents and serious injuries.

● In complex driving situations, the Front As-sist may issue unnecessary warnings and in-tervene unnecessarily in braking, such as intraffic islands.

● If the operation of the Front Assist is im-paired, for example, by dirt or because the ra-dar sensor has lost its settings, the system »

207

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

may issue unnecessary warnings andintervene inopportunely in the braking.

● During driving, the Front Assist does not re-act to people or animals or vehicles crossingyour path or which approach you head-on inthe same lane.

● The driver must always be ready to takeover the control of the vehicle.

Note

● When the Front Assist causes a braking,the brake pedal is “harder”.

● Automatic interventions by the Front Assiston the brakes may be interrupted by pressingthe clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel.

● If the Front Assist does not work as descri-bed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes severaltimes unnecessarily), switch it off. Have thesystem checked by a specialised workshop.SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.

On-screen warning lamps and mes-sages

Fig. 207 On the instrument panel display:Warning indications.

Distance warning

If the safe distance with regard to the vehiclein front is exceeded, the relevant warning willappear on the instrument panel display.

WARNING


Note

When the Front Assist is connected, the indi-cations on the instrument panel screen maybe concealed by warnings from other func-tions, such as an incoming call.

Radar sensor

Fig. 208 On the front bumper: radar sensor.

A radar sensor is installed on the front bump-er to determine the traffic situation››› Fig. 208 1 . This sensor can detect vehi-cles in front up to a distance of approximately120 m.

The radar sensor's visibility may be impairedby dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-fluences such as rain or mist. In this case theFront Assist monitoring system does notwork. The instrument panel displays the fol-lowing message: Front Assist: Nosensor vision! If necessary clean the ra-dar sensor ››› .

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the Front Assist will automati-cally be available again. The message willdisappear from the instrument panel display.

208


Front Assist operation may be affected by astrong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-cur, for example, in a closed car park or dueto the presence of metallic objects (e.g. railson the road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar sen-sor should not be covered with adhesives,additional or similar headlights, as this maynegatively affect Front Assist operation.

If structural modifications are made to the ve-hicle, for example, if the suspension is low-ered or the front spoiler is modified, Front As-sist operation may be affected. So structuralmodifications should only be made by speci-alised workshops. SEAT recommends visitinga SEAT dealership for this purpose.

If work is done incorrectly on the front of thevehicle, the radar sensor could be damagedor lose its settings, and Front Assist opera-tion may be affected. So repair work shouldonly be made by specialised workshops.SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealershipfor this purpose.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar sen-sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis-connect the Front Assist. This will avoid pos-sible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.

● The sensor may become damaged or loseits settings when knocked, for example, dur-

ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro-mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.


● Clean away the snow with a brush and theice preferably with a solvent-free de-icerspray.

Operating the Front Assist monitoringsystem

Fig. 209 On the instrument panel display:Front Assist switched off message.

Front Assist is active whenever the ignition isswitched on.

When the Front Assist is switched off, so tooare the advance warning function (pre warn-ing) and the distance warning.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al-ways switched on. Exceptions ››› page 210,Switch Front Assist off in the following situa-tions.

Activating and deactivating Front Assist

With the ignition switched on, the Front As-sist can be switched on and off as follows:

● Select the corresponding menu option us-ing the button for the driver assistance sys-tems ››› page 31.

● OR: switch the system on and off in EasyConnect using the button and the Setup

and Driver assistance function buttons››› page 27.

When Front Assist is switched off, the instru-ment panel will inform that it has beenswitched off with the following indicator ››› Fig. 209.

Switching the advance warning function onor off

The advance warning function may be switch-ed on and off in the Easy Connect system us-ing the button and the Setup andDriver assistance function buttons

››› page 27.

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the advancewarning function switched on at all times. »

209

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Depending on the infotainment system in-stalled in the vehicle, the advance warningfunction may be adjusted as follows:

● Ready

● Medium

● Delayed

● Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the functionin “Medium” mode.

Switching distance warning on and off

If the safe distance with regard to the vehiclein front is exceeded, the relevant warning willappear on the instrument panel display. In this case, increase the safe dis-tance.

The distance warning may be switched onand off in the Easy Connect system usingthe button and the SETUP andDriver assistance function buttons

››› page 27.

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the distancewarning switched on at all times.

Switch Front Assist off in the followingsituations

In the following situations the Front AssistMonitoring System should be deactivateddue to the system's limitations ››› :

● When the vehicle is to be towed.

● If the vehicle is on a test bed.

● When the radar sensor is damaged.

● If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, forexample in a rear collision.

● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.

● If the radar sensor is covered temporarilywith some kind of accessory, such as an ad-ditional headlight or the like.

● When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry,ferry or train.

WARNING

If the Front Assist is not switched off in thesituations described, serious accidents andinjuries may occur.

● Switch off the Front Assist in critical situa-tions.

System limitations

Front Assist has certain physical limitationsinherent in the system. Thus, in certain cir-cumstances some of the system's reactions

may be inopportune or be delayed from thedriver's standpoint. So pay attention in orderto intervene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause Front As-sist not to react or to do so too late:

● On taking tight bends.

● Pressing the accelerator all the way down.

● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-aged.

● If the ASR has been manually disconnec-ted.

● If the ESC is controlling.

● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.

● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.

● If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on theroad or sheets used in road works.

● If the vehicle is reversing.

● If the vehicle over-accelerates.

● In case of snow or heavy rain.

● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-bikes.

● Misaligned vehicles.

● Vehicles crossing the other's path.

● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-tion.

210


● Special loads and accessories of other ve-hicles that jut out over the sides, backwardsor over the top.

City Emergency braking function

Fig. 210 On the instrument panel display: ad-vance warning message

The City emergency braking function is partof Front Assist and is active whenever thesystem is switched on.

Depending on the equipment, the City emer-gency braking function may be switched onand off in the Easy Connect system usingthe button and the SETUP andDriver assistance function buttons

››› page 27.

The City Emergency braking function picksup, at speeds between approximately 4 km/h(2.5 mph) and 30 km/h (19 mph), the trafficsituation in front of the vehicle.

If the system detects a possible collision witha vehicle in front of it, the vehicle preparesfor a possible emergency braking ››› .

If the driver fails to react to a possible colli-sion, the system may brake the vehicle auto-matically, by progressively increasing brakingeffect driving to reduce speed in the event ofa collision. The system can thus help to re-duce the consequences of an accident.

Status display

Automatic deceleration by means of the CityEmergency braking function is displayed onthe instrument panel by means of the ad-vance warning ››› Fig. 2101).

WARNING

The smart technology included in the CityEmergency braking function cannot defy thelaws of physics. The driver is always respon-sible for braking in time.


● The City Emergency braking function alonecannot prevent accidents or serious injury.

● In complex driving situations, the CityEmergency braking function may issue unnec-essary warnings and intervene inopportunelyin braking, such as in work areas or if thereare metal rails.

● If the operation of the City Emergency brak-ing function is impaired, for example, by dirtor because the radar sensor has lost its set-tings, the system may issue unnecessarywarnings and intervene inopportunely in thebraking.

● During driving, the City Emergency brakingfunction does not react to people or animalsor vehicles crossing your path or which ap-proach you head-on in the same lane.

Note

● When the City Emergency braking functioncauses a braking, the brake pedal is “hard-er”.

● Automatic interventions on the brakes bythe City Emergency braking function may beinterrupted by pressing the clutch, accelera-tor or moving the wheel.

● The City Emergency braking function canbrake the vehicle until it stops completely.However, the brake system does not halt thevehicle permanently. Use the foot brake! »

1) The symbol on the instrument panels with colourdisplay is in colour.

211

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● If several inopportune intervenes occur,switch off the Front Assist and with it the CityEmergency braking function. Take it to a spe-cialised workshop, SEAT recommends visitinga SEAT dealership.

● If numerous unnecessary interventions oc-cur, the City Emergency braking function mayswitch off automatically.

Pedestrian Monitoring*1)

Fig. 211 On the instrument panel display: Advance warning message. PedestrianMonitoring deactivated.

The pedestrian monitoring system can helpprevent accidents involving pedestrians orreduce the consequences of an accident.

The system warns of danger of collision, pre-pares the vehicle for emergency braking, as-sists in the braking and brakes automatically.

If the system detects a possible collision witha pedestrian, it warns the driver with anacoustic signal and a message on the dashpanel display ››› Fig. 211.

The pedestrian monitoring system, includingthe advance warning, is automatically con-nected when the ignition is switched on››› page 167.

SEAT recommends always having the pedes-trian monitoring system connected. The ex-ceptions set out for the Front Assist systemare equally valid for the pedestrian monitor-ing system ››› page 210.

Switching the pedestrian monitoring systemon and off

With the ignition on, the pedestrian monitor-ing system can be switched on and off as fol-lows:

● Switch the system on and off in the info-tainment system using the button andthe SETUP and Driver assistance function but-tons ››› page 27.

When the pedestrian protection system isswitched off, the dash panel display shows a

message indicating this ››› Fig. 211 . Thepedestrian monitoring system is switched offwith the Front Assist function.

WARNING

The technology in the pedestrian monitoringsystem cannot defy the laws of physics andonly works within the system's limits. Thedriver is always responsible for braking intime. If the pedestrian monitoring system is-sues a warning, brake the vehicle immediate-ly with the brake pedal or swerve to avoid thepedestrian, depending on traffic conditions.

● The pedestrian monitoring system alonecannot avoid accidents or serious injury.

● In complex driving situations, the pedes-trian monitoring system may issue unneces-sary warnings and intervene unnecessarily inbraking, such as in main roads with turnings.

● If the operation of the system is impaired,for example, because the radar sensor andcamera are covered or have lost their set-tings, the system may issue unnecessarywarnings and intervene inopportunely in thebraking.

● The driver must always be ready to takeover the control of the vehicle.

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment, pedestrianmonitoring is not available in all countries.

212


Note

● When the vehicle is braked via the pedes-trian monitoring system, the brake pedal be-comes stiffer.

● Automatic interventions by the pedestrianmonitoring system on the brakes may be in-terrupted by pressing the accelerator or mov-ing the wheel.

● If the pedestrian monitoring system doesnot work as described in this chapter (e.g. ifit intervening unnecessarily several times),switch if off, contact a specialist workshopimmediately and request to have the systemchecked. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this.

Lane Assist system*

Introduction


WARNING

The intelligent technology in the Lane Assistsystem cannot change the limits imposed bythe laws of physics and by the very nature ofthe system. Careless or uncontrolled use ofthe Lane Assist system may cause accidentsand injury. The system is not a replacementfor driver awareness.

● Always adapt your speed and the distanceto the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,weather conditions, the condition of the roadand the traffic situation.

● Always keep your hands on the steeringwheel so it can be turned at any time.

● The Lane Assist system does not detect allroad markings. The road surfaces, road struc-tures or objects in poor condition can be in-correctly detected as road markings undercertain circumstances by the Lane Assist sys-tem. In such situations, switch the Lane As-sist system off immediately.

● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary.

● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-roundings.

● When the area of vision of the camera be-comes dirty, covered or is damaged, the LaneAssist system function can be affected.

CAUTION

In order to avoid influencing the operation ofthe system, the following points must be tak-en into account:

● Regularly clean the area of vision of thecamera and keep it in a clean state, withoutsnow or ice.

● Do not cover the area of vision of the cam-era.

● Check that the area of vision of the wind-screen camera is not damaged.

Note

● The Lane Assist system has been exclusive-ly developed for driving on paved roads only.

● If the Lane Assist system does not work asdescribed in this chapter, do not use it andcontact a specialised workshop.

● If there is a fault in the system, have itchecked by a specialised workshop.

213

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Indications on the display and lamps

Fig. 212 On the instrument panel display: In-dication on the Lane Assist system display(example 1).

Fig. 213 On the instrument panel display: In-dication on the Lane Assist system display(example 2).

Status display

The system is active, but not available,either because the minimum speed hasnot been reached or because the lanelines are not recognised ››› Fig. 212 A.

The system is active and available, bothlane lines are recognised. The steeringangle is not being corrected at this mo-ment ››› Fig. 212 B.

–

–

The system is operational, the highligh-ted line A indicates that there was arisk of involuntarily crossing the laneline and that the steering is being adjus-ted to correct the angle ››› Fig. 213 C.

The two lines A light up simultaneouslywhen both lane lines are recognised andthe Lane Assist function is active››› Fig. 213 D.

Control lamps

Blinks or lights up yellow: Lane Assistactive but not available.

The system can not accurately recognise the lane.Please see page 215, the Lane Assist system is notavailable (the control lamp is lit up yellow).

Blinks or lights up green:

Lane Assist system active and available.

WARNING


–

–

214


Operation

Fig. 214 In the windscreen: field of vision ofthe Lane Assist system camera.

Using the camera located in the windscreen,the Lane Assist system detects the possiblelines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in-voluntarily approaches a dividing line it hasdetected, the system notifies the driver witha corrective steering movement. This move-ment can be over-regulated at any time.

No warning is produced with the turn signalsactivated, given that the Lane Assist systemunderstands that a lane change is required.

Steering wheel vibration

The following situations can cause vibrationin the steering wheel and require the driverto take active control of driving:

● When the limits of the very nature of thesystem are reached.

● When the maximum rotational torque dur-ing the corrective steering movement is notenough to keep the vehicle inside the lane.

● When no lane is detected during the correc-tive steering movement.

Switching the Lane Assist system on or off

Through the Easy Connect system

● Press the Easy Connect button .

● Press the SETUP function button.

● Press the function button driver assistance toopen the menu.

OR: through the driving assist buttonon the turn signal level*.

The Lane centring guide is activa-ted/deactivated in the Easy Connect systemusing the button and the SETUP functionbutton ››› page 110.

Self-deactivation: the Lane Assist system canbe automatically deactivated if there is a sys-tem malfunction. The control lamp disap-pears.

Hands-Off Function

● In the absence of steering wheel activitythe system alerts the driver with acoustic sig-nals and a text message on the dash panelasking to actively take over the steering.

● If the driver does not react to this, the sys-tem also alerts the driver with a little shaking

motion through the brakes and, if the vehiclehas it, activates the Emergency Assist func-tion ››› page 217.

● In vehicles without Emergency Assist, theadaptive lane guidance function will be disa-bled after the corresponding warnings to thedriver.

The lane assist system is active but it is notavailable (the control lamp is lit up yellow)

● When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38mph).

● When the Lane Assist system does not de-tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam-ple, in the event warnings indicating roadworks, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflec-tions.

● When the radius of a curve is too small.

● When no road markings can be seen.

● When the distance to the next marking totoo great.

● When the system does not detect any clearand active steering movement during a longperiod of time.

● Temporarily, in the event of very dynamicdriving styles.

● If a turn signal is activated.

● With the stability control system (ESC) inSport mode or switched off. »

215

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Note

● Before starting a journey, verify that thefield of vision of the camera is not covered››› Fig. 214.

● Always keep the field of vision of the cam-era clean.

Switching off the Lane Assist systemin the following situations

Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system,switch it off in the following situations:

● When more attention is required of thedriver

● When driving in a sporty style

● In unfavourable weather conditions

● On roads in poor condition

● In areas of road works

Note

The Lane Assist system deactivates whendriving below 60 km/h (37 mph).

Traffic Jam Assist



Traffic Jam Assist helps the driver keep thecar within its lane and to move in convoy incase of traffic congestion or slow traffic.

Traffic Jam Assist is an additional function ofLane Assist ››› page 213 and combines LaneAssist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) ››› page 196. Therefore, it is essentialthat you read these two chapters carefullyand note the limitations of the systems andthe information about them.

Operation of Traffic Jam Assist

At speeds of below 60 km/h (40 mph), TrafficJam Assist can maintain a (temporary) dis-tance preset by the driver with respect to thevehicle ahead and help stay within the lane››› .

To do this, the system automatically controlsthe acceleration, brakes and steering, andslows down the vehicle until it stops fullywhen behind another vehicle that is stop-ping. It then automatically moves off againwhen the car in front does so.

Traffic Jam Assist is designed only for use onmotorways and wide roads. Therefore, neveruse it in city traffic.

Switching Traffic Jam Assist on and off

If Lane Assist is on, ››› page 213 Traffic JamAssist is switched on and off in the infotain-ment system using the button and the

SETUP and Driver assistance function buttons››› page 27.

It is activated by switching on Lane Assistand the lane centring guide in the infotain-ment system. If the lane centring guide is notactive, the Traffic Jam Assist system is not ac-tive

Traffic Jam Assist may be disconnected usingthe button for driver assistance systems to-gether with Lane Assist ››› page 31.

Technical requirements for using Traffic JamAssist

● Lane Assist must be activated ››› page 213,Lane Assist system*.

● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must be con-nected and active ››› page 196.

● The selector lever must be in the D/S posi-tion or in the Tiptronic selection track.

● The speed must be below 60 km/h(38 mph).

● The lane centring guide must be active››› page 215.

Traffic Jam Assist is not active (the Lane As-sist control light turns yellow)

● If any of the conditions mentioned onpage 216, Technical requirements for usingTraffic Jam Assist are no longer met.

216


● If any of the conditions required for opera-tion of the Lane Assist are not met››› page 213.

● If any of the conditions necessary for theadaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are nolonger fulfilled ››› page 196.

Situations in which Traffic Jam Assist mustbe switched off

Due to the limitations of the system, TrafficJam Assist must always be switched off in thefollowing situations:

● When more attention is required by thedriver.

● When driving in a very sporty style.

● In adverse weather conditions, e.g. in caseof snow or heavy rain.

● When driving on roads in poor condition.

● In sections with roadworks.

● In city journeys.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into Traf-fic Jam Assist cannot defy the laws of phys-ics; it only works within the limits of the sys-tem. Accidents and severe injury may occur ifTraffic Jam Assist is used negligently or invol-untarily. The system is not a replacement fordriver awareness.

● Adapt your speed and safe distance to thevehicle in front of you at all times to suit the

visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.

● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in city jour-neys.

● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist if there is poorvisibility, for example, in case of snow, ice,rain or loose gravel, or on steep or slipperysections or flooded roads.

● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad or onroads where the surface is not firm. TrafficJam Assist has been designed for use onpaved roads only.

● Traffic Jam Assist does not react to peopleor animals or vehicles crossing your path orthat approach you head-on down the samelane.

● If Traffic Jam Assist does not reduce speedsufficiently, brake the vehicle immediately byapplying the pedal.

● If the vehicle continues to move when youwish it to stop after a driver interventionprompt, brake the vehicle by applying thepedal.

● If driver intervention is requested on thedash panel display, immediately resume con-trol of the vehicle.

● Keep your hands on the wheel at all timesto be ready to intervene in the steering at anytime. The driver is always responsible forkeeping the vehicle in its own lane.

● Always be prepared to take charge of driv-ing (accelerating or braking) yourself.

Note

● If Traffic Jam Assist does not work as de-scribed in this chapter, stop using it and con-tact a specialised workshop.

● If the system is faulty, take it to a special-ised workshop and have it checked.

Emergency Assist


Emergency Assist detects whether there is in-activity by the driver and can automaticallykeep the car within the lane and stop it alto-gether if necessary. This way the system canactively help avoid an accident.

Emergency Assist is an additional function ofLane Assist ››› page 213 and combines LaneAssist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) ››› page 196. Therefore, it is essentialthat you read these two chapters carefullyand note the limitations of the systems andthe information about them.

Operation of Emergency Assist

Emergency Assist detects when the driverceases to perform any activity and repeatedlyrequests that he/she regain active control ofthe vehicle, through the use of optical andacoustic warnings and by applying thebrakes. »

217

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

If the driver continues to do nothing, the sys-tem automatically takes over the accelerator,brakes and steering in order to brake the ve-hicle and keep it in its lane ››› . If the re-maining braking distance is sufficient, if nec-essary the system slows down the vehicle un-til it stops completely and automaticallyswitches on the electronic parking brake››› page 172.

When the Emergency Assist is actively adjust-ing, the hazard warning lights come on››› page 135 and the vehicle makes slight zig-zag movements in the lane in order to warnother drivers.

Switching the Emergency Assist on and off

The Emergency Assist is switched on auto-matically when the Lane Assist is switched on››› page 213.

Technical requirements for using the Emer-gency Assist

● The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must beswitched on ››› page 196.

● The Lane Assist must be switched on››› page 213.

● The selector lever must be at the D/S posi-tion or in the Tiptronic selection track.

● The system must have detected a lane sep-aration line on both sides of the vehicle››› Fig. 213.

The following conditions may cause theEmergency Assist not to react or to switch offautomatically:

● If the driver accelerates, brakes or movesthe steering wheel.

● If any of the conditions mentioned in››› page 218, Technical requirements for us-ing the Emergency Assist are not fulfilled.

● If any of the conditions required for opera-tion of the Lane Assist are not met››› page 213.

● If any of the conditions necessary for theadaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are nolonger fulfilled ››› page 196.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into theEmergency Assist cannot overcome the limitsimposed by the laws of physics; it only workswithin the limits of the system. The driver isresponsible for driving the vehicle.

● Adapt your speed and safe distance to thevehicle in front of you at all times to suit thevisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.

● Keep your hands on the wheel at all timesto be ready to intervene in the steering at anytime.

● The Emergency Assist alone cannot alwaysavoid accidents or serious injuries.

● If the operation of the Emergency Assist isimpaired, for example if the radar sensor of

the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the LaneAssist camera are covered or have lost theirsettings, the system may intervene inoppor-tunely in braking or in steering.

● The Emergency Assist does not react topeople or animal or vehicles crossing yourpath or which approach you head-on in thesame lane.

WARNING

If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor-tunely, serious accidents and injuries may oc-cur.

● If the Emergency Assist does not operateproperly, switch off the Lane Assist››› page 213. Doing so will also switch off theEmergency Assist.

● Have the system checked by a specialisedworkshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this.

Note

● Automatic interventions by the EmergencyAssist on the brakes may be interrupted bypressing the accelerator or brake or by mov-ing the wheel.

● Hazard warning lights that come on auto-matically can be switched off by pressing theaccelerator or the break, moving the steeringwheel or pressing the hazard warning lightswitch.

218


● If this occurs, the Emergency Assist maydecelerate the vehicle until it comes to a com-plete stop.

● When the Emergency Assist is activated, itis only available again after the ignition hasbeen switched off and back on again.

SEAT Drive Profile*

Introduction


SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver tochoose between four profiles or modes, Nor-mal, Sport, Eco and Individual, thatmodify the behaviour of various vehicle func-tions, providing different driving experiences.

In the FR and X-PERIENCE models equippedwith dynamic chassis control, the Comfortprofile is also available.

In the Leon Cupra model the four profiles areComfort, Sport, Cupra and Individual.

The Individual profile can be configuredaccording to personal preferences. The otherprofiles are fixed.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on thefollowing functions:

Engine

Depending on the profile selected, the en-gine responds more spontaneously or morein harmony with the movements of the accel-erator. Additionally, when Eco mode is selec-ted, the Start-stop function is automaticallyactivated.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, thegear change points are modified to positionthem in lower or higher engine speed ranges.Additionally, the Eco1) mode activates the In-ertia function, enabling consumption to befurther reduced.

In manual gearbox vehicles, Eco1) mode cau-ses the gear change recommendation indica-tions that appear on the instrument panel tovary, facilitating more efficient driving.

Dynamic chassis control (DCC)


DCC continuously adapts the shock absorb-ers to the condition of the road and currentdriving conditions, according to the pre-setprogramme.

In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow-ing message is displayed on the instrumentscreen Fault: damping setting.

Address

Power steering becomes more robust inSport mode to enable a sportier drivingstyle. In the Leon Cupra the power steeringbecomes more robust in Cupra mode.

Air conditioning

In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operatein eco1) mode, especially restricting fuel con-sumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)2)

According to the active driving profile, the ac-celeration gradient of the adaptive cruisecontrol varies.

Electronic self-locking differential2)

The self-locking differential adapts its behav-iour depending on the driving profile chosen. »

1) In the Leon Cupra model, Eco mode is selectedthrough the Individual profile.2) Applies to the Leon Cupra model.

219

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Normal mode or Cupra mode can be selectedto prioritise improved traction in sport driv-ing.

Setting driving mode

Fig. 215 Centre console: MODE button.

You can select from Normal, Sport, Ecoand Individual.

You can select the required mode either byrepeatedly pressing the button MODE››› Fig. 215, or on the touch screen, in themenu that opens when the above button ispressed.

An icon on the Easy Connect system displayinforms about the active mode.

The MODE button light remains lit up yellowwhen the active mode is different to Normal.

Drivingprofile

Characteristics

Normal Offers a balanced driving experience, suit-able for everyday use.

SportProvides a complete dynamic performancein the vehicle, enabling the user a moresporty driving style.

EcoPlaces the vehicle in a particularly lowstate of consumption, facilitating a fuel-saving driving style that is respectful tothe environment.

Individ-ual

Enables some configurations to be modi-fied by pressing the Profile settingsbutton. The functions that can be adjusteddepend on the equipment fitted in the ve-hicle.

Conven-iencea)

It permits more relaxed and comfortabledriving, for example for long motorwayjourneys. Its main characteristic is the softsuspension setting (DCC).

a) Only for FR and X-PERIENCE models equipped with dynamicchassis control.

WARNING

When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay atten-tion to all traffic: doing otherwise could causean accident.

Note

● When the vehicle is switched off it will al-ways store the driving profile that was selec-

ted when the ignition key was removed. Nev-ertheless, when the engine is restarted theengine and the gear will not restart in itssportier mode in order to save fuel. For en-gine and gear to revert to a sportier mode,select the corresponding driving profile againon the Easy Connect system screen.

● Your speed and driving style must alwaysbe adjusted to visibility, weather, and trafficconditions.

● The eco mode is not available when towinga trailer.

Setting driving mode3 Applies to the model: Leon Cupra

Fig. 216 Centre console: Cupra Drive Profilebutton.


220


You can select from Convenience, Sport,Cupra and Individual.

Cupra Drive Profile button

You can select the required mode either byrepeatedly pressing the button with the Cu-pra logotype ››› Fig. 216, or on the touchscreen, in the menu that opens when theabove button is pressed.

An icon on the Easy Connect system displayinforms about the active mode.

The light of the button with the Cupra logo-type remains lit up only when the Cupra pro-file is active.

Drivingprofile

Characteristics

Conven-ience

It permits more relaxed and comfortabledriving, for example for long motorwayjourneys. Its main characteristic is thesoft suspension setting (DCC).

Sport It represents the vehicle's default behav-iour, suitable for dynamic driving.

CupraIt gives the vehicle a decidedly sportiernature, and makes for maximum perform-ance.

Individ-ual

Enables some configurations to be modi-fied by pressing the Profile settingsbutton. The functions that can be adjus-ted depend on the equipment fitted in thevehicle.

WARNING

When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay atten-tion to all traffic: doing otherwise could causean accident.

Note

● When the vehicle is switched off it will al-ways store the driving profile that was selec-ted when the ignition key was removed. Nev-ertheless, when the engine is restarted theengine and the gear will not restart in itssportier mode in order to save fuel. For en-gine and gear to revert to a sportier mode,select the corresponding driving profile againon the Easy Connect system screen.

● Your speed and driving style must alwaysbe adjusted to visibility, weather, and trafficconditions.

Kick-down

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-celeration to be reached.

If the eco* ››› page 220 mode has been se-lected in SEAT Drive Profile*, and the acceler-ator is pressed beyond a hard point, the en-gine power is automatically controlled to giveyour vehicle maximum acceleration.

WARNING

Please note that if the road surface is slip-pery or wet, the kick-down feature couldcause the driving wheels to spin, which couldresult in skidding.

221

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Traffic sign detection system

Introduction

The traffic sign detection system can help thedriver with information on speed limits or ifovertaking is prohibited at that moment.

The traffic signs and additional informationdetected by the system are represented onthe instrument panel display and in the visu-al presentation of the Infotainment system(representation of the navigation systemmap).

Countries in which it works

When this instruction manual went to print,the traffic sign detection system was operat-ing in the following countries:

Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia,Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, France,Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Lux-embourg, the Netherlands, Norway, Poland,Portugal, Romania, San Marino, Slovakia,Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, theUnited Kingdom and the Vatican City.

WARNING

The technology in the traffic sign detectionsystem cannot change the limits imposed bythe laws of physics and only works within thesystem's limits. Do not let the extra conven-ience afforded by the traffic sign detection

system tempt you into taking any risks whendriving. The system is not a replacement fordriver awareness.

● Adapt your speed and driving style to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.

● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and fogmay lead to the system failing to display traf-fic signs or not displaying them correctly.

● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-ered or damaged, system operation may beimpaired.

WARNING

The driving recommendations and traffic indi-cations shown on the traffic sign detectionsystem may differ from the actual currenttraffic situation.

● The system may not detect or correctlyshow all the traffic signs.

● Traffic signs and traffic regulations havepriority over the recommendations and dis-plays provided by the system.

Note

In order not to compromise the system's op-eration, please take the following points intoaccount:

● Regularly clean the area of vision of thecamera and keep it in a clean state, withoutsnow or ice.

● Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-era.

● Check that the windscreen is not damagedin the area of the camera's field of vision.

Note

● The use of outdated maps on the naviga-tion system may cause the system to showtraffic signs incorrectly.

● In the waypoints mode of the navigationsystem, the traffic sign detection system isonly partly available.

222


Indication on display

Fig. 217 On the instrument panel display: ex-amples of speed limits or overtaking prohibi-tions with their respective additional signs.

Speed limits or overtaking prohibitions withtheir respective additional signs may beshown on the instrument panel display››› Fig. 217 and, depending on the navigationsystem installed in a vehicle, also on the in-fotainment system display ››› page 27.

Traffic sign de-tection systemmessages

Cause and solution

There are notraffic signsavailable

The system is booting up.OR: the camera has not recog-nised any obligation or prohibi-tion signs.

Error: Detec-tion of trafficsigns

There is a fault in the system.Have the system checked by aspecialised workshop.

Detection oftraffic signs:Clean the wind-screen!

The windscreen is dirty in thecamera area.Clean the windscreen.

Traffic signdetection iscurrently limi-ted

The navigation system is nottransmitting any data.Check that the navigation sys-tem has up-to-date maps.OR: The vehicle is currently in aregion that is not included in thenavigation system's map.

Function notavailable

The traffic sign detection systemdoes not work in the currentcountry.

WARNING

If messages are ignored, the vehicle may stallin traffic and cause accidents and severe inju-ries.

● Never ignore the messages displayed.

● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.

Note

Failure to heed the control lamps and corre-sponding text messages when they light upmay result in damage to the vehicle.

Operation

The traffic sign detection system does notwork in all countries ››› page 222, Countriesin which it works. Keep this in mind whentravelling abroad.

Display of traffic signs

When the traffic sign detection system is con-nected, a camera located on the base of theinterior rear-view mirror records the trafficsigns in front of the vehicle. After checkingand evaluating the information from the cam-era, the navigation system and the currentvehicle data, up to three valid traffic signsare displayed ››› Fig. 217 B in conjunctionwith their corresponding additional signs.

The sign that is currently valid for thedriver is shown in the left side of thescreen For example, a maximum speedlimit of 130 km/h (100 mph)››› Fig. 217 A.

A sign valid only in certain circum-stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) isshown second, together with the addi-tional rain sign. »

First:

Second:

223

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

If the windscreen wiper isworking while you are driving, the signalwith the additional rain sign will beshown first, on the left, as it is the onethat is applicable at the time.

A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g.No overtaking at certain times, will bedisplayed third ››› Fig. 217 C.

Town or city entrance and exit signs activatethe display of current speed limits in thecountry's cities or roads. If there is an addi-tional speed limit sign next to the town orcity entrance and exit signs, this sign will al-so be displayed.

Signs indicating the end of a speed limit orthe end of an overtaking prohibition are notdisplayed.

No warning will be given if the speed limitsign displayed is exceeded. The correspond-ing legal provisions are applicable.

Activating and deactivating traffic sign dis-play on the instrument panel

The permanent display of traffic signs on theinstrument panel can be activated or deacti-vated on the infotainment system by meansof the button and the function buttonsSETUP and Driver Assistance .

Additional sign:

Third:

Trailer mode

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory and a trailer that iselectrically connected to the vehicle, it is pos-sible to activate or deactivate the display ofspecific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer,such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi-tions. Activation or deactivation is performedon the infotainment system by means ofthe button and the function buttonsSETUP and Driver Assistance ››› page 27.

Fatigue detection (break rec-ommendation)*

Introduction


The Fatigue detection informs the driverwhen their driving behaviour shows signs offatigue.

WARNING

Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fatiguedetection system tempt you into taking anyrisks when driving. Take regular breaks, suffi-cient in length when making long journeys.

● The driver always assumes the responsibil-ity of driving to their full capacity.

● Never drive if you are tired.

● The system does not detect the tiredness ofthe driver in all circumstances. Consult the in-formation in the section ››› page 225, Systemlimitations.

● In some situations, the system may incor-rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu-vre as driver tiredness.

● No warning is given in the event of the ef-fect called microsleep!

● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note

● Fatigue detection has been developed fordriving on motorways and well paved roadsonly.

● If there is a fault in the system, have itchecked by a specialised workshop.

224


Function and operation

Fig. 218 On the instrument panel display: fa-tigue detection symbol.

Fatigue detection determines the driving be-haviour of the driver when starting a journey,making a calculation of tiredness. This isconstantly compared with the current drivingbehaviour. If the system detects that the driv-er is tired, an audible warning is given with asound and an optic warning is shown with asymbol and complementary message on theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 218. Themessage on the instrument panel display isshown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-pending on the case, is repeated. The systemstores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel displaycan be switched off by pressing the button on the windscreen wiper lever or thebutton on the multi function steeringwheel ››› page 30.

The message can be recalled to the instru-ment panel display using the multifunctiondisplay ››› page 30.

Conditions of operation

Driving behaviour is only calculated onspeeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up toaround 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and off

Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti-vated in the Easy Connect system with the button and the SETUP ››› page 110 func-

tion button. A mark indicates that the adjust-ment has been activated.

System limitations

The Fatigue detection has certain limitationsinherent to the system. The following condi-tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-vent it from functioning.

● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)

● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)

● When cornering

● On roads in poor condition

● In unfavourable weather conditions

● When a sporty driving style is employed

● In the event of a serious distraction to thedriver

Fatigue detection will be restored when thevehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,when the ignition is switched off or when thedriver has unbuckled their seat belt andopened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long pe-riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) thesystem automatically re-establishes the tired-ness calculation. When driving at a fasterspeed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-ted.

Parking aid

General information

Various systems are available to help youwhen parking or manoeuvring in tightspaces, depending on the equipment fittedon your vehicle.

The rear parking aid is an audible assistantthat warns about obstacles located behindthe vehicle ››› page 227.

During parking, Parking System Plus assiststhe driver by visually and audibly warningthem about obstacles detected in front andbehind the vehicle ››› page 227. »

225

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

● Always pay attention, also when lookingstraight ahead, to traffic and the vehiclesurroundings. The assistance systems are nota replacement for driver awareness. When in-serting or removing the vehicle from a park-ing space, or when performing similar ma-noeuvres the driver always assumes the re-sponsibility.

● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-fic conditions.

● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots inwhich obstacles and people are not regis-tered. Pay special attention to children andanimals.

● Always keep visual control of the vehiclesurroundings: use the mirrors for additionalhelp.

CAUTION

Parking Aid functions may be negatively af-fected by different factors that may lead todamage to the vehicle or its immediate sur-rounds:

● Under certain circumstances, the systemdoes not detect or display certain objects:

– Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars,fences, posts and thin trees.

– Objects that are located above the sen-sors, such as protrusions in a wall.

– Objects with certain surfaces or struc-tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-der snow.

● Certain surfaces of objects and garmentsdo not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor-rectly, these objects or people wearing suchclothes.

● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affectedby external sound sources. In certain circum-stances this may prevent them from detect-ing people or objects.

● Please note that low obstacles detected bythe system may no longer be registered bythe sensors as the car moves closer, so thesystem will not give any further warning. Incertain circumstances, objects such as highkerbs that could damage the bottom of thevehicle are not detected either.

● If the first warning from the ParkPilot is ig-nored, the vehicle could suffer considerabledamage.

● The knocks or damage on the radiatorgrille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under-body can adjust the orientation of the sen-sors. This can affect the parking aid function.Have the function checked by a specialisedworkshop.

Note

● In certain situations, the system can give awarning even though there is no obstacle inthe detected area, e.g:

– with rough or cobbled floors or groundwith long grass;

– with external ultrasound sources, such ascleaning vehicles or other vehicles;

– In downpours, intense snow or dense ex-haust gases;

– if the registration plate (front or rear) isnot properly affixed to the bumper sur-face;

– or in locations such as the brow of a hill.

● In order to guarantee good system opera-tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, freeof snow or ice, and do not cover them withadhesives or other objects.

● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, applyit directly only very briefly and always from adistance of more than 10 cm.

● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with theoperation of the Parking Aid.

● In order to familiarise yourself with the sys-tem, it is advised that you practice parking inan area or car park that is free from traffic.There must be good weather and light condi-tions.

● The volume and tone of the warnings canbe modified, in addition to the indications››› page 230.

● In vehicles without a driver informationsystem, these parameters can be modified ina SEAT Official Service or in a specialisedworkshop.

226


● Please observe information on towing atrailer ››› page 230.

● The display on the Easy Connect screenshows a slight time delay.

Rear parking aid*

The rear Parking Aid assists the driver inparking by means of audible warningsounds.

Description

There are sensors integrated in the rearbumper. When the sensors detect an obsta-cle, you are alerted by audible warnings.

Make particularly sure that the sensors arenot covered by adhesives, residues and thelike, as this could affect the system's opera-tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 248.

The approximate measurement range of therear sensors is:

side area 0.60 m

central area 1.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-val between the audible warnings will be re-duced. When you reach around 0.30 m thewarning will be constant: Do not continue tomove forward (or backward) ››› in General

information on page 226, ››› in General in-formation on page 226 !

If you maintain separation from the obstacle,the volume of the warning begins to reduceafter four seconds (does not affect the toneof the constant warning).

Activating/Deactivating

When engaging reverse gear, the parking aidis automatically switched on. This is con-firmed with a short warning.

On disengaging reverse gear, the Parking Aidsystem is disconnected immediately.

Parking system plus*

Fig. 219 Represented area.

Parking system plus assists you audibly andvisually when parking.

There are sensors integrated in the front andrear bumpers. When they detect an obstacle,you are alerted by audible warnings and visu-ally on the Easy Connect system.

In the event of danger of a frontal collision,the audible warnings come from the front ofthe vehicle, and in the event of the danger ofa rear-end collision they come from the rear.

Make particularly sure that the sensors arenot covered by adhesives, residues and thelike, as this could affect the system's opera-tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 248.

The approximate measurement range of thesensors is:

1.20 m

0.60 m

1.60 m

0.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-val between the audible warnings will be re-duced. When you reach around 0.30 m thewarning will be constant: do not continue tomove forward (or backward)!

If you maintain separation from the obstacle,the volume of the warning begins to reduceafter four seconds (does not affect the toneof the constant warning).

A

B

C

D

227

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Parking Aid operation

Fig. 220 Centre console: parking aid button.

Manual connection of Parking Aid

● Press the button once.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid

● Press the button again.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display(the audible sounds remain active)

● Press a button on the main menu of the fac-tory-assembled infotainment system.

● OR: Press the BACK function button.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid

● Engage reverse gear or turn the selectorlever to position R.

● OR: depending on the equipment, if the ve-hicle rolls back1).

● OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstaclethat is in its forwards path at a speed below10 km/h (6 mph) ››› page 229, Automatic ac-tivation. The obstacle is detected as of a dis-tance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic con-nection is activated in the infotainment sys-tem. A reduced display is shown.

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid

● Move the selector lever to position P.

● OR: accelerate to more than approx.10 km/h (6 mph) forward.

Temporary suppression of sound in ParkingAid

● Press the function button.

Change from reduced view to full view


● OR: depending on the equipment, if the ve-hicle rolls back1).

● OR: press the car icon in reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image(Rear View Camera “RVC”)


● OR: Press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard andthe button symbol will light up yellow whenthe system is switched on.

1) With certain equipment, the system will be activa-ted automatically when the vehicle reverses for a cer-tain distance (about 10 cm if an obstacle is detectedin the rear area and about 20 cm if no obstacle is de-tected in the rear area).

228


Automatic activation

Fig. 221 Miniature indication of automatic ac-tivation

When the Parking System Plus is switched onautomatically, a miniature of the vehicle willbe displayed and the segments will beshown on the left side of the screen››› Fig. 221.

Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap-proaching an obstacle located in front of thevehicle. It only operates every time the speedis reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6mph) for the first time.

If the parking aid is switched off using the button, the following actions must be carriedout in order for it to automatically switch on:

● Switch off the ignition and switch it onagain.

● OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be-fore reducing speed below this numberagain.

● OR: place the selector lever in position Pand then move it from this position.

● OR: switch on and off the automatic activa-tion in the Easy Connect system menu.

The automatic activation with parking aidminiature indication can be switched on andoff from the Easy Connect system menu››› page 27:


● Select: CAR button > Settings > Parkingand manoeuvring.

● Select the Automatic activation op-tion. When the function button check box isactivated , the function is on.

If the system has been activated automatical-ly, an audible sound warning will only be giv-en when obstacles in front are at a distanceof less than 50 cm.

CAUTION

The automatic connection of the Parking Aidonly works when you are driving slowly. Ifdriving style is not adapted to the circum-stances, an accident and serious injury ordamage may be caused.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 222 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-nect system screen.

The distance of separation from the obstaclecan be estimated using the segments aroundthe vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments worksas follows:

a white segment is dis-played when the obstacle is not withinthe vehicle's trajectory or the directionof travel is in the opposite direction toits location.

obstacles located in thevehicle's trajectory and which are morethan 30 cm away from the vehicle aredisplayed in yellow.

obstacles that are less than30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-played in red. »

White segments:

Yellow segments:

Red segments:

229

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Moreover, with the SEAT Media SystemPlus/Navi System radios, a yellow trail indi-cates the vehicle's expected journey basedon the steering wheel angle.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-cle’s direction of travel, the correspondingaudible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, thesegments are displayed closer to the vehicle.When the penultimate segment is displayed,this means that the vehicle has reached thecollision zone. In the collision zone, the ob-stacles are represented in red, includingthose out of the path. Do not continue tomove forward (or backward) ››› in Generalinformation on page 226, ››› in General in-formation on page 226 !

Adjusting the display and audiblewarnings

The settings for the display and audiblewarnings are controlled via the Easy Con-nect*.

Automatic activation

on – activates the Automatic activa-tion option ››› page 229.

off – deactivates the Automatic ac-tivation option ››› page 229.

Front volume*

Volume in the front and rear area.

Front sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the frontarea.

Rear volume*

Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the reararea.

Adjust volume

With the parking aid switched on, the activeaudio/video source volume will be reducedto the intensity of the selected setting.

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when itis switched on, if a message reporting a Park-ing aid error is displayed on the instrumentpanel, there is a fault in the system.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-necting the ignition, next time that parkingaid is engaged in reverse, it will not be indi-cated.

Parking System Plus*

If there is a fault in the parking aid system amessage will appear on the instrument panelindicating the error. In addition the keyLED will blink.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol isdisplayed on the Easy Connect display infront of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor isfaulty, only the obstacles in the areas A andB are displayed ››› Fig. 219. If a front sensor

is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas C

and D are displayed.

Have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay.

Towing bracket

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory, when the trailer isconnected electrically, the Parking Aid rearsensors will not be activated when reversegear is engaged, when the selector lever isturned to position R or when the button ispressed.

Parking System Plus

The distance to possible obstacles at the rearof the vehicle will not be displayed on thescreen and nor will it be indicated by meansof audible sound signals.

230


The Easy Connect system screen will only dis-play objects detected at the front, and the ve-hicle's trajectory will be hidden.

Braked manoeuvre function*3 Valid only with Parking system plus

If an obstacle is detected while reversing, thebraked manoeuvre function activates theemergency brake. Depending on the equip-ment, the braked manoeuvre function can al-so activate the emergency brake while mov-ing forwards.

The emergency braking function helps tominimise collisions. The vehicle's speedmust be no higher than 10 km/h.

The braked manoeuvre function is active orinactive when the parking light is lit or off, re-spectively. If the emergency brake has beenactivated, the function will remain inactiveuntil the gear is changed.

The limitations of Parking Aid apply.

The braked manoeuvre function is configuredin the Easy Connect system with the but-ton and the function buttons SETUP andParking and manoeuvring .

● on – enables use of the braked ma-noeuvre function.

● off – disables use of the braked ma-noeuvre function.

Temporary suppression of emergency brak-ing

● When deactivating the function with theBraked manoeuvre button, which appears on

the Parking aid screen of the Easy Connectsystem.

● When any of the doors, the rear lid or thebonnet are opened.

Rear Assist “Rear View Cam-era”*

Operating and safety warnings

WARNING

● The Rear Assist does not make it possibleto precisely calculate the distance from ob-stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can itovercome the system's own limits, hence us-ing it may cause serious accidents and inju-ries if used negligently or without due care.The driver should be aware of his/her sur-roundings at all times to ensure safe driving.

● The camera lens expands and distorts thefield of vision and displays the objects on thescreen in a different, vague manner. The per-ception of distances is also distorted by thiseffect.

● Some objects may, due to the resolution ofthe display screen - not be displayed in a sat-isfactory manner or may not be displayed at

all. Take special care with thin posts, fences,railings or trees that might not be displayedon screen and could damage the vehicle.

● The rear assist has blind spots where it isnot possible to represent people or objects(small children, animals and certain objectscannot be detected in its field of vision). Mon-itor the vehicle's surrounding area at alltimes.

● Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice andsnow, and do not cover it.

● The system is not a replacement for driverawareness. Supervise the parking operationat all times, as well as the vehicle's surround-ing area. Adapt your speed and driving styleat all times to suit visibility, weather, roadand traffic conditions.

● Do not be distracted from the traffic bylooking at the screen.

● The images on the rear assist screen areonly two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatialdepth, protruding parts or holes in the road,for example, are more difficult to detect ormay not be seen at all.

● Vehicle load modifies the representation ofthe orientation lines displayed. The widthrepresented by the lines diminishes with ve-hicle load. Pay special attention to the vehi-cle's surroundings when the inside of the ve-hicle of the luggage compartment is carryinga heavy load.

● In the following situations, the objects orother vehicles shown in the navigation sys-tem display appear to be further away or »

231

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

closer than they really are: Pay special atten-tion:

– On moving from a horizontal plane to aslope.

– On moving from a slope to a horizontalplane.

– If the vehicle is heavily loaded at therear.

– When the vehicle approaches objectsthat are not on the ground surface or arejutting out from it. These objects may al-so be outside the camera's angle of vi-sion when reversing.

Note

● It is important to take great care and payspecial attention if you are not yet familiarwith the system.

● Rear assist will not be available if the vehi-cle's rear lid is open.

Instructions for use

Fig. 223 On the rear bumper: location of therear assist camera

A camera on the rear bumper aids the driverduring reverse parking or manoeuvring››› Fig. 223. The camera image is viewed to-gether with orientation lines projected by thesystem on the Easy Connect system screen.The bottom of the screen displays part of thebumper corresponding to the number platearea that will be used as reference by thedriver.

Rear assist settings:

Rear assist offers the user the possibility tochange the image's brightness, contrast andcolour settings.

To change these settings:

● Park the vehicle in a safe place.

● Apply the parking brake.


● If necessary, switch on the Easy Connectsystem.


● Press the function button displayed onthe right of the image.

● Make the desired adjustments on the menuby pressing the –/+ function buttons or bymoving the corresponding scroll button.

Necessary conditions for parking and ma-noeuvring with the rear assist

The system should not be used in the follow-ing cases:

● If the image displayed is not very reliable oris distorted, for example low visibility or dirtylens.

● If the area behind the vehicle is not dis-played very clearly or is incomplete.

● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.

● If the position and installation angle of thecamera have been changed, e.g. after a rear-end collision. Have the system checked by aspecialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the system

To familiarise yourself with the system, theorientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-ommends practising parking and manoeu-vring with the rear assist in a place without

232


too much traffic or in a car park when thereare good weather and visibility conditions.

Cleaning the camera lens

Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snowand ice:

● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-based glass cleaning product and clean thelens with a dry cloth.

● Remove snow using a small brush.

● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.

CAUTION

● Never use abrasive cleaning products toclean the camera lens.

● Do not use hot or warm water to remove iceor snow from the camera lens. Doing so coulddamage the camera.

Parking and manoeuvring with therear assist

Fig. 224 Display on the Easy Connect systemscreen: orientation lines.

Switching the system on and off

● The rear assist will switch on when the igni-tion is on or the engine running, on engagingreverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang-ing the selector lever to the R position (auto-matic gearbox).

● The system switches off 8 seconds afterdisengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox)or removing the selector lever from the R po-sition (automatic gearbox). The system willalso disconnect immediately after the igni-tion is switched off.

● The camera will stop transmitting imagesabove the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re-verse engaged.

In combination with the Parking System Plus››› page 225, the camera image will cease tobe transmitted immediately when reversegear is disengaged or when the selector leveris moved from the R position, and the opticalinformation provided by the Parking Aid sys-tem will be displayed.

Also in combination with the system, the rearassist image can also be concealed:

● By pressing one of the Infotainment systembuttons on the display.

● OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle thatappears on the left of the screen (whichswitches to the full-screen mode of the Park-ing System Plus's optical system).

If you wish to display the rear assist imageagain:

● Disengage reverse, or change the selectorlever's position, engage reverse again ormove the selector lever to position R.

● OR: Press the RVC function button1) »

1) WARNING: the RVC function button will only be ac-tivated and available when the reverse gear is en-gaged or the selector lever is set to position R.

233

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Meaning of the orientation lines

››› Fig. 224

Side lines: extension of the vehicle (theapproximate width of the vehicle plus therear view mirrors) on the road surface.

End of the side lines: the area marked ingreen ends approximately 2 m behindthe vehicle on the road surface.

Intermediate line: indicates a distance ofapproximately 1 m behind the vehicle onthe road surface.

Red horizontal line: indicates a safe dis-tance of approximately 40 cm at the rearof the vehicle on the road surface.

Parking manoeuvre

● Place the vehicle in front of the parkingspace and engage reverse gear (manualgearbox) or move the selector to the R posi-tion (automatic gearbox).

● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheelso that the side orientation lines lead to-wards the parking space.

● Guide the vehicle into the parking space sothat the side orientation lines run parallel toit.

1

2

3

4

Towing bracket device

Towing bracket device*

Introduction

The towing bracket device fitted to your vehi-cle, be it factory-fitted or a genuine SEAT ac-cessory, meets all the national technical andlegal requirements for towing.

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connectorfor the electrical connection between thetrailer and the vehicle. If the trailer is equip-ped with a 7-pin connector you can use thecorresponding available adaptor that is agenuine SEAT accessory.

The maximum authorised towing load is80 kg.

WARNING

● Before each journey, make sure that the de-tachable ball joint is properly fitted and se-cured in its housing.

● If the detachable ball joint is not properlyfitted and secured, do not use it.

● Do not use the towing bracket device fortowing if it is damaged or has missing parts.

● Do not modify or adapt the towing deviceconnection.

● Never unhook the detachable ball jointwhen the trailer is hitched.

CAUTION

Handle the detachable ball joint with care inorder to avoid damaging the bumper paint-work.

Note

Towing the vehicle with the detachable balljoint ››› page 90.

Description

Fig. 225 Towing bracket device support / de-tachable ball joint / key

234


Depending on the country or version, thetowing bracket device's detachable ball jointis located:

● underneath the floor panel of the luggagecompartment.

● or else on the surface of the floor panel ofthe luggage compartment in a bag securedto the fastening rings.

The ball joint is fitted and removed by hand.

The towing device bracket is supplied with akey.

Key to ››› Fig. 225

13-pin connector

Safety lug

Hook housing

Hook housing cap

Ball protective cover

Detachable ball

Locking lever

Lock cover

Release bolt

Lock

Locking balls

Key

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Note

Contact an Authorised Service Partner if youlose your key.

Placing in standby position

Fig. 226 Step 1

Fig. 227 Step 2

Before assembling it, place the detachableball in the standby position with the follow-ing two steps.

Step 1

● Turn the key in the direction of arrow 1 un-til the part of the key with the holes reachesthe top position ››› Fig. 226.

Step 2

● Grip the detachable ball below the protec-tive cover.

● Press the release bolt B in the direction ofarrow 2 , and at the same time press lever

C in the direction of arrow 3 as far as it willgo ››› Fig. 227.

The lever will remain blocked in this position.

235

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Standby position

Fig. 228 Standby position: Position of the lev-er and the release bolt

Standby position adjusted properly

● Key A ››› Fig. 228 is in the released posi-tion (the part of the key with the holes is fac-ing upwards).

● Lever B ››› Fig. 228 is in the bottom posi-tion.

● The release bolt C ››› Fig. 228 can bemoved.

Thus adjusted, the detachable ball is readyfor installation.

CAUTION

The key cannot be removed or turned in thestandby position.

Assembling the detachable ball - Step1

Fig. 229 Fitting the detachable ball / Releasebolt in the deployed position

Fitting the detachable ball

● Remove the hook housing cap 4

››› Fig. 225 downwards.

● Set the detachable ball to its standby posi-tion ››› page 235.

● Grip the detachable ball from below››› Fig. 229 and insert it into the hook hous-

ing following the direction of arrow 1 until itengages audibly ››› .

Lever A turns automatically in the directionof arrow 2 upwards, and the release bolt B

moves outwards (the red and green part willbe visible) ››› .

If lever A does not turn automatically or therelease bolt B does not come out, the de-tachable ball should be removed by turningthe lever as far as possible downwards fromthe housing cavity, and the detachable ball'ssupport surfaces and the cavity should thenbe cleaned.

WARNING

● When attaching the detachable ball, keepyour hands well away from the reach of thelever's rotation. There is a risk of injuringyour fingers!

● Never try to pull the lever upwards by forceto turn the key. The detachable ball would notbe secured properly!

236


Assembling the detachable ball - Step2

Fig. 230 Locking the lock

Fig. 231 Placing the cover over the lock.

Do not omit this first step ››› page 236, As-sembling the detachable ball - Step 1 !

● Turn key A in the direction of arrow 1 un-til the part of the key with the holes reachesthe bottom position ››› Fig. 230.

● Remove the key in the direction of arrow2 .

● Place cover B in the lock in the directionof arrow 3 ››› Fig. 231 ››› .

● Check that the detachable ball is secure››› page 237.

CAUTION

● After removing the key, always place thecover over the lever's lock. If the lock be-comes soiled it will be impossible to insertthe key.

● Keep the towing bracket device's housingcavity clean at all times. Dirtiness can pre-vent the detachable ball from being properlysecured!

● If the detachable ball is removed, alwaysplace the cap on the hook's housing.

Checking proper attachment

Fig. 232 Detachable ball properly attached

Whenever you go to use the detachable ball,make sure that it is properly attached first.

Detachable ball properly attached

● The detachable ball will not fall out of thehousing cavity after a major “knock or jerk”.

● Lever A ››› Fig. 232 is fully raised.

● The release bolt B ››› Fig. 232 is stickingfully out (the red and green part is visible).

● The key has been removed.

● Cover C ››› Fig. 232 is placed over the lock.

WARNING

The towing bracket device should only beused if the detachable ball has been properlylocked!

237

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Removing the detachable ball - Step 1

Fig. 233 Removing the lock cover

Fig. 234 Releasing the lock

● Remove cover A from the lock in the direc-tion of arrow 1 ››› Fig. 233.

● Insert key B into the lock in the directionof arrow 2 ››› Fig. 234.

● Turn the key in the direction of arrow 3 un-til the part of the key with the holes is facingupwards.

WARNING

Never remove the detachable ball joint whenthe trailer is hitched.

Note

Before you remove the detachable ball, youare advised to place the protective cover onthe ball coupling.

Removing the detachable ball - Step 2

Fig. 235 Releasing the detachable ball

Do not omit this first step ››› page 238, Re-moving the detachable ball - Step 1 !

Releasing the detachable ball

● Grip the detachable ball from below.

● Press the release bolt A in the direction ofarrow 1 as far as it will go, and at the same

time press lever B in the direction of arrow2 as far as it will go.

In this position, the detachable ball is looseand will fall/drop freely downwards. If thisdoes not occur when you release it, press itwith the other hand from above.

The detachable ball locks into the standbyposition at the same time and is thereforeready to be reinserted into the hook housing››› .

● Fit the cap 4 ››› Fig. 225 onto its housing.

WARNING

Never leave the detachable ball loose in theluggage compartment. It could cause damagein the luggage compartment in the case ofabrupt braking, and even jeopardise passen-ger safety!

CAUTION

● If you hold the lever and do not press downon it as far as you can, after you remove thedetachable ball, the latter will continue up-wards and will not lock into the standby posi-tion. The detachable ball should be placed inthis position before the next assembly.

● Keep the detachable ball in the standby po-sition, with the key inserted into the boxwhile you place it facing downwards with theside opposite to the one where the key is in-serted. The key could get damaged!

238


● When operating the lever, do not apply toomuch pressure (for example, do not stand onit)!

Note

Remove any dirt from the detachable ball be-fore you put it away with the vehicle tools.

Operation and care

Put the cover on the housing cavity so thatdirt cannot get in.

Before hooking up a trailer, always check theball coupling and apply suitable grease ifnecessary.

Use the protective cover when putting the de-tachable ball away to keep the luggage com-partment clean.

Remove any dirt from the housing cavity sur-faces and use a suitable cleaning product.

CAUTION

The top part of the hook housing is greased.Make sure that the grease has not been re-moved.

Trailer towing

What do you need to bear in mindwhen towing a trailer?

Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailerwhen fitted with the correct equipment.

If you wish to retrofit a towing bracket, con-sult ››› page 243.

Connectors

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connectorfor the electrical connection between thetrailer and the vehicle.

If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need touse an adapter cable. It is available at anyTechnical Service.

Trailer weight/drawbar load

Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. Ifyou do not load the trailer up to the maxi-mum permitted trailer weight, you can thenclimb correspondingly steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are onlyapplicable for altitudes up to 1000 m abovesea level. With increasing altitude the enginepower and therefore the vehicle climbingability are impaired because of the reducedair density. The maximum trailer weight hasto be reduced accordingly. The weight of thevehicle and trailer combination must be re-

duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (orpart thereof). The gross combination weightis the actual weight of the laden vehicle plusthe actual weight of the laden trailer. Whenpossible, operate the trailer with the maxi-mum permitted drawbar load on the ball jointof the towing bracket, but do not exceed thespecified limit.

The figures for trailer weights and drawbarloads that are given on the data plate of thetowing bracket are for certification purposesonly. The correct figures for your specificmodel, which may be lower than these fig-ures for the towing bracket, are given in thevehicle documentation or in ››› chapter Tech-nical Data.

Distributing the load

Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavyobjects are as near to the axle as possible.Loads carried in the trailer must be securedto prevent them moving.

Tyre pressure

Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissi-ble pressure shown on the sticker on the in-side of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pres-sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with thetrailer manufacturer's recommendations. »

239

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Exterior mirrors

Check whether you can see enough of theroad behind the trailer with the standard rearvision mirrors. If this is not the case, youshould have additional exterior mirrors fitted.Both exterior mirrors should be mounted onhinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrorsto give sufficient vision to the rear.

Tow rope

Always use a cable between the vehicle andthe trailer ››› page 240.

Trailer rear lights

The trailer's rear lights should comply withthe statutory safety regulations ››› page 240.

WARNING

Never transport people in a trailer. This couldresult in fatal accidents.

Note

● Towing a trailer places additional demandson the vehicle. We recommend additionalservices between the normal inspection inter-vals if the vehicle is used frequently for tow-ing a trailer.

● Find out whether special regulations applyto towing a trailer in your country.

Hitching and connecting the trailer

Fig. 236 Schematic diagram: assignment ofthe pins of the trailer's electrical socket.

Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 236:

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth, pins 1, 2, 4 to 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Cable without positive charge

11 Earth, pin 10

Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 236:

Pin Meaning

12 Unassigned

13 Earth, pin 9

Electrical socket for trailer

The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole powersocket for the electrical connection betweenthe trailer and the vehicle. If the system de-tects that a trailer has been connected elec-trically, the electrical equipment on the trailerwill receive voltage through this connection.

Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, forexample, the trailer's interior lighting. Pin 10is only powered when the engine is running.The charge wire (pin 10) charges, for exam-ple, a caravan battery.

Pin 9 and 10 should not be connected toeach other to avoid discharging or damagingthe vehicle's battery.

The earth wires, pin 3, pin 11 and pin 13,should never be connected to each other toavoid overloading the electrical system.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, youwill need to use an adapter cable. In this casethe function corresponding to pin 10 will notbe available.

240


Trailer maximum electricity consumption

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal, on each side 42 Watts

Side lights (total) 100 Watts

Rear lights (total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

Never exceed the values indicated!

Note

● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor-rectly connected, the vehicle electronics maybe damaged.

● If the trailer absorbs excessive electric cur-rent, the vehicle electronics may be dam-aged.

● Never connect the trailer's electric systemdirectly to the electrical connections of thetail lights or any other power sources. Onlyuse the connections intended for providingelectric current to the trailer.

Ball coupling of towing bracket de-vice*

The ball coupling is provided with instruc-tions on fitting and removing the ball cou-pling of the towing bracket.

WARNING

The towing bracket ball coupling must bestored securely in the luggage compartmentto prevent them being flung through the vehi-cle and causing injury.

Note

● By law, the ball coupling must be removedif a trailer is not being towed if it obscuresthe number plate.

Driving with a trailer

Fig. 237 Turn the 13-pin connector

Before driving

● Grip the 13-pin connector at area A andremove it in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 237.

● Remove the protective cover 5 ››› Fig. 225upwards.

After driving

● Grip the 13-pin connector at area A andinsert it in the opposite direction to the arrow››› Fig. 237.

● Fit the protective cover 5 ››› Fig. 225 onthe ball coupling. »

241

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Safety lug

The safety lug B ››› Fig. 237 is used to hookup the trailer's retainer cable.

On hooking it up to the safety lug, the retain-er cable should have slack in all the trailerpositions with respect to the vehicle (sharpbends, reverse gear, etc.).

Headlights

The front part of the vehicle may be raisedwhen the trailer is connected and the lightmay dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using theheadlight range rotary adjuster1).

WARNING

● Never use the safety lug to tow!

● Adjust your speed to suit the road and traf-fic conditions.

● All work on the electrical system must becarried out only by specialised workshops.

● Never connect the trailer's electric systemto the electrical connections of the rear lightsor any other power sources.

● After hooking up the trailer and connectingthe socket, check that all the trailer's rearlights are working properly.

Note

● If there is any fault in the trailer's lighting,check the fuses in the instrument panel fusebox ››› page 54.

● The contact between the retainer cable andthe safety lug may give rise to mechanicalwear in the lug's surface protection. Thiswear will not prevent the safety lug from op-erating properly or cause any fault and is ex-cluded from the warranty.

● When connecting and disconnecting thetrailer, the towing vehicle's handbrakeshould be applied.

Anti-theft alarm system

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-gered when the electrical connection be-tween vehicle and trailer is interrupted.

Always turn off the anti-theft alarm systembefore connecting or disconnecting a trailer››› page 124.

Conditions for the integration of a trailer inthe anti-theft alarm system.

● The vehicle is factory-equipped with an an-ti-theft alarm system and a towing bracketdevice.

● The trailer is connected electrically to thetowing vehicle by the trailer connector.

● The electrical system of the vehicle and thetrailer are prepared for operation.

● The vehicle is locked with the ignition keyand the anti-theft alarm system is activated.

CAUTION

For technical reasons, trailers fitted with rearLED lights are not integrated in the anti-theftalarm system.

Driving tips

Driving with a trailer always requires extracare.

Weight distribution

The weight distribution of a loaded trailerwith an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable.However, if this cannot be avoided, drive ex-tra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weightdistribution.

Speed

The stability of the vehicle and trailer is re-duced with increasing speed. For this reason,it is advisable not to drive at the maximum

1) This does not apply for vehicles with bi-xenonheadlights.

242


permissible speed in an unfavourable road,weather or wind conditions. This applies es-pecially when driving downhill.

You should always reduce speed immediatelyif the trailer shows the slightest sign of snak-ing. Never try to stop the “snaking” by in-creasing speed.

Always brake in due course. If the trailer hasan overrun brake, apply the brakes gently atfirst and then, firmly. This will prevent thejerking that can be caused by locking of trail-er wheels. Select a low gear in due coursebefore going down a steep downhill. This en-ables you to use the engine braking to slowdown the vehicle.

Reheating

At very high temperatures and during pro-longed slopes, driving in a low gear and highengine speed, always monitor the coolanttemperature gauge ››› page 109.

Electronic stability control*

The ESC* system helps to stabilise the trailerin case of skidding or rocking.

Retrofitting a towing bracket*

Fig. 238 Attachment points for towing brack-et.

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve-hicle is purchased, this must be completedaccording to the instructions of the towingbracket manufacturer.

The attachment points for the towing bracketA are on the lower part of the vehicle.

The distance between the centre of the ballcoupling and the ground should never belower than the indicated value, even with afully loaded vehicle and including the maxi-mum drawbar load.

Elevation values for securing the towingbracket:

B 65 mm (minimum)

C 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)

D 1040 mm

E 317 mm

FLEON/LEON SC LEON ST

319 mm 596 mm

Fitting a towing bracket

● Driving with a trailer involves an extra effortfor the vehicle. Therefore, before fitting atowing bracket, please contact a TechnicalService to check whether your cooling systemneeds modification.

● The legal requirements in your countrymust be observed (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-rate control lamp).

● Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rearbumper, must be removed and reinstalled.The towing bracket securing bolts must be »

243

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

tightened using a torque wrench, and a pow-er socket must be connected to the vehicleelectrical system. This requires specialisedknowledge and tools.

● Figures in the illustration show the eleva-tion value and the attachment points whichmust be considered if you are retrofitting atowing bracket.

WARNING

The towing brackets should be fitted at a spe-cialised workshop.

● If the towing bracket is incorrectly instal-led, there is a serious danger of accident.

● For your own safety, please observe the towbracket manufacturer's instructions.

CAUTION

● If the power socket is incorrectly installed,this could cause damage to the vehicle elec-trical system.

Note

● SEAT recommends that the towing hooksbe fitted at a specialised workshop. Consultyour SEAT dealer in case additional modifica-tions to your vehicle are necessary.

● Due to the specific design of the exhaust,the fitting of a conventional towing hook isnot recommended for some sportier versions.Please consult your Technical Service.

244

Care and maintenance

Advice


Accessories and modificationsto the vehicle

Accessories, replacement parts andrepair work

Always ask your dealer or specialist retailerfor advice before purchasing accessories andreplacement parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a highstandard of active and passive safety. For thisreason, we recommend that you ask a SEATOfficial Service for advice before fitting ac-cessories or replacement parts. Your SEAT Of-ficial Service has the latest information fromthe manufacturer and can recommend acces-sories and replacement parts which are suita-ble for your requirements. They can also an-swer any questions you might have regardingofficial regulations.

We recommend you to use only SEAT acces-sories and Genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT hastested these parts and accessories for suita-bility, reliability and safety. SEAT OfficialServices have the necessary experience andfacilities to ensure that the parts are installedcorrectly and professionally.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a directeffect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driv-en, such as a cruise control system or elec-tronically-controlled suspension, must beapproved for use in your vehicle and bear thee mark (the European Union's authorisationsymbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fittedwhich do not serve to control the vehicle it-self (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop orventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the sign (manufacturer conformity declaration inthe European Union).

WARNING

Accessories, for example telephone holdersor cup holders, should never be fitted on thecovers, or within the working range of the air-bags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury ifthe airbag is triggered in an accident.

Modifications

Modifications must always be carried out ac-cording to our specifications.

Unauthorised modifications to the electroniccomponents, software, wiring or data transferin the vehicle may cause malfunctioning. Dueto the way the electronic components arelinked together in networks, other indirectsystems may be affected by the faults. Thiscan seriously impair safety, lead to excessive

wear of components, and also invalidate yourvehicle registration documents.

You will appreciate that your SEAT dealershipcannot be held liable for any damage causedby modifications and/or work performed in-correctly.

We therefore recommend that all work shouldbe performed by a SEAT Official Service usinggenuine SEAT parts®.

WARNING

Incorrectly performed modifications or otherwork on your vehicle can lead to malfunctionsand cause accidents.

Radio transmitters and office equip-ment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)

Any retrofit installations of radio transmittersin the vehicle require prior approval. SEATgenerally authorises in-vehicle installationsof approved types of radio transmitters provi-ded that:

● The aerial is installed correctly.

● The aerial is installed on the exterior of thevehicle (and shielded cables are used togeth-er with non-reflective aerial trimming).

● The effective transmitting power does notexceed 10 Watts at the aerial base. »

245

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-shop will be able to inform you about optionsfor installing and operating radio transmitterswith a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmitters

Commercial mobile telephones or radioequipment might interfere with the electron-ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.This may be due to:

● No external aerial.

● External aerial incorrectly installed.

● Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portablemobile telephones or radio equipment insidethe vehicle without a properly installed exter-nal aerial ››› .

Please note also that the maximum range ofthe equipment can only be achieved with anexternal aerial.

Business equipment

Retrofit installation of business or privateequipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-ded the equipment cannot interfere with thedriver's immediate control of the vehicle andthat any such equipment carries the mark.Any retrofit equipment that could influencethe driver's control of the vehicle must have atype approval for your vehicle and must carrythe e mark.

WARNING

Mobile telephones or radio equipment whichis operated inside the vehicle without a prop-erly installed external aerial can create exces-sive magnetic fields that could cause a healthhazard.

Note

● The posterior fitting of electric and elec-tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its li-cence and could lead to the withdrawal of thevehicle registration document under certaincircumstances.

● Please use the mobile telephone/radio op-erating instructions.

Care and cleaning

General information

Regular and careful care helps to maintainthe value of the vehicle. This may also be oneof the requirements for upholding any war-ranty claims in the event of corrosion or paintdefects.

SEAT Official Services and specialist retailerscarry stocks of suitable car care materials.Please follow the instructions for use on thepackaging.

WARNING

● Cleaning products and other materials usedfor car care can be damaging to your health ifmisused.

● Always keep care products in a safe place,out of the reach of children. Failure to complycould result in poisoning.


● If possible, use environmentally friendlyproducts.

● The remains of car care products should notbe disposed of with ordinary householdwaste.

Vehicle exterior care

Washing the vehicle

The longer substances such as insects, birddroppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, in-dustrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt andother aggressive materials remain on the ve-hicle, the more damage they do to the paint-work. High temperatures (for instance due tostrong sunlight) further intensify the corro-sive effect.

After the period when salt is put on the roadsit is important to have the underside of thevehicle washed thoroughly.

246


Automatic car washes

Before going through a car wash, be sure totake the usual precautions such as closingthe windows and roof. If the vehicle has spe-cial accessories such as spoilers or a roofrack or two-way radio aerial, etc., it is advisa-ble to consult the car wash tunnel operator.

It is best to use a car wash without revolvingbristles if possible.

Washing the vehicle with a high pressurecleaner

When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-structions for the equipment. This appliesparticularly to the operating pressure and thespraying distance. Do not hold the nozzle tooclose to soft materials such as rubber hosesor seals. The same applies to the parking aidsensors*, which are located in the rear bump-er.

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water outin a direct stream or one that has a rotatingjet for forcing off dirt.

Stickers attached by the factory

Follow these directions to avoid damagingthe stickers:

● Do not use high pressure cleaners.

● To remove ice or snow from the stickers donot use window scrapers or ice scrapers.

● Do not polish the stickers.

● Do not use dirty cloths or sponges.

● Preferably wash using a soft sponge andsoft neutral soap.

Washing the car by hand

When washing the car by hand, use plenty ofwater to soften the dirt first, and rinse off aswell as possible.

Then clean the vehicle with a soft sponge,glove or brush using only slight pressure.You should start on the roof and work down.Special car soap should only be used for verypersistent dirt.

Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and of-ten.

Wheels, sills and similar should be cleanedlast. Use a second sponge for this.

WARNING

● The vehicle should only be washed with theignition switched off. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.

● Do not clean the underside of chassis, theinside of wheel arches or wheel trims withoutprotecting your hands and arms. You may cutyourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Other-wise, there is a risk of sustaining cuts.

● When washing the car during the winterseason: water and ice in the brake systemcan reduce braking effectiveness: risk of acci-dent!

CAUTION

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight –otherwise the paint can be damaged.

● Do not use sponges, abrasive householdsponges or similar to clean insect remains.This could damage the surface.

● Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) fromthe headlights at regular intervals, for in-stance when filling the fuel tank. The head-lights should only be washed with water, donot wipe them with a dry cloth or sponge. Itis best to use soapy water.

● Never wash tyres with a jet that sprays thewater out in a direct stream. This could dam-age the tyres even if the spray is kept at adistance and only used for a very short time.

● Before washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash, please make sure to retract the ex-terior mirrors to prevent them from beingdamaged. Electrically retractable exteriormirrors must not be folded in or out by hand,always use the electrical power control.

CAUTION

● Before washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash, please proceed as follows to lockthe wiper arms so that they are not moved to-wards the top of the windscreen:

– the bonnet must be closed.

– switch the ignition on and off.

– press the windscreen wiper lever forwardbriefly (windscreen washer function).This will lock the wiper arms. »

247

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice


The car should only be washed in specialwash bays. These areas are prepared to pre-vent oily water from getting into the publicdrains. In some places, washing vehicles out-side the areas intended for this purpose isprohibited.

Camera sensors and lenses

● Use a small brush to remove snow and ade-icer spray to remove ice.

● Clean the sensors with a solvent-free prod-uct and a soft, dry cloth.

● Moisten the camera lens using a standardalcohol-based glass cleaning agent andclean the lens with a dry cloth. In the activelane assist*, the area in front of the lens isnormally cleaned with the windscreen wash-er.

CAUTION

● When you clean the vehicle with a pressurewasher:

– Stay a suitable distance from the sensorson the front and rear bumpers.

– Do not clean the camera lenses or sur-rounding area with the pressure washer.

● Never use warm or hot water to removesnow and ice from the reverse camera lens,as it could crack the lens.

● Never use abrasive cleaning agents on thelens.

Waxing and polishing

Care

Waxing protects the paintwork. It is time toapply a coat of good wax when water no lon-ger forms droplets and rolls off the cleanpaintwork.

Even if a wax solution is used regularly in thevehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to pro-tect the paint with a hard wax coating at leasttwice a year.

In the summer, you will find it is much easierto remove dead insects (which accumulateon the bumper and the front of the bonnet) ifthe car has been treated with care productsrecently.

Polishing

Polishing is only necessary if the paint haslost its shine, and the gloss cannot bebrought back by putting on wax.

If the polish does not contain wax, a waxproduct should be applied after polishing.

CAUTION

● Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain-ted parts with a matt finish or on plasticparts.

● Do not apply paint polishes to the side trimthat runs around the panoramic roof and endson the windscreen. However, it can be treatedwith hard wax.

Trims

In respect for the environment, the silver-plated trims on the body are made of purealuminium (they do not contain chrome).

Dirt or marks on the trim mouldings shouldbe removed with a cleaning product with aneutral PH (do not use a chrome cleaner).Body polish is also unsuitable for use on trimmouldings. The intensive cleaning fluids of-ten used before the car goes into a car washmay contain alkaline substances, which cancause dull or milky patches when they dryout.

SEAT Official Services carry stocks of cleaningproducts which have been tested for use onyour vehicle and are not harmful to the envi-ronment.

248


Plastic parts

Plastic parts are cleaned with a power wash-er. If this is not sufficient, plastic partsshould only be treated with a special solvent-free plastic cleaning agent. Do not use paint-work cleaners, polishes or wax on plasticparts.

Carbon parts

The carbon parts on your vehicle have a pain-ted surface. They do not need any specialcare and are cleaned just like any other pain-ted part ››› page 246.

Paint damage

Minor damage to the paint, such as scratchesor stone chips, should be touched up withoutdelay before the metal starts to corrode. Suit-able touch-up brushes or sprays for your carcan be obtained from a SEAT Official Service.

The number of the original paint finish on thevehicle is given on the data sticker››› page 281.

If corrosion is already visible it must be thor-oughly removed by a specialised workshop.

Windows

Clear vision is an essential safety factor.

The windscreen must not be cleaned with in-sect remover or wax, otherwise the wind-screen wipers will not function properly (jud-dering).

Traces of rubber, oil, grease or silicone canbe removed with a window cleaning solutionor a silicone remover. Wax residue can onlybe removed with a special cleaner. Your SEATOfficial Service will be able to provide youwith more detailed information.

The windows should also be cleaned on theinside at regular intervals.

Use a separate cloth or chamois to dry thewindows. Cloths used for waxing and polish-ing contain residues that will cause smearson the glass.

WARNING

Do not use water-repellent coatings on thewindscreen. In bad visibility conditions (e.g.in the rain, dark or with a low sun), thesecoatings may cause dazzle: risk of accident!Such coatings can also cause the windscreenwiper blades to make noise.

CAUTION

● Remove snow and ice from windows and ex-terior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To

avoid scratches caused by dirt on the glass,the scraper should only be pushed in one di-rection and not moved to and fro.

● The heating element for the rear window islocated on the inner side of the window. Toavoid damaging them, do not apply stickersto these heating elements.

● Never use warm or hot water to removesnow and ice from windows and mirrors. Thiscould cause the glass to crack!

Wheels

The wheels require regular attention to pre-serve their appearance. It is important to re-move road salt and brake dust by washingthe wheels at regular intervals, otherwise thefinish will be impaired.

After washing, the wheels should only becleaned with an "acid-free" cleaning agentfor alloy wheels. This is available from SEATOfficial Services and specialist retailers. Nev-er leave the cleaning agent on the rims forany longer than specified in the instructionsbefore rinsing it off. If the wheel cleaner fluidcontains acid it can attack the surfaces of thewheel bolts.

Car polish or other abrasive agents shouldnot be used for maintaining the rims. If theprotective coating is damaged, e.g. by flyingstones, the damaged area should be re-paired immediately. »

249

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

WARNING

Please note when cleaning the wheels thatwater, ice and road salt can impair the effec-tiveness of the brakes; this can cause an acci-dent.

Exhaust tail pipe

It is important to remove road salt and brakedust by washing the wheels at regular inter-vals, otherwise the exhaust tail pipe materialcould be damaged. To remove impurities, donot use rim, paint or chrome cleaners or oth-er abrasive products. Clean the exhaust tailpipes with cleaning products that are suita-ble for stainless steel.

SEAT Official Services carry stocks of cleaningproducts that have been tested and ap-proved for use on your vehicle.

Caring for the vehicle interior

Radio display/Easy Connect* and con-trol panel*

The display can be cleaned with a soft clothand a professionally available “LCD cleaner”.Moisten the cloth with a small amount of thecleaning fluid.

The Easy Connect control panel* should firstbe cleaned with a brush so that no dirt goesinto the device or between the keys andhousing. Next, we recommend cleaning theEasy Connect control panel* using a clothdampened with water and washing-up liquid.

CAUTION

● To avoid scratching the screen, do not wipethe display with a dry cloth.

● To avoid damage, ensure that no liquidgoes into the Easy Connect control panel*.

Plastic and leatherette parts

Plastic parts and leatherette can be cleanedwith a damp cloth. If this is not sufficient,plastic parts and leatherette should only betreated with a special solvent-free plasticcleaner.

Textile covers and trim parts

Textile covers and trim parts (e.g. seats, doortrim) should be cleaned regularly with a vac-uum cleaner. This will remove surface dirtwhich could otherwise be rubbed into thetextile material during use. Do not use steamcleaners, as the steam could carry the dirtdeeper into the textile material.

Normal cleaning

We recommend that you use a soft sponge ora commercially available lint-free, micro-fibrecloth for normal cleaning. Only use brusheson floor coverings and mats, as other textilesurfaces could become damaged.

In the case of normal surface dirt you can usea foam cleaner. Use a sponge to spread thefoam on the textile surface and to work it intothe material lightly. However, make sure thatthe textile material does not become soakingwet. Then dab off the foam with a dry and ab-sorbent cloth (e.g. a micro-fibre cloth) andvacuum off any residue once the surface iscompletely dry.

Cleaning stains

Treat drink stains (such as coffee or fruitjuice, etc.) with a cleaning solution for deli-cate fabrics. This solution should be appliedwith a sponge. If the stains are difficult to re-move, a washing paste can be applied direct-ly onto the stain and worked into the fabric.The surface will then have to be wiped withclear water to remove any residue left by thepaste. To do so, use a damp cloth or spongeand then dab the stain with an absorbentcloth.

Remove chocolate or make-up stains with acleaning paste (for e.g., soft soap). Then re-move the soap with water (wet sponge).

250


A spirit-based cleaner can be used to removegrease, oil, lipstick or ball point pen. Thendab the dissolved grease or colour particlesoff with an absorbent cloth or similar. Youmay also have to treat the stain once moreusing washing paste and water.

If the covers or textile trim panels are badlysoiled we recommend that you have themcleaned by a professional cleaning companywith a shampoo and spray.

Note

Open Velcro fasteners on clothes can damagethe seat upholstery. Make sure they areclosed.

Natural leather

General information

Our range of leathers is large. The main typeused is particularly nappa in various forms,that is, leather with a smooth surface in dif-ferent colours.

The amount of dye used determines the ap-pearance and properties of leather. If theleather is left in a more natural state, it re-tains its typical natural napped appearanceand confers excellent all-weather propertiesto the seats. Fine veins, healed scars, insectbites, wrinkles and a subtle variation in shad-

ing remain visible; these are the characteris-tic features of genuine natural leather.

Natural napped leather does not have a pro-tective surface coating of dye. It is thereforesomewhat more prone to damage. Thisshould be borne in mind if children or petsoften travel in the car, or if there are otherfactors that could lead to damage.

Types of leather with a coloured surface coat-ing are likely to be more resistant to damage.This has a great advantage for day-to-dayuse. However, this means that the typicalnatural characteristics of the surface are lessapparent, though this does not affect quality.

Cleaning and care

Due to the natural properties of the speciallyselected hides employed, the finished leath-er has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt,etc. so a degree of care is required in every-day use and when looking after the leather.Dark clothing (especially if damp or incorrect-ly dyed) may stain leather upholstery on theseats. Dust and grit in the pores and seamscan scratch and damage the surface. There-fore leather should be cleaned at regular in-tervals, depending on the actual amount ofuse. When they have been in use for a certaintime, your car seats will acquire a typical andunmistakable patina. This is characteristic forleather as a natural product and is a sign ofgenuine quality.

To maintain the value of natural leather youshould note the following points:

CAUTION

● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlightfor long periods, otherwise it may tend tolose some of its colour. If the car is left for aprolonged period in the bright sun, it is bestto cover the leather.

● Sharp-edged objects on clothing, such asbelts, zip fasteners, rivets or similar, can alsoleave permanent scratches and rough markson the surface of the leather.

Note

● Use a suitable impregnating cream with ul-tra-violet protection at regular intervals andafter cleaning. The cream nourishes andmoisturises the leather, keeps it supple andable to breathe. A protective film will alsoform.

● Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months andremove fresh dirt as soon as possible.

● Remove stains from fresh ball-pen and oth-er inks, lipstick, shoe cream and similarstains as soon as possible.

● Preserve the colour of the leather. A specialcoloured cream will renew the colour of theleather when required and will eliminate dif-ferences in colour.

251

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Cleaning and care of leather uphols-tery

Natural leather requires an extra degree of at-tention and care.

Normal cleaning

– Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with wa-ter and wipe over the leather surfaces.

More stubborn dirt

– More stubborn dirt can be removed using amild soap solution (pure liquid soap: twotablespoons dissolved in one litre of wa-ter).

– Do not let the water soak through the leath-er or penetrate into the seams.

– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.

Removal of stains

– Remove fresh water-based stains such ascoffee, tea, juices, blood etc. with an ab-sorbent cloth or kitchen roll, or use thecleaning agent from the care set for dried-on stains.

– Remove fresh grease-based stains thathave not penetrated the surface such asbutter, mayonnaise, chocolate, etc. with anabsorbent cloth or kitchen roll or with thecleaning agent from the care set.

– Treat fat-based, dried-in stains with grease-dissolving spray.

– Treat less common stains on leather, suchas ball-pen and other inks, felt-tip pens,nail polish, dispersion paint, shoe creametc. with a special leather stain remover.

Leather maintenance

– The leather should be treated regularly(about twice a year) with a special leather-care product.

– Apply these products very sparingly.

– Then wipe off with a soft cloth.

Should you have questions regarding thecare and cleaning of the leather upholstery inyour vehicle, we recommend that you contactyour SEAT Official Service. Our representa-tives will be happy to advise you and tell youabout the product range for leather conserva-tion, for example:

● Cleaning and care set.

● Coloured leather-care cream.

● Stain remover for ball-pen inks, shoe creametc.

● Grease dissolving spray.

● New products and further developments

CAUTION

On no account use solvents (such as petrol,turpentine), wax polish, shoe cream or simi-lar materials.

Cleaning Alcantara upholstery

Removing dust and dirt

– Moisten a cloth just a little and wipe downthe seat covers.

Removing stains

– Moisten a cloth with lukewarm water or di-luted white spirits.

– Dab at the stain. Start at the outside andwork inwards.

– Dry the clean area with a soft cloth.

Do not use leather cleaning products on Al-cantara seat covers.

You may use a suitable soap on dust and dirt.

Dust and grit in the pores and seams canscratch and damage the surface. If the car isleft standing in the sun for long periods, Al-cantara leather should be protected againstdirect sunlight to prevent it from fading. How-ever, slight colour variations will arise in nor-mal use.

252

Intelligent technology

CAUTION

● Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoecream, stain removers, leather cleaning prod-ucts or any similar products on Alcantara.

● To avoid damage, stubborn stains shouldbe removed by a specialised workshop.

● On no account use brushes, hard spongesor similar utensils.

Seat belts

– Keep the seat belts clean.

– For cleaning, use a mild solution of soapand water.

– Check the condition of the seat belts at reg-ular intervals.

The retract function may not operate properlyin very dirty belts. Make sure that the inertiareel seat belts are completely dry before al-lowing them to retract.

CAUTION

● Do not remove the seat belts from the vehi-cle to clean them.

● Do not use chemical cleaning agents on theseat belts, as this can damage the webbing.Ensure that the seat belts do not come intocontact with corrosive fluids.

● If you find any damage to the belt webbing,belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,

the belt in question must be replaced by aspecialised workshop.


Electromechanical steering

Electro-mechanical power steering assiststhe driver when steering.

Electro-mechanical power steering adaptselectronically to the speed of the car, torqueand turning angle.

If the power steering should fail at any timeor the engine is switched off (for instancewhen being towed), the car can still besteered. However, more effort than normalwill be required to turn the steering wheel.

Driver warning lamps and messages

(in red) Faulty steering! Topark the vehicle

If the warning lamp remains on and the driverindication appears, the power steering couldbe faulty.

Do not continue driving. Seek specialist as-sistance.

(in yellow) Steering: Systemfault! You may continue driving.

If the warning lamp comes on, the steeringcould react with more difficultly or more sen-sitivity than normal. In addition, when drivingin a straight line the steering wheel may beoff-centre. »

253

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Drive slowly to a specialised workshop andhave the fault repaired.

(in yellow) Steering lock:fault! Go to an Official Service

The electronic steering lock is malfunction-ing.

Go to a specialised workshop as soon aspossible and have the fault repaired.

WARNING

Take it immediately to a specialised work-shop and have the fault repaired: risk of acci-dent!

Note

If the lamp (in red) or else (in yellow)lights up briefly, you may continue driving.

Progressive steering

Depending on the vehicle equipment, theprogressive steering can adapt steering hard-ness to the current driving situation. Thepower steering only works when the engineis running.

In city traffic you do not need to turn so muchon parking, manoeuvring or in very tightturns.

On the road or on the motorway, progressivesteering transmits, for example, in bends, a

sportier, more direct and noticeably more dy-namic driving sensation.

Four-wheel drive3 Valid for vehicles: with four-wheel drive


On four-wheel drive models, the engine pow-er is distributed to all four wheels

General notes

On four-wheel drive vehicles, the enginepower is distributed to all four wheels. Thedistribution of power is controlled automati-cally according to your driving style and theroad conditions. Also see ››› page 176, Brak-ing and stability systems.

The four-wheel drive is specially designed tocomplement the superior engine power. Thiscombination gives the vehicle exceptionalhandling and performance capabilities, bothon normal roads and in more difficult condi-tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per-haps especially for this reason), it is impor-tant to observe certain safety points ››› .

Winter tyres

Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle willhave plenty of traction in winter conditions,even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,we still recommend that winter tyres or all-

season tyres be fitted on all four wheels togive even better braking response.

Snow chains

On roads where snow chains are mandatory,this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive››› page 60.

Changing tyres

On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all fourtyres must have the same rolling circumfer-ence. Also avoid using tyres with varyingtread depths ››› page 273.

Off-roader?

Your SEAT is not an off-road vehicle: it doesnot have enough ground clearance to beused as such. It is therefore best to avoidrough tracks and uneven terrain as much aspossible.

WARNING

● Even with four-wheel drive, you should al-ways adjust your speed to suit the condi-tions. Do not let the extra safety featurestempt you into taking any risks when driving.Risk of accident!

● The braking capability of your vehicle islimited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore nodifferent from a car without four-wheel drive.So do not be tempted to drive too fast on firmor slippery roads just because the vehicle

254


still has good acceleration in theseconditions. Risk of accident!

● On wet roads bear in mind that the frontwheels may start to “aquaplane” and losecontact with the road if the car is driven toofast. If this should happen, there will be nosudden increase in engine speed to warn thedriver, as occurs with a front-wheel drive car.For this reason you should always choose adriving speed suitable for the road condi-tions. Risk of accident!

Power Management

This system helps to ensure reliablestarting

The power management controls the distribu-tion of electrical energy and thus helps to en-sure that there is always enough power avail-able to start the engine.

If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-tem is left parked for a long time, the batterywill gradually lose its charge because certainelectrical devices, such as the electronicgearbox lock continues to draw current evenwhen the ignition is off. In some cases theremay not be enough power available to startthe engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligentpower management system to control the

distribution of electrical energy. This signifi-cantly improves reliability when starting theengine, and also prolongs the useful life ofthe battery.

The main functions incorporated in the powermanagement system are battery diagnosis,residual current management and dynamicpower management.

Battery diagnosis

The battery diagnosis function constantlyregisters the condition of the battery. Sen-sors detect the battery voltage, battery cur-rent and battery temperature. This enablesthe system to calculate the current power lev-el and charge condition of the battery.

Residual current management

The residual current management reducespower consumption while the vehicle isparked. It controls the supply of power to thevarious electrical devices while the ignition isswitched off. The system takes the battery di-agnosis data into consideration.

Depending on the power level of the battery,switch off the individual electrical devicesone after the other to prevent the batteryfrom losing too much charge and to ensurethat the engine can be started reliably.

Dynamic power management

While the vehicle is moving, this function dis-tributes the available power to the variouselectrical devices and systems according totheir requirements. The power managementensures that on-board systems do not con-sume more electrical power than the alterna-tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi-mum possible battery power level.

Note

● Neither is the power management systemable to overcome the given physical limits.Please remember that the power and usefullife of the battery are limited.

● When there is a risk that the vehicle willnot start, the alternator power failure or lowbattery charge level warning lamp will beshown ››› page 109.

Flat battery

Starting ability has first priority.

Short trips, city traffic and low temperaturesall place a heavy load on the battery. In theseconditions a large amount of power is con-sumed, but only a small amount is supplied.The situation is also critical if electrical devi-ces are in use when the engine is not run-ning. In this case power is consumed whennone is being generated. »

255

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

In these situations you will be aware that thepower management system is intervening tocontrol the distribution of electrical power.

When the vehicle is parked for long periods

If you do not drive your vehicle for a period ofseveral days or weeks, the power manage-ment will gradually shut off the electrical de-vices one by one or reduce the amount of cur-rent they are using. This limits the amount ofpower consumed and helps to ensure relia-ble starting even after a long period. Someconvenience functions, such as remote vehi-cle opening, may not be available under cer-tain circumstances. These functions will berestored when you switch on the ignition andstart the engine.

With the engine switched off

For example, if you listen to the sound sys-tem with the engine switched off the batterywill run down.

If the energy consumption means there is arisk that the engine will not start, a text willappear in vehicles with a driver informationsystem*.

This driver indicator tells you that you muststart the engine so that the battery can re-charge.

When the engine is running

Although the alternator generates electricalpower, the battery can still become dis-charged while the vehicle is being driven.This can occur when a lot of power is beingconsumed but only a small amount supplied,especially if the battery is not fully chargedinitially.

To restore the necessary energy balance, thesystem will then temporarily shut off the elec-trical devices that are using a lot of power, orreduce the current they are consuming. Heat-ing systems in particular use a large amountof electrical power. If you notice, for instance,that the seat heating* or the rear windowheater is not working, they may have beentemporarily switched off or regulated to alower heat output. These systems will beavailable again as soon as sufficient electri-cal power is available.

You may also notice that the engine runs at aslightly faster idling speed when necessary.This is quite normal, and no cause for con-cern. The increased idling speed allows thealternator to meet the greater power require-ment and charge the battery at the sametime.

Checking and refilling levels

Filling the tank

Filling up


If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor-rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as thefuel tank is “full”. Do not try to put in morefuel after the nozzle cuts out, as this will fillthe expansion chamber in the fuel tank.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tankflap. Further notes on fuel can be found at››› page 258.

The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-en in ››› page 50.

Vehicles with natural gas engines and hy-brids

Every 6 months it is necessary to run on pet-rol until the control lamp switches off andthen the tank must be refilled. This is neces-sary to ensure that the system works proper-ly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv-ing with petrol.

256


WARNING

Fuel is highly flammable and can cause seri-ous burns and other injuries.

● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or acanister. Naked flames are forbidden in thevicinity due to the risk of explosion.

● Observe legislation governing the use,storage and carrying of a spare fuel canisterin the vehicle.

● For safety reasons we do not recommendcarrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle.In an accident the canister could be damagedand could leak.

● If, in exceptional circumstances, you haveto carry a spare fuel canister, please observethe following points:

– Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canisterif it is inside or on top of the vehicle. Anelectrostatic charge could build up duringfilling, causing the fuel vapour to ignite.Danger of explosion. Always place thecanister on the ground to fill it.

– Insert the filling nozzle as far as possibleinto the spare fuel canister.

– If the spare fuel canister is made of met-al, the filling nozzle must be in contactwith the canister during filling. Thishelps prevent an electrostatic chargebuilding up.

– Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in theluggage compartment. Fuel vapour is ex-plosive. Risk of fatal accident!

CAUTION

● If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, itshould be removed immediately. It could oth-erwise damage the paintwork.

● Never run the tank completely dry. An irreg-ular fuel supply could cause misfiring. As aresult, unburnt fuel could enter the exhaustsystem and damage the catalytic converter.

● When filling the fuel tank after having run itcompletely dry on a vehicle with a diesel en-gine, the ignition must be switched on for atleast 30 seconds before starting the engine.When you then start the engine it may takelonger than normal (up to one minute) tostart firing. This is because air needs to bebled from the fuel system while starting.


Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause thefuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Note

There is no emergency mechanism for themanual release of the fuel tank flap. If neces-sary, request assistance from specialised per-sonnel.

Note

Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective de-vice that prevents the insertion of the wrongfuel hose1). It is only possible to refuel withDiesel nozzles.

● If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or ifit is very small, it is possible that it will notbe able to open the protective device. Beforetrying to insert the pump nozzle by turning it,try a different pump or request specialisthelp.

● If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel canis-ter, the protective device will not open. Oneway to resolve this is to pour the fuel in veryslowly.

Refuelling with natural gas

Fig. 239 Tank flap open: gas filler mouth 1 ,filler mouth retainer 2 »

1) Depending on country257

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Before refuelling, the engine and the igni-tion, mobile telephone and heating must beswitched off separately ››› .

Read the instructions on how to use the natu-ral gas pump carefully.

The vehicle is not prepared for refuelling withliquefied natural gas (LNG) ››› . Before refu-elling with natural gas, make sure you addthe appropriate type of fuel ››› page 258.

Opening the fuel tank cap

The natural gas filler mouth is behind the fueltank cap, next to the petrol filler mouth.

● Unlock the vehicle with the key or with thecentral locking button situated on the driv-er door ››› page 116.

● Press on the rear area of the flap and openit.

Refuelling

Special feature: if the ambient temperature isvery high, the natural gas pump protectionagainst overheating disconnects this auto-matically.

● Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth››› Fig. 239 1 .

● Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gasfiller mouth.

● The fuel tank will be full when the pumpcompressor automatically cuts the supply.

● If you wish to finish refuelling in advance,press the button on the pump to stop theflow.

Closing the fuel tank cap

● Check that the gas filler mouth retainer 2

is not trapped with the filler nozzle. If neces-sary, place it in the filler mouth again.

● Insert the plug in the filler mouth.

● Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear itclick into place.

WARNING

Natural gas is a highly explosive, easily flam-mable substance. Incorrect handling of thenatural gas can cause accidents seriousburns and other injuries.

● Before refuelling with natural gas, engagethe filling mouth correctly. If you can smellgas, stop refuelling immediately.

WARNING

The vehicle is not prepared to use liquefiednatural gas (LNG), and this fuel must not beadded under any circumstances. Liquefiednatural gas can cause the natural gas tank toexplode, resulting in serious injury.

Note

● The filling nozzles of natural gas pumpscan differ in the way they are operated. If you

do not know, ask a qualified employee at thepetrol station to do the refuelling.

● Noises heard when refuelling are normaland do not indicate the presence of a fault inthe system.

● The vehicle natural gas system is preparedboth for refuelling with a small compressor(slow refuel) and a large compressor (fast re-fuel) in natural gas service stations.

Fuel

Types of petrol

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside thefuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-verter and must only be run on unleaded pet-rol. The petrol must comply with EuropeanStandard EN 228 or German standard DIN51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can re-fuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti-ated by their octane rating (RON).

The following titles appear on the corre-sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap:

258


Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc-tane unleaded petrol

We recommend you use super 95 octane pet-rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octanepetrol, with a slight decrease in power.

Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95octanes

You should use super petrol with a minimumof 95 octanes.

If super is not available, in an emergency youmay refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. Inthis case only use moderate engine speedsand a light throttle. Refuel with super as soonas possible.

Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc-tane unleaded petrol

We recommend you use super plus 98 octanepetrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc-tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power.

If super is not available, in an emergency youmay refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. Inthis case only use moderate engine speedsand a light throttle. Refuel with super as soonas possible.

Petrol additives

The quality of the fuel influences the behav-iour, power and service life of the engine.This is why the petrol you use should carrysuitable additives already included by the

petrol industry, free of metals. These addi-tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep thefuel system clean and prevent deposits frombuilding up in the engine.

If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi-tives is not available or engine problemsarise, the necessary additives must be addedwhen refuelling ››› .

Not all petrol additives have been shown tobe effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad-ditives may cause significant damage to theengine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad-ditives should never be used. Metal additivesmay also be contained in petrol additives forimproving anti-detonation ratings or octaneratings ››› .

SEAT recommends “genuine VolkswagenGroup Fuel Additives for petrol engines”.These additives can be bought at SEAT deal-ers, where information on how to use themcan also be obtained.

CAUTION

● Do not refuel if the filler indicates that thefuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacementpetrol) fuels contain high concentrations ofmetal additives. Using them may damage theengine!

● Never refuel with fuels containing a largeproportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85).This could damage the fuel system.

● Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel orfuel containing other metal additives wouldseriously impair the efficiency of the catalyticconverter.

● Only use fuel additives that have been ap-proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti-knock additives may contain metal additivesthat could seriously damage the engine orthe catalytic converter. These additives mustnot be used.

● High engine speed and full throttle candamage the engine when using petrol with anoctane rating lower than the correct grade forthe engine.

Note

● You may use petrol with a high octane num-ber than the one recommended for your en-gine.

● In those countries where unleaded petrol isnot available, you may refuel with a fuel witha low lead content.

Diesel fuel

Please note the information on the inside ofthe fuel tank flap.

We recommend the use of diesel fuel whichcomplies to European standard EN 590. Ifdiesel fuel which meets European standardEN 590 is not available, the Cetane number(CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engine »

259

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

is equipped with a particulate filter, the sul-phur content of the fuel must be below 50parts per million.

Winter-grade diesel

Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and itis more difficult to start the engine. For thisreason, petrol stations in some countries al-so offer winter diesel with improved fluiditywhen cold (winter-grade diesel).

Water in the fuel filter1)

If your vehicle has a diesel engine and isequipped with a fuel filter with a water sepa-rator, the instrument panel may display the

following warning: Water in thefuel filter. If this is the case, take thevehicle to a specialised workshop so thatthey can drain the fuel filter.

CAUTION

● The vehicle is not designed for the use ofFAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system wouldbe damaged if you used biodiesel.

● Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called“thinners”, petrol or similar additives withdiesel fuel.

● If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may benecessary to drain the fuel filter more fre-quently than is specified in the Maintenance

Programme. We recommend having this doneby a specialised workshop. If water is allowedto collect in the filter, this can cause engineperformance problems.

Natural gas


Natural gas

Natural gas can be compressed or in liquidform, addition to others.

Liquefied natural gas (LNG) is the result ofheavy cooling of natural gas. Therefore itsvolume is considerably reduced comparedwith compressed natural gas (CNG). In vehi-cles with a natural gas engine, liquefied nat-ural gas cannot be directly refilled, as the gaswould expand excessively in the vehicle gastank.

Therefore, vehicles with a natural gas enginemust only be refuelled using compressednatural gas ››› .

Natural gas quality and consumption

Natural gas is divided into the groups H andL depending on its quality.

Gas type H has a superior heating power andinferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide contentthan type L. The higher the heating power ofthe natural gas, the lower the consumptionwill be.

However, the heating power and the propor-tion of nitrogen and carbon dioxide can fluc-tuate within the quality groups. Therefore, ve-hicle consumption can also vary when usinga single type of gas only.

The engine management automaticallyadapts to the natural gas used according toits quality. Therefore, different quality gasescan be mixed in the tank, without the needfor comprehensive draining before applying adifferent quality gas.

Updated information relating to natural gasquality is displayed on the instrument panel››› page 30.

Natural gas and safety

If you can smell gas or suspect that there is aleak ››› :

● Stop the vehicle immediately.


● Open the doors to appropriately ventilatethe vehicle.

● Extinguish cigarettes immediately.

1) Valid for the market: Algeria.260


● Move away from the vehicle or switch offobjects that may cause sparks or a fire.

● If you continue to smell gas, do not contin-ue driving!

● Seek specialist assistance. Have the faultrepaired.

WARNING

Failure to act when you can smell gas in thevehicle or when refuelling can cause seriousinjuries.

● Carry out the necessary operations.

● Leave the danger zone.

● If necessary, warn the emergency services.

WARNING

The vehicle is not prepared to use liquefiednatural gas (LNG) and this fuel must not beadded under any circumstances. Liquefiednatural gas can cause the natural gas tank toexplode, resulting in serious injury.

Note

Have the natural gas system checked regular-ly by a specialised workshop, according tothe Maintenance Programme.

261

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Engine compartment

Checking levels

Fig. 240 Diagram for the location of the various elements.

From time to time, the levels of the differentfluids in the vehicle must be checked. Neverfill with incorrect fluids, otherwise seriousdamage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank

Engine oil dipstick

Engine oil filler cap

Brake fluid reservoir

Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)

Windscreen washer reservoir

The checking and refilling of service fluidsare carried out on the components men-tioned above. These operations are descri-bed in ››› page 262.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Overview

You will find further explanations, instruc-tions and restrictions on the technical speci-fications as of ››› page 281.

Work in the engine compartment


Always be aware of the danger of injury andscalding as well as the risk of accident or firewhen working in the engine compartment(e.g. when checking and refilling fluids). Al-ways observe the warnings listed below andfollow all general safety precautions. The en-

gine compartment of the vehicle is a poten-tially hazardous area ››› .

WARNING

● Switch the engine off, remove the key fromthe ignition and apply the hand brake. If thevehicle has a manual gearbox, place the leverin neutral; if it has an automatic gearbox,place the selector lever in position P. Wait forthe engine to cool down.

● Keep children away from the engine com-partment.

● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-tion on the engine compartment, as thesemay catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in coolant).

262


● Take care not to cause short circuits in theelectrical system, especially when workingon the battery.

● If working inside the engine compartment,remember that, even when the ignition isswitched off, the radiator fan may start up au-tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in-jury.

● Never cover the engine with additional in-sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk offire!

● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex-pansion tank when the engine is hot. Thecooling system is under pressure.

● Protect face, hands and arms by coveringthe cap with a large, thick rag to protectagainst escaping coolant and steam.

● If it is necessary to work in the engine com-partment while the engine is running, the ro-tating components (for example, poly-V belt,alternator, radiator fan) and the high voltageignition system are an additional hazard.

● Observe the following additional warningsif work on the fuel system or the electricalsystem is necessary:

– Always disconnect the battery from theon-board network.

– Do not smoke.

– Never work near naked flames.

– Always keep an approved fire extinguish-er immediately available.

CAUTION

When topping up fluids make sure the correctfluid is put into the correct filler opening, oth-erwise this can cause serious malfunctions orengine damage.


Inspect the ground underneath your vehicleregularly so that any leaks are detected at anearly stage. If you find spots of oil or otherfluids in the area where it was parked, haveyour vehicle inspected at the workshop.

Note

In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake flu-id reservoirs are on the other side of the en-gine compartment ››› Fig. 240.

Opening the bonnet


The bonnet is released from inside the vehi-cle.

Check that the windscreen wiper arms arenot unfolded. Otherwise the paint may bedamaged.

The bonnet can only be unlocked when thedriver door is open.

WARNING

Never open the bonnet if you see steam ordrips of coolant being released from the en-gine compartment. Failure to comply couldresult in burns. Wait until no steam or coolantcan be seen before opening the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet

– Slightly lift the bonnet.

– Release the bonnet stay before pressing itback into its support.

– Carefully close the bonnet.

– Press the bonnet down until it locks intoplace.

– Make sure that the bonnet catches onto itsclasp. Do not press down too hard ››› .

WARNING

● For safety reasons the bonnet must alwaysbe completely closed when the vehicle ismoving. Therefore, after closing the bonnet,always check that the locking element isproperly engaged. This is the case if the bon-net is flush with the adjacent body panels.

● Should you notice that the bonnet is notsafely secured when the vehicle is moving,stop the vehicle immediately and close thebonnet. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in an accident.

263

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-gradeoil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-tial for the correct operation of the engineand its long useful life, when topping up orchanging oil, use only those oils that complywith VW standards.

The specifications (VW standards) set out inthe following page should appear on the con-tainer of the service oil; when the containerdisplays the specific standards for petrol anddiesel engines together, it means that the oilcan be used for both types of engines.

We recommend that the oil change indicatedin the Maintenance Programme, be per-formed by a technical service or specialisedworkshop.

The correct oil specifications for your engineare listed in the ››› page 51, Oil proper-ties.

Service intervals

Service intervals can be flexible (LongLifeservice) or fixed (dependent on time/dis-tance travelled).

If the PR code that appears on the back of theMaintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6,

this means that your vehicle has the LongLifeservice programmed. If it lists the codes QI1,QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service isdependent on time/distance travelled.

Flexible service intervals (LongLife serviceintervals*)

Special oils and processes have been devel-oped which, depending on the characteris-tics and individual driving profiles, enablethe extension of the oil change service (Long-Life service intervals).

Because this oil is essential for extending theservice intervals, it must only be used ob-serving the following indications:

● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in-tervals.

● Only in exceptional circumstances, if theengine oil level is too low ››› page 265 andLongLife oil is not available, it is permitted totop up (once) with oil for fixed service inter-vals ››› page 51 (up to a maximum of 0.5litres).

Fixed service intervals*

If your vehicle does not have the “LongLifeservice interval” or it has been disabled (byrequest), you may use oils for fixed serviceintervals, which also appear in››› page 51, Oil properties. In this case,your vehicle must be serviced after a fixed in-terval of 1 year/15,000 km (10,000 miles)

(whatever comes first) ››› Booklet Mainte-nance Programme.

● In exceptional circumstances, if the engineoil level is too low ››› page 265 and you can-not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle,you can add a small quantity of oil conform-ing to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3(petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (die-sel engines) (up to 0.5 l).

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*

The Maintenance Programme states whetheryour vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulatefilter.

Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ashformation, may be used in diesel enginesequipped with particulate filter. Using othertypes of oil will cause a higher soot concen-tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-fore:

● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.

● Only in exceptional circumstances, if theengine oil level is too low ››› page 265 andyou cannot obtain the oil specified for yourvehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil(once) conforming to the VW 506 00,VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 orACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).

264


Checking engine oil level

Fig. 241 Engine oil dipstick.


The engine oil dipstick indicates the level ofthe oil.

Checking oil level

– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Briefly run the engine at idle speed untilthe operating temperature is reached andthen stop.

– Wait for about two minutes.

– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick witha clean cloth and insert it again, pushing itin as far as it will go.

– Then pull it out once more and check the oillevel ››› Fig. 241. Top up with engine oil ifnecessary.

Depending on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oilconsumption is likely to be higher for the first5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil levelmust be checked at regular intervals, prefera-bly when filling the tank and before a jour-ney.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compart-ment or on the engine must be carried outcautiously.

● When working in the engine compartment,always observe the safety warnings››› page 262.

CAUTION

If the oil level is above the area A do notstart the engine. This could result in damageto the engine and catalytic converter. Contacta Technical Service.

Topping up engine oil

Fig. 242 In the engine compartment: Engineoil filler cap


Before opening the bonnet, read and observethe warnings ››› in Work in the enginecompartment on page 262.

The position of the oil filler opening is shownin the corresponding engine compartment il-lustration ››› page 262.

Engine oil specification ››› page 51.

WARNING

Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oilcomes into contact with hot engine compo-nents when topping up. »

265

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

CAUTION

If the oil level is above the area A do notstart the engine. This could result in damageto the engine and catalytic converter. Contacta specialised workshop.


The oil level must never be above area A .Otherwise oil can be drawn in through thecrankcase breather and escape into the at-mosphere via the exhaust system.

Note

Before a long trip, we recommend finding anengine oil that conforms to the correspond-ing VW specifications and recommend keep-ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en-gine oil will always be available for a top-up ifneeded.

Changing engine oil


The engine oil must be changed at the inter-vals given in the service schedule.

We recommend that you have the engine oilchanged by a Technical Service.

The oil change intervals are shown in theMaintenance Programme.

WARNING

Only change the engine oil yourself if youhave the specialist knowledge required!

● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-serve the warnings ››› page 262.

● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oilmay cause burn injuries.

● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, suchas acid burns, caused by splashes of oil.

● When removing the oil drain plug with yourfingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre-vent oil from running down your arm.

● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes intocontact with engine oil.

● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must bestored in a safe place out of the reach of chil-dren.

CAUTION

No additives should be used with engine oil.This could result in engine damage. Any dam-age caused by the use of such additiveswould not be covered by the factory warranty.


● Because of disposal problems and the spe-cial tools and specialist knowledge required,we recommend that you have the engine oiland filter changed by a Technical Service.

● Never pour oil down drains or into theground.

● Use a suitable container when draining theused oil. It must be large enough to hold allthe engine oil.

Cooling system

Topping up coolant


Top up coolant when the level is below theMIN (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level

– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Switch the ignition off.

– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-pansion tank. When the engine is cold, thecoolant level should be between the marks.When the engine is hot, it may be slightlyabove the upper mark.

Topping up coolant

– Wait for the engine to cool down.

– Cover the coolant expansion tank cap witha cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left››› .

– Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you

266


could damage the engine. If there is nocoolant in the expansion tank, do not con-tinue driving. You should obtain professio-nal assistance ››› .

– If there is still some coolant in the expan-sion tank, top up to the upper mark.

– Top up with coolant until the level becomesstable.

– Screw the cap back on correctly.

Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates aleak in the cooling system. Take the vehiclestraight to a specialised workshop to havethe cooling system examined. If there are noleaks in the engine cooling system, a loss ofcoolant can only occur if the coolant boilsand is forced out of the system as a result ofoverheating.

WARNING

● The cooling system is under pressure. Donot unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-sion tank when the engine is hot: risk ofburns!

● The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be ahealth hazard. Therefore, the antifreezeshould be stored in the original container in asafe place out of reach of children. Failure tocomply could result in poisoning.

● If working inside the engine compartment,remember that, even when the ignition isswitched off, the radiator fan may start up au-

tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in-jury.

WARNING

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool-ant system, the engine may fail leading to se-rious damage.

● Please make sure that the percentage ofadditive is correct with respect to the lowestexpected ambient temperature in the zone inwhich the vehicle is to be used.

● When the outside temperature is very low,the coolant could freeze and the vehiclewould be immobilised. In this case, the heat-ing would not work either and inadequatelydressed passengers could die of cold.

CAUTION

Do not top up the expansion tank with cool-ant fluid if it is empty! Air could enter thecooling system. In this case, stop driving.Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise, thereis a risk of engine damage.

CAUTION

The original additives should never be mixedwith coolants which are not approved bySEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causingsevere damage to the engine and the enginecooling system.

● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not pur-ple but is, for example, brown, this indicates

that the G13 additive has been mixed with aninadequate coolant. The coolant must bechanged as soon as possible if this is thecase! This could result in serious faults andengine damage.


Coolants and additives can contaminate theenvironment. If any fluids are spilled, theyshould be collected and correctly disposedof, with respect to the environment.

Brake fluid

Topping up brake fluid


Checking the brake fluid level

The brake fluid level must be between theMIN and MAX markings.

However, if the brake fluid level goes downnoticeably in a short time, or drops below theMIN mark, there may be a leak in the brakesystem. Seek specialist assistance. A warn-ing light on the instrument panel displaymonitors the brake fluid level ››› page 109. »

267

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluidreservoir is on the other side of the enginecompartment.

Changing brake fluid

The regular intervals at which the brake fluidshould be replaced are listed in the Mainte-nance Programme. We recommend you haveit replaced at a SEAT Official Service, duringan Inspection Service.

WARNING

● Brake fluid should be stored in the closedoriginal container in a safe place out of reachof children. Risk of poisoning!

● If the brake fluid is left in the system fortoo long and the brakes are subjected toheavy use, vapour bubbles may form in thebrake system. This would seriously affect theefficiency of the brakes and the safety of thevehicle. This may cause an accident.

CAUTION

Brake fluid should not come into contact withthe vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking and topping up the wind-screen washer reservoir


Check the water level in the windscreenwasher reservoir regularly and top up as re-quired.

The container for the windscreen washer con-tains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen,the rear window and the headlight washersystem*.

● Open the bonnet ››› page 262.

● The windscreen washer reservoir is markedwith the symbol on the cap.

● Check there is enough windscreen water inthe reservoir.

Recommended windscreen wipers

● For the hottest seasons we recommendsummer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-ter).

● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clearglass. Approximate proportion of the wintermixture, up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part con-centrate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4

proportion of mixture in the washer fluidtank.

Capacity

The reservoir holds approximately 3 litres inversions without headlight washer and 5 li-tres in versions with headlight washer.

WARNING

If the water from the windscreen washer doesnot contain enough anti-freeze, it may freezeon the windscreen and rear window, reducingforward and rear visibility.

● In winter, ensure the windscreen washercontains enough anti-freeze.

● In cold conditions, you should not use thewindscreen wiper system unless you havewarmed the windscreen with the ventilationsystem. The antifreeze could freeze on thewindscreen and reduce visibility.

WARNING

Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or othersimilar additives with the windscreen washerwater. A greasy layer may be formed on thewindscreen which will impair visibility.

● Use clean water with a window cleaner rec-ommended by SEAT.

● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze tothe water in the reservoir.

268


CAUTION

● Do not mix cleaning products recommen-ded by SEAT with other products. This couldlead to flocculation and may block the wind-screen washer jets.

● When topping up service fluids, make abso-lutely certain that you fill the fluids into thecorrect reservoirs. Using the wrong fluidscould cause serious malfunctions and enginedamage!

● Not having windscreen wiper fluid reducesvisibility through the windscreen, and leadsto loss of visibility in headlights in modelswith headlight washer.

Battery

General information


The battery is located in the engine compart-ment and is almost maintenance-free. It ischecked as part of the Inspection Service.Nevertheless, check the terminals are cleanand have the correct tightening torque, espe-cially in summer and winter.

Disconnecting the battery

The battery should only be disconnected inexceptional cases. When the battery is dis-

connected, some of the vehicle's functionsare “lost” (››› table on page 269). Thesefunctions will require resetting after the bat-tery is reconnected.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before youdisconnect the battery Otherwise the alarmwill be triggered.

Function Reprogramming

One-touch function ofthe electric windows

››› page 128, One-touchopening and closing*.

Remote control key

If the vehicle does not re-spond to the key, theyshould be synchronised››› page 123.

Digital clock ››› page 106.

ESC warning lampAfter driving for a few me-tres, the warning lamp goesout again.

If the vehicle is not used for long periods

The vehicle has a system for monitoring thecurrent consumption when the engine is leftunused for long periods of time ››› page 255.Some functions, such as the interior lights, orthe remote door opening, may be temporarilydisabled to prevent the battery from runningflat. These functions will come back on assoon as the ignition is switched on and theengine started.

Winter conditions

During the winter, the starting power may bereduced, and if necessary, the battery shouldbe charged ››› in Important safety warn-ings for handling a vehicle battery onpage 270

Important safety warnings for han-dling a vehicle battery

All work on batteries requires specialistknowledge. Please refer to a SEAT OfficialService or a workshop specialising in batter-ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!

The battery must not be opened. Never try tochange the fluid level of the battery. Other-wise explosive gas is released from the bat-tery that could cause an explosion.

Wear eye protection.

Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wearprotective gloves and eye protection. In the eventof electrolyte splashes, rinse off with plenty ofwater.

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro-hibited.

The battery should only be charged in a well-ven-tilated zone. Risk of explosion!

Keep children away from acid and batteries! »

269

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

WARNING

● When repairing or working on the electricalsystem, proceed as follows:

– 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Thenegative cable on the battery must bedisconnected.

– 2. When the repair is finished, reconnectthe negative pole of the battery.

● Switch off all electrical devices before re-connecting the battery. Reconnect first thepositive cable and then the negative cable.Never reverse the polarity of the connections.This could cause an electrical fire.

● Ensure that the vent hose is always connec-ted to the battery.

● Never use damaged batteries. This couldcause an explosion! Replace a damaged bat-tery immediately.

CAUTION

● Never disconnect the battery if the ignitionis switched on or if the engine is running.This could damage the electrical system orelectronic components.

Charging the battery

Terminals for charging the battery are fittedin the engine compartment.

– Note the warnings ››› in Important safetywarnings for handling a vehicle battery onpage 270 and ››› .

– Switch off all electrical devices. Remove theignition key.

– Raise the bonnet ››› page 263.

– Open the battery cover.

– Connect the charger clamps as describedto the positive pole of the battery (+) andexclusively to an earth on the bodywork(–).

– Only use a charger which is compatible foruse with 12 V nominal voltage batteries.The charge must not exceed a voltage of 15V.

– Now connect the battery charger to thepower socket and switch on.

– After charging the battery: switch off thebattery charger and disconnect the powersocket cable.

– Finally disconnect the charger cables fromthe battery.

– Replace the battery cover correctly.

– Close the bonnet ››› page 263.

Important: Before you charge the batterymake sure you read the manufacturer's in-structions for using the battery charger.

WARNING

Never charge a battery that has frozen: re-place battery! Failure to do so may lead to anexplosion.

Note

Use only the terminals in the engine compart-ment to charge the battery.

Replacing the battery

The new battery should have the same speci-fications (amperage, load and voltage) as theused battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligentpower management system to control thedistribution of electrical energy ››› page 255.The power management function ensuresthat the battery is charged much more effi-ciently than on vehicles without a powermanagement system. To maintain this func-tion after replacing the battery, we recom-mend that the replacement battery used is ofthe same make and type as the original fittedbattery. To make proper use of the powermanagement function after the battery hasbeen changed, have the battery coded to thepower management mode at a specialisedworkshop.

270

Wheels

CAUTION

● Some vehicles, for example those with theStart-Stop system* are fitted with a specialbattery (AGM-type or EFB-type battery). If anyother type of battery is fitted, the Start-Stopfunction may be considerably reduced andthe vehicle may not stop on repeated occa-sions.

● Make sure that the vent hose is always at-tached to the original opening on the side ofthe battery. Gases or battery acid can other-wise escape and possibly cause damage.

● The battery holder and clamps must alwaysbe correctly secured.

● Before starting any work on the battery, al-ways observe the warnings listed under››› page 269, Important safety warnings forhandling a vehicle battery.

● Do not forget to replace the battery cover-ings, where applicable. It is a protection forhigh temperatures. This in turn extends thevehicle service life.


Batteries contain toxic substances includ-ing sulphuric acid and lead. They must bedisposed of appropriately and must not bedisposed of with ordinary household waste.Make sure disconnected batteries cannot tipover. Sulphuric acid could be spilt!

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

– When driving with new tyres, be especiallycareful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

– If you have to drive over a kerb or similarobstacle, drive very slowly and as near aspossible at a right angle to the obstacle.

– Check from time to time if the tyres aredamaged (punctures, cuts, cracks ordents). Remove any foreign objects embed-ded in the treads.

– Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-placed immediately.

– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

– Replace any missing valve caps as soon aspossible.

– Mark the wheels before taking them off sothat they rotate in the same direction whenput back.

– When removed, the wheels or tyres shouldbe stored in a cool, dry and preferably darkplace.

New tyres

New tyres do not give maximum grip straightaway and should therefore be “run in” by

driving carefully and at moderate speeds forabout the first 500 km (300 miles). This willalso increase the useful life of the tyres.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-cording to the type and make of tyre and thetread pattern.

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is often not readilyvisible. If you notice unusual vibration or thecar pulling to one side, this may indicate thatone of the tyres is damaged. Reduce speedimmediately if there is any reason to suspectthat damage may have occurred. Inspect thetyres for damage. If no external damage isvisible, drive slowly and carefully to the near-est specialised workshop and have the carinspected.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-ways note the direction of rotation indicatedwhen mounting the wheel. This guaranteesoptimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplan-ing, excessive noise and wear.

Retrofitting accessories

If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims orwheel trims, we recommend that you consultwith a SEAT Official Service centre for adviceregarding current techniques.

271

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Tyre useful life

Fig. 243 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-ing habits will increase the useful life of yourtyres.

– Check tyre pressure at least once a month,and also prior to any long trip.

– The tyre pressure should only be checkedwhen the tyres are cold. Do not reduce thepressure of warm tyres.

– Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-ried by the vehicle.

– In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,save the modified pressure of tyres››› page 275.

– Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.

– Inspect the tyres for irregular wear fromtime to time.

The useful life of your tyres depends on thefollowing factors:

Tyre pressure

Tyre pressure values are indicated on thesticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap››› Fig. 243.

Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse-ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor-rect inflation pressures are very important,especially at high speeds.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure canbe adjusted to medium load to improve driv-ing comfort (tyre pressure ). When drivingwith comfort tyre pressure fuel consumptionmay increase slightly.

The tyre pressure must be adjusted accordingto the load the vehicle is carrying. If the vehi-cle is going to carry the maximum load, thetyre pressure should be increased to maxi-mum value indicated on the sticker on the in-side of the fuel tank flap.

Do not forget the spare wheel when checkingthe tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in-flated to the highest pressure required for theroad wheels.

In the case of a minimised temporary sparewheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18) inflate toa pressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyrepressure label on the fuel tank flap.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hardbraking (squealing tyres) all increase tyrewear.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.However, certain circumstances may lead toimbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-brations in the steering wheel.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, asthey otherwise cause excessive wear onsteering, suspension and tyres. A wheel mustalso be rebalanced when a new tyre is fittedor if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of thevehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, youshould check wheel alignment at a SEAT Offi-cial Service.

272

Wheels

WARNING

● Always adapt the tyre pressure accordinglywhen the vehicle load changes.

● A tyre with low air pressure has to flex a lotmore when the vehicle is heavily loaded or athigh speeds, therefore causing overheatingto occur. Under these conditions, the tyrebead may be released or the tyre may burst.Risk of accident!


Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-sumption.

Wear indicators

Fig. 244 Tyre tread: tread wear indicators

Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre isworn.

The original tyres on your vehicle have1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators” runningacross the tread. Depending on the manufac-turer, there will be 6 to 8 of them spaced atequal distances around the tyre. Markings onthe tyre sidewall (for instance the letters“TWI” or a triangle) indicate the positions ofthe tread wear indicators.

The minimum tread depth required by law is1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves nextto the tread wear indicators). (Different fig-ures may apply in other countries.)

WARNING

The tyres must be replaced at the latest whenthe tread is worn down to the tread wear indi-cators. Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in an accident.

● Especially in difficult driving conditionssuch as wet or icy roads. It is important thatthe tyre tread be as deep as possible and beapproximately the same on the tyres of boththe front and the rear axles.

● The scant driving safety due to insufficienttread depth is particularly evident in vehiclehandling, when there is a risk of “aquaplan-ing” in deep puddles of water and when driv-ing through corners, and braking is also ad-versely affected.

● The speed has to be adapted accordingly,otherwise there is a risk of losing control overthe vehicle.

Changing wheels

Fig. 245 Interchanging tyres.

To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyresthe wheels should be changed round fromtime to time according to the system››› Fig. 245. The useful life of all the tyres willthen be about the same time.

New tyres or new wheels

– All four wheels must be fitted with tyres ofthe same type, size (rolling circumference)and preferably the same tread pattern.

– Tyres should be replaced at least in pairsand not individually (i.e. both front tyres orboth rear tyres together).

– Do not use tyres whose effective size ex-ceeds the dimensions of the factory-ap-proved makes of tyre. »

273

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

– If you wish to fit the vehicle with rims ortyres different to those installed in manu-facture, it is advisable to consult a SEAT Of-ficial Service before purchasing them.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essentialpart of the vehicle's design. The tyres andrims approved by SEAT are specially matchedto the characteristics of the vehicle and makea major contribution to good roadholdingand safe handling ››› .

The sizes of the rims and tyres approved foryour vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu-mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity orCOC document1)). The vehicle documentationvaries depending on the country of resi-dence.

A knowledge of tyre designations makes iteasier to choose the correct tyres. The follow-ing wording can be read on the sides of thetyre:

205/55 R16 91VThis contains the following information:

205 Tyre width in mm

55 Height/width ratio in %

R Tyre construction: Radial

16 Rim diameter in inches

91 Load rating code

V Speed index

The manufacturing date is also indicated onthe tyre sidewall (possibly only on the innerpart):

DOT ... 2212 ...it means, for example, that the tyre was man-ufactured in the 22nd week of 2012.

But note that with some types of tyre, the ac-tual tyre size can differ from the nominal sizemarked on the tyre (for instance 205/55 R 1691 W), and there may be significant differen-ces in the contours of the tyres, even thoughthe tyres are marked with the same nominalsize designation. When replacing the tyres,it is therefore important to make sure thatthe actual size of the new tyres does not ex-ceed the dimensions of the factory-approvedmakes of tyre.

Failure to observe this requirement can af-fect the clearance needed for the tyres. If thetyres rub against the bodywork, in certaincircumstances the tyres, running gear orbodywork and pipes may be damaged, andvehicle safety could be severely impaired››› .

If you use tyres that are approved by SEATyou can be sure that the actual tyre dimen-

sions will be correct for your vehicle. If youdecide to fit a different type of tyre, you mustobtain the appropriate manufacturer's certif-icate from the tyre retailer to confirm thatthe tyres are suitable for your vehicle. Keepthis certificate in a safe place.

Your SEAT Official Service will be able to ad-vise you on which tyres may be fitted to yourvehicle.

It is best to have all servicing of wheels andtyres performed by a specialised workshop.They are familiar with the procedure andhave the necessary special tools and spareparts as well as the proper facilities for dis-posing of the old tyres respecting the envi-ronment.

WARNING

● It is very important to ensure that the tyresyou have chosen have adequate clearance.When selecting replacement tyres, do not re-ly entirely on the nominal tyre size marked onthe tyre, since the effective tyre size can dif-fer significantly depending on the manufac-turer. Inadequate tyre clearance can result indamage to the tyres or the vehicle, causing aserious safety risk. Risk of accident! It mayalso invalidate the vehicle's registration foruse on public roads.

1) COC = certificate of conformity.274

Wheels

● Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that aremore than 6 years old. If you have noalternative, you should drive slowly and withextra care at all times.

● If wheel trims are fitted after the car is pur-chased, ensure that there is an adequate flowof air for cooling the brake system.


Old tyres must be disposed of according tothe laws in the country concerned.

Note

● A SEAT Service Centre should be consultedto find out whether wheels or tyres of differ-ent sizes to those originally fitted by SEATcan be fitted, and to find out about the com-binations allowed between the front axle(axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).

● Never mount used tyres if you are not sureof their “previous history”.

● For technical reasons, it is not generallypossible to use the wheels from other vehi-cles. In some cases, this may also be true forthe same model of wheel.

Wheel bolts

The wheel bolts are matched to the rims.When installing different wheels (for instancealloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it isimportant to use the correct wheel bolts with

the right length and correctly shaped boltheads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-curely and that the brake system functionscorrectly.

The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easi-ly.

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel bolts* ››› page 58.

Tyre monitoring systems

Introduction

WARNING

Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyresmay lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, totread separation or even to a blow-out.

● Check tyre pressures regularly and ensurethey are maintained at the pressures indica-ted. Tyre pressure that is too low could causeoverheating, resulting in tread detachment oreven burst tyres.

● Tyre pressure should be that indicated onthe label when the tyres are cold at all times››› page 283.

● Regularly check the cold inflation pressureof the tyres. If necessary, change the tyrepressure of the vehicle tyres while they arecold.

● Regularly check your tyres for damage andwear.

● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeed or loads specified for the type of tyrefitted on your vehicle.


Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuelconsumption and tyre wear.

Note

● Driving for the first time with new tyres at ahigh speed can cause them to slightly ex-pand, which could then produce an air pres-sure warning.

● Only replace used tyres with those author-ised by SEAT for the corresponding type vehi-cle.

● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring sys-tem. Regularly check your tyres to ensurethat the tyre pressure is correct and that thetyres are not damaged due to puncture, cuts,tears and impacts/dents. Remove objectsfrom the tyres only when they have notpierced the tyres.

275

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Tyre monitoring indicator

If a light appears

The pressure in one or more tyres hasclearly reduced in comparison to thetyre pressure set by the driver or thetyre has structural damage.

Additionally, an audible warning can be heard and a textmessage can be seen on the instrument panel display.Stop! Reduce speed immediately! Stop the vehiclesafely as soon as possible. Avoid sudden manoeuvresand braking! Check all tyres and pressures. Replace anydamaged tyres.

If flashing

System malfunction

The control lamp flashes for approximately one minuteand then lights up permanently.If tyre pressure is correct, switch the ignition off and onagain. If the control lamp remains lit up, the tyre moni-toring indicator can be calibrated. Have the systemchecked by a specialised workshop.

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on while the function is verified. They willswitch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

When the tyres are inflated at different pres-sures or at a pressure that is too low then atyre may be damaged resulting in a loss of

control of the vehicle and a serious or fatalaccident.

● If the warning lamp lights up, stop im-mediately and check the tyres.

● If the tyres are inflated at different pres-sures or if a tyre pressure is too low, this willincrease tyre wear, negatively affecting vehi-cle stability and increasing braking distan-ces.

● If tyres are inflated at different pressures ora tyre pressure is too low, a tyre may be dam-aged and burst resulting in a loss of controlof the vehicle.

● The driver is responsible for ensuring thatall of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflatedto the right pressure. The recommended tyrepressure is indicated on the label››› page 283.

● The tyre monitoring system can only oper-ate correctly if all of the tyres are inflated tothe correct pressure when cold.

● Driving with tyres at the wrong pressurecan damage them and result in an accident.Ensure that the tyre pressures of all the tyrescorrespond to the vehicle load.

● Before starting a journey, always inflatetyres to the correct pressure.

● Tyres with insufficient pressure are subjec-ted to more flexing. Due to this, the tyrecould become excessively hot, causing treadseparation and also tyre blow-out.

● With an overloaded vehicle at high speed,the tyres can overheat and burst resulting ina loss of vehicle control.

● Tyre pressures which are too high or toolow reduce the useful life of the tyre, affect-ing vehicle performance.

● If a tyre has not been punctured and it doesnot have to be changed immediately, drive tothe nearest specialised workshop at a moder-ate speed and have the tyre checked and in-flated to the correct pressure.

WARNING


Note

● If excessively low tyre pressure is detectedwith the ignition on, an audible warning willsound. In the event that there is a fault in thesystem, an audible warning will sound.

● Driving on dirt tracks for a long period oftime or driving in a sporty style can tempora-rily deactivate the TPMS. The control lampshows a fault, but disappears when road con-ditions or the driving style change.

276

Wheels

Tyre monitoring indicator

Fig. 246 Instrument panel: warning of loss oftyre pressure.

The tyre monitor indicator compares wheelrevolutions and, with this information, thetread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. Ifthe rolling circumference of one or morewheels has changed, the tyre monitoring in-dicator will indicate this on the instrumentpanel through a warning lamp and a warningto the driver ››› Fig. 246. When only one spe-cific tyre is affected, its position within thevehicle will be indicated.

Loss of pressure: Check lefttyre pressure!

Wheel tread change

The wheel tread changes when:

● Tyre pressure is manually changed

● Tyre pressure is insufficient

● Tyre structure is damaged

● The vehicle is unbalanced because of aload

● The wheels on an axle are subject to aheavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).

● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains

● The temporary spare wheel is fitted

● The wheel on one axle is changed

There may be a delay in the reaction of thetyre monitoring indicator or it may not in-dicate anything under certain circumstances(e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un-paved roads, or when driving with snowchains).

Calibrating the tyre monitoring indica-tor

Fig. 247 Glove compartment: tyre controlswitch.

After changing the tyre pressure or replacingone or more wheels, the tyre monitoring indi-cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, forexample, when the front and rear wheels areswapped.


● Store the new tyre pressure in the EasyConnect system with the button and thefunction button Setup ››› page 27 or us-ing the switch located in the glove compart-ment1) ››› Fig. 247.

When driving, the system self-calibrates thetyre pressure provided by the driver and thewheels fitted. After a long journey with varied »

1) In vehicles without the Infotainment system:277

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

speeds the programmed values are collectedand monitored.

With the wheels under very heavy loads, thetyre pressure must be increased to the totalrecommended tyre pressure before the cali-bration ››› page 283.

Note

● The tyre monitoring indicator does notfunction when there is a fault in the ESC orABS ››› page 176.

● An erroneous indication may be given whensnow chains are in use because they increasethe tread of the wheel.

Temporary spare wheel

General information

Fig. 248 Compact temporary spare wheel:raised floor panel.

The temporary spare wheel has been de-signed to be used for short periods of time.Have the tyres checked, and if necessary, re-placed as soon as possible at a SEAT OfficialService or at a specialised workshop.

Please note the following restrictions whenusing the compact temporary spare wheel.The compact temporary spare wheel is de-signed specifically for this model. For thisreason, do not use a temporary spare wheelfrom a different type of vehicle.

Removing the temporary spare wheel

– Lift and hold up the floor panel to removethe temporary spare wheel ››› Fig. 248.

– Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise.

– Take out the temporary spare wheel.

Chains

For technical reasons, snow chains must notbe used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the frontwheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-porary spare wheel in place of one of the rearwheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheelthat you have removed and replace the punc-tured front wheel with this wheel.

WARNING

● After fitting the temporary spare wheel,check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.

Failure to do so may cause an accident. Thetyre pressures are listed on the inside of thefuel tank flap.

● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)when the temporary spare wheel is fitted onthe vehicle: risk of accident!

● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking andfast cornering: risk of accident!

● Never use more than one temporary sparewheel at the same time, risk of accident.

● No other type of tyre (normal summer orwinter tyre) may be fitted on the compacttemporary spare wheel rim.

● If you are driving using the spare wheel,the ACC system could automatically switchoff during the journey. Switch off the systemwhen starting off.

278

Wheels

Extraction of the spare wheel in vehi-cles with SEAT SOUND 10 speakers(with subwoofer)*

Fig. 249 In the luggage compartment: re-move the subwoofer.

To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-move the subwoofer.

– Disassemble the subwoofer's floor panel(carpet) as follows:

– LEON/LEON SC model: first, pull the carpetin the direction of the backrest and thenpull it upwards to remove it. LEON ST mod-el: lift and secure the floor storage com-partment as explained in ››› page 160.

– Disconnect the subwoofer’s speaker cable››› Fig. 249 1 .

– Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock-wise direction 2 .

– Remove the subwoofer speaker and thespare wheel.

– When re-mounting the spare tyre, place thesubwoofer on the base of the wheel rimwith care. When doing so, the tip of the“FRONT” arrow on the subwoofer shouldpoint forward.

– Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-tate the securing wheel clockwise so thatthe subwoofer system and wheel are firmlyin place.

Winter service

Winter tyres

– Winter tyres must be fitted on all fourwheels.

– Only use winter tyres that are approved foryour vehicle.

– Please note that the maximum permissiblespeed for winter tyres may be lower thanfor summer tyres.

– Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-fective when the tread is worn down.

– After fitting the wheels you must alwayscheck the tyre pressures. When doing so,take into account the correct tyre pressureslisted on the rear of the front left doorframe ››› page 272.

In winter road conditions winter tyres willconsiderably improve vehicle handling. Thedesign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on iceand snow. This applies particularly to vehi-cles equipped with wide section tyres or withhigh speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y onthe sidewall).

Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-proved for your vehicle. The sizes of thesetyres are specified in the vehicle's docu-ments (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity orCOC1)). The vehicle documentation varies de-pending on the country of residence. See al-so ››› page 273.

Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-ties when the tread is worn down to a depthof 4 mm.

The performance of winter tyres is also se-verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread isstill much deeper than 4 mm.

Winter tyres are subject to the following max-imum speed limits according to speed ratingcode letter: ››› »

1) COC = certificate of conformity.279

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Speed ratingcode letter››› page 273

Maximum speed limit

Q 160 km/h (100 mph)

S 180 km/h (112 mph)

T 190 km/h (118 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

V240 km/h (149 mph) (please noterelevant restrictions)

W 270 km/h (168 mph)

Y 300 km/h (186 mph)

Vehicles capable of exceeding these speedsmust have an appropriate sticker attached sothat it is visible to the driver. Suitable stickersare available from the SEAT Official Serviceand specialised workshop. Please note theregulations to this effect in your country.

“All-weather” tyres can also be used insteadof winter tyres.

Using winter tyres with V-rating

Please note that the generally applicable240 km/h (150 mph) speed rating for wintertyres with the letter V is subject to technicalrestrictions; the maximum permissiblespeed for your vehicle may be significantlylower. The maximum speed limit for thesetyres depends directly on the maximum axle

weights for your car and on the listed weightrating of the tyres being used.

It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service tocheck the maximum speed which is permissi-ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car onthe basis of this information.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum speed permitted forthe winter tyres fitted on your car can causetyre failure, resulting in a loss of control ofthe vehicle – risk of accident.


Summer tyres should be fitted again as soonas possible after the winter period; they givebetter handling on roads which are free ofsnow and ice. Summer tyres perform withless rolling noise, tyre wear and – most im-portant – reduce fuel consumption.

280

Technical specifications

Technical data


Important

The information in the vehicle documentationalways takes precedence over the informa-tion in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in thisdocumentation are valid for the standardmodel in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu-ded in the Maintenance Programme or thevehicle registration documents shows whichengine is installed in the vehicle.

The figures may be different dependingwhether additional equipment is fitted, fordifferent models, for special vehicles and forother countries.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifi-cations section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PSPferdestärke (horsepower), formerly usedto denote engine power.

rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZCetane number, indication of the dieselcombustion power.

RONResearch octane number, indication ofthe knock resistance of petrol.

Vehicle identification data

Fig. 250 Vehicle data sticker (luggage com-partment).

Fig. 251 Chassis number.

VIN in the Easy Connect

– Select: button > function button SETUP> Service > Chassis number.

Chassis number

The VIN is located in the Easy Connect, on thevehicle data sticker and under the wind-screen, on the driver side ››› Fig. 251. Addi-tionally, the chassis number is located in theengine compartment, on the right-hand side.The number is engraved on the top side rail,and is partially covered.

Type plate

The type plate is located on the right sidedoor pillar. Vehicles for certain export coun-tries do not have a type plate.

Vehicle data sticker

The vehicle data sticker is under the carpettrim in the luggage compartment, in the »

281

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

spare wheel well. A sticker with the vehicledata is attached to the inside cover of theMaintenance Programme.

The following information is provided on thevehicle data sticker: ››› Fig. 250

Vehicle identification number (chassisnumber)

Vehicle type, model, capacity, enginetype, finish, engine power and gearboxtype

Engine code, gearbox code, externalpaint code and internal equipment code

Optional extras and PR numbers

Identifying letters

The identifying letters of the engine can beviewed on the instrument panel when the en-gine is switched off and the ignition is on.

● Hold down the 0.0/SET 4 ››› Fig. 120 but-ton for more than 15 seconds.

Information on fuel consump-tion

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derivedfrom measurements performed or supervisedby certified EU laboratories, according to the

1

2

3

4

legislation in force at the time (for more infor-mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) andapply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption andCO2 emissions can be found in the documen-tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions dependon the equipment/features of each individualvehicle, as well as on the driving style, roadconditions, traffic conditions, environmentalconditions, load or number of passengers.

Note

In practice, and considering all the factorsmentioned here, consumption values can dif-fer from those calculated in the current Euro-pean regulations.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with afuel tank filled to 90% capacity and withoutoptional extras. The figure quoted includes75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.

Special versions, optional equipment fittingsor retro-fitting accessories will increase theweight of the vehicle ››› .

WARNING

● Please note that the centre of gravity mayshift when transporting heavy objects; thismay affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-cident. Always adjust your speed and drivingstyle to suit road conditions and require-ments.

● Never exceed the gross axle weight ratingor the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per-missible axle load or the permissible totalweight is exceeded, the driving characteris-tics of the vehicle may change, which couldlead to accidents, injuries and damage to thevehicle.

Trailer mode

Trailer weights

Trailer weight

The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap-proved are selected in intensive trials accord-ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles inthe EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be differentin other countries. All data in the official vehi-cle documentation takes precedence overthese data at all times ››› .

282


Drawbar loads

The maximum permitted drawbar load on theball joint of the towing bracket must not ex-ceed 80 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommendthat you always tow approaching the maxi-mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-er on the road will be poor, if the drawbarload is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar loadcannot be met (e.g. with small, empty andlight-weight single axle trailers or tandemaxle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailerweight is legally required for the drawbarload.

WARNING

● For safety reasons, you should not drive atspeeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towinga trailer. This also applies in countries wherehigher speeds are permitted.

● Never exceed the maximum trailer weightsor the drawbar load. If the permissible axleload or the permissible total weight is excee-ded, the driving characteristics of the vehiclemay change, leading to accidents, injuriesand damage to the vehicle.

Wheels

Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheelbolts

Tyre pressures

The sticker with the tyre pressure values canbe found on the rear of the front left doorframe. The tyre pressure values given thereare for cold tyres. The slightly raised pres-sures of warm tyres must not be reduced.›››

The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar(2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summertyres.

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted only to the frontwheels, and only for the following tyres:







205/55 R17 Snow chains are not permitted

225/45 R18 Snow chains are not permitted

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been changed, thetightening torque of the wheel bolts shouldbe checked as soon as possible with a torquewrench ››› . The tightening torque for steeland alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING

● Check the tyre pressure at least once permonth. Checking the tyre pressure is very im-portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or toolow, there is an increased danger of accidents- particularly at high speeds.

● If the tightening torque of the wheel boltsis too low, they could loosen while the vehi-cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts andthreads can be damaged.

Note

We recommend that you ask your TechnicalService for information about appropriatewheel, tyre and snow chain size.

283

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

Engine data

Petrol engine 1.2 63 kW (86 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

63 (86)/4,300-5,300 160/1,400-3,500 4/1,197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC LEON ST

Top speed (km/h) 178 (V) 178 (V) 178 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.6 7.5 7.8


Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,800

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,188 1,168 1,233

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 890 940 880

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 860 810 970

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 590 580 610

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,300 1,300 1,300


284


Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 81 kW (110 PS)




Outputs and weightsLEON LEON SC LEON ST

Manual Start-Stop Manual Start-Stop Manual Start-Stop

Top speed (km/h) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.6 6.6 6.7 6.5 6.7 6.7


Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,740 1,740 1,710 1,730 1,790 1,800

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,213 1,213 1,186 1,193 1,240 1,247

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 900 900 950 950 880 890

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 890 890 810 830 960 960

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 600 600 590 590 620 620

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500


285

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

Petrol engine 1.6 MPI 81 kW (110 PS)


81 (110)/5,800 155/3,800-4,000 4/1,598 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)


Outputs and weightsLEON

manualLEON

automaticLEON SCmanual

LEON SCautomatic

LEON STmanual

LEON STautomatic

Top speed (km/h) 189 (IV) 185 (V) 189 (V) 185 (V) 189 (V) 185 (V)











286




85 (115)/5,000-5,500 200/2,000-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)



manualLEON


LEON SCautomatic

LEON STmanual

LEON STautomatic

Top speed (km/h) 202 202 202 202 202 202











287

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 PS) Start-Stop




Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC LEON STLEON ST

X-PERIENCE

Top speed (km/h) 203 (V&VI) 203 (V&VI) 203 (V&VI) 200 (V&VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.2 6.1 6.4 6.6


Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,770 1,750 1,830 1,820

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,233 1,213 1,257 1,263

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 920 970 910 950

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 900 830 970 920

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 610 600 620 630

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700


288


Petrol engine 1.4 TSI 110 kW (150 PS) ACT®





manualLEON


LEON SCautomatic

LEON STmanual

LEON STautomatic

Top speed (km/h) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI)


Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8 8 7.9 7.9 8.2 8.2









289

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data






manualLEON


LEON SCautomatic

LEON STautomatic

Top speed (km/h) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.6 5.6 5.5 5.5 5.8

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8 8 7.9 7.9 8.2

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,770 1,790 1,750 1,760 1,850

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,241 1,263 1,223 1,238 1,297

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 930 950 970 990 930

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 890 890 830 820 970

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 620 630 610 610 640

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700


290


Petrol engine 1.8 132 kW (180 PS) Start-Stop





ManualLEON

Automatic

LEONWithout

Start-Stop

LEON SCManual

LEON SCAutomatic

LEON SCWithout

Start-Stop

LEON STManual

LEON STAutomatic

Top speed (km/h) 226 (VI) 224 (VI) 224 (VI) 226 (VI) 224 (VI) 224 (VI) 226 (VI) 224 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.5 5.3 5.3 5.4 5.2 5.2 5.7 5.6


Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,830 1,850 1,850 1,830 1,840 1,840 1,900 1,890

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,310 1,327 1,322 1,290 1,307 1,302 1,355 1,372

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 970 990 980 1,020 1,040 1,030 960 980

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 910 910 920 860 850 860 990 960

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 650 660 660 640 650 650 670 680

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to8% (kg)

1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800


1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500

291

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

Petrol engine 1.8 TSI 132 kW (180 PS) All-wheel drive




Outputs and weightsLEON ST

X-PERIENCE 4WD

Top speed (km/h) 221 (V&VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 4.9


Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,040

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,486

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,060

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 1,030

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 740

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700


292




213 (290)/5,900-6,400 350/1,700-5,800 4/1,984 Super 98 RON/Super 95 RONa)


Outputs and weights LEONautomatic

LEON SCautomatic

LEON STautomatic

Top speed (km/h) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) a) a) a)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) a) a) a)



Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,050 1,080 1,030

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 910 860 1.020


Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) – – –

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) – – –

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) – – –

a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

293

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data



221 (300)/5,500-6,200 380/1,800-5,500 4/1,984 Super 98 RON/Super 95 RONa)


Outputs and weights LEONmanual

LEONautomatic

LEON SCmanual

LEON SCautomatic

LEON STmanual

LEON STautomatic

LEON STAll-wheel

drive

Top speed (km/h) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) a) a) a) a) a) a) a)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) a) a) a) a) a) a) a)

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,890 1,910 1,870 1,880 1,980 2,000 2,050

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,395 1,421 1,375 1,395 1,440 1,466 1,540

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,020 1,050 1,060 1,080 1,000 1,030 1,050

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 920 910 860 860 1,030 1,020 1,050

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) – – – – – – –

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) – – – – – – –

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) – – – – – – –


294


Petrol/CNG engine 1.4 TSI 81 kW (110 PS)


81 (110)/4,800-6,000 200/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 CNGSuper 95 RON/Nor-

mal 91 RONa)


Outputs and weights LEONmanual

LEONautomatic

LEON STmanual

LEON STautomatic

Top speed (km/h) 194 (V) 194 (VII) 194 (VI) 194 (VII)


Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.9 10.9 11 11



Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 920 950 870 900

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 970 970 1,050 1,050





295

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

Diesel engine 1.6 66 kW (90 PS)


66 (90)/2,750-4,800 230/1,400-2,750 4/1,598Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.

51 CN

Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC LEON ST

Top speed (km/h) 180 (IV) 180 (V) 180 (V)





Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 960 1,020 960

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 870 790 950


Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 630 620 650



296





51 CN


ManualLEON

AutomaticLEON STManual

LEON STAutomatic

Top speed (km/h) 191 (V) 191 (VI) 191 (V) a)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.3 7.3 7.5 a)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.7 10.7 11.1 a)



Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 980 1,000 970 990

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 870 870 960 970






297

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data




51 CN


EcomotiveLEON SC

EcomotiveLEON ST

EcomotiveLEON ST

All-wheel drive

LEON STX-PERIENCE

4WD

Top speed (km/h) 199 (V) 199 (V) 199 (V) 190 (VI) 190 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7 6.9 7.1 7.5 7.2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.5 10.4 10.6 12 11.6

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,790 1,770 1,810 1,990 2,030

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,260 1,240 1,280 1,455 1,472

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 970 1,020 950 990 1,050

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 870 800 910 1,050 1,030

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 630 620 640 720 730



298


Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 81 kW (110 PS)



51 CN

Outputs and weights LEON ST

Top speed (km/h) 189 (V)



Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,910

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,358

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,000

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 960

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 670



299

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data




51 CN


manualLEON


LEON SCautomatic

LEON STmanual

LEON STautomatic

LEON STX-PERIENCE

manual

Top speed (km/h) 197 197 197 197 197 197 193

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) a) a) a) 7.1 a) a) a)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) a) a) a) 10.4 a) a) a)



Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 960 980 1,020 1,040 960 980 1,010

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 900 900 780 780 970 970 930


Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 630 640 620 630 650 660 660

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500


300


Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 105 kW (143 PS)



51 CN

Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC

Top speed (km/h) 211 (V) 211 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.2 6.1


Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,830 1,800

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,301 1,281

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 990 1,050

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 890 800

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 650 640

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,800 1,800


301

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data




51 CN


Start-StopLEON

AutomaticLEON SC

Start-StopLEON SC

AutomaticLEON ST

Start-StopLEON ST

Automatic

LEON STAll-wheel

drive

LEON STX-PERIENCE

4WD

Top speed (km/h) 215 (VI) 213 (VI) 215 (VI) 213 (VI) 215 (VI) 213 (VI) 211 (VI) 208 (VI)



Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,820 1,850 1,810 1,810 1,910 1,940 2,010 2,050

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,305 1,335 1,285 1,305 1,358 1,388 1,474 1,491

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,000 1,030 1,050 1,070 1,000 1,030 1,010 1,070

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 870 870 810 790 960 960 1,050 1,030

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 650 660 640 650 670 690 730 740


1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,900 2,000


1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,700 2,000

302





51 CN

Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC

Top speed (km/h) 220 (VI) 220 (VI)



Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,880 1,860

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,365 1,345

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,020 1,070

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 910 840

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 680 670



303

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data




51 CN

Outputs and weights LEONStart-Stop

LEONAutomatic

LEON SCStart-Stop

LEON SCAutomatic

LEON STStart-Stop

LEON STAutomatic

LEON STX-PERIENCE

4WD

Top speed (km/h) 228 (VI) 226 (VI) 228 (VI) 226 (VI) 228 (VI) 226 (VI) 224 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.7 5.7 5.6 5.6 5.9 5.9 4.9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.5 7.5 7.4 7.4 7.8 7.8 7.1



Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,020 1,040 1,070 1,090 1,010 1,030 1,110

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 910 910 840 850 1,010 1,010 1,020


Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 680 690 670 680 700 710 750


1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 2,000


1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 2,000

304


Dimensions

Fig. 252 Dimensions

LEON LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST X-PERIENCE

A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 861/785 861/785 861/1,052 861/1,060

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,636 2,601 2,636 2,630

D Length (mm) 4,282 4,247 4,549 4,551

E/F Front/reara) track width (mm)1,533/1,5041,549/1,520

1,541/1,5051,549/1,520

G Width (mm) 1,816 1,810 1,816 1,816

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,459 1,446 1,454b) 1,481b)

Turning radius (m) 10.9

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.b) Dimension to the roof bars.

305

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Index

Index

AABS

see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 245Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

function to avoid overtaking on the wrongside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205warning and control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Adaptive Cruise Controldeactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Additional electrical appliances (efficiency pro-gramme) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Adjustingfront head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Adjusting the head restraintsfront head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

AdjustmentCAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 144seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 76activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 78functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Air conditioningClimatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 163heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47user instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Alcantara: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Anchoring

the front tow line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 85Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 85

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 124

vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sys-tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Anti-theft alarm systemtrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242see also Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . 10, 116, 122Anti-tow protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Aspects to take into account before starting the

vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65ASR

see Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Assistance systemsACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 227Pedestrian Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222tyre monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Assistance Systemsfatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Audible signal

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Audible warning signal

seat belt not fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Automatic car washes

switching the Auto Hold function off . . . . . . . . 195Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Automatic gear

safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

backup programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184launch control programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184manual release of selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

307

Index

selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180steering wheel with gearshift paddles . . . . . . 182tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 182

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 262

opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Brake

emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Brakingbrake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176moving off on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

CCamera

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108windscreen washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Capacitynatural gas tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Car-care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39CD-ROM player (navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Central locking

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Changing

parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

rear light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97rear light in the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Changing bulbsfog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Changing gearengaging gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 179

Changing main headlightturn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Changing settingsCAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Changing the main beam headlight bulb

main beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Changing the main headlight bulbday light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95dipped headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Child-proof locking

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Child seat

categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 84

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 83securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 23

City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252carbon parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Easy Connect control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250exhaust pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 250radio display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

308

Index

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Clutch (warning lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Control and warning lamps

diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Controls and displaysgeneral instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Controls on the steering wheeloperating the audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112operating the telephone and audio system . . 113

Convenience closingpanoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Convenience openingpanoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Coolantchecking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Cooling systemchecking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Corneringlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Correct sitting position

front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 195operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195warning and indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

DDangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Data sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . . . 17Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Defective bulbs

changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Detachable ball

assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 237checking attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237placing in standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Dieseldiesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Diesel particulate filtermalfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Direction of rotation

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105Display of traffic signs on the instrument panel

activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Disposalseat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Distance controlsee Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Doorschildproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Downhill speed control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 66, 67, 68Driver information system

CD/radio indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30engine oil temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35operation with the windscreen wiper lever . . . . 30

Drivingdriving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234, 239, 241, 242

Driving abroadheadlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30data summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

EE10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 110Economical

driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

309

Index

EDLsee Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Efficiency programmeadditional electrical appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . 35saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Electrical accessoriessee Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Electrical sockettrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 127convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 128

Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Electronic torque management (XDS) . . . . . . . . . 177Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85automatic gearbox backup programme . . . . . 186bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 60fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61manual unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217see Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Emergency operation

passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Emission control systemcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Engine

assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167starting up (driver messages with the mechan-

ical contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168switching off (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Engine and ignitionautomatic ignition switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . . 171stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 262battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 269brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 267closing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 266engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 265opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . 52, 268

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Engine faultcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 264changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264, 266checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Environmentecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Environmental tipsfilling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 245ESC

electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Exhaust gas purification system

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Exhaust pipe: Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Extending

the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Exterior lighting

changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Exterior mirrors

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

310

Index

Exterior rear view mirrorsexterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

FFastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Four-wheel drive

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Four wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 78Front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 211malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208on-screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210see also Front Assist Monitoring system . . . . . 207

Front Assist monitoring systemmalfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208on-screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Front Assist Monitoring systemCity Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 211radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Front Assist Monitoring Systemswitching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Front passenger front airbagcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 81

Front seatmanual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 258consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Fuel consumptionswitching off using inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . . . 189

Fuel tank capopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Fuel tank flapopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Full-LED Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Function Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Function Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 91

fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

GGear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Gearshift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 182General instrument panel

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

HHandbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Hand brake

See Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Handbrake

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 135Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . . 73Head-protection airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Headlights

changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

311

Index

Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 48Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

IIdentifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 167Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 167

see Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Indications on display

traffic signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198assist systems submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106distance travelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 33driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35MKB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106second speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 180service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106tyre monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 33

Indications on the screenSEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Interior rear vision mirror

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Interior view

left guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 23ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 23

JJack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 85

mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

KKey-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Keyless-Entry

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Keyless-Exit

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Keyless AccessKeyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 120

Keyless Access locking and ignition systemsee Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Keysassign key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117car key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117driver messages (mechanical contact) . . . . . . 168remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 118

Kick-downautomatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Knee airbagssafety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

LLane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

cleaning the camera area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Lane Assist system

see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Launch control programme (automatic gearbox) 184Leather: care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

312

Index

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 131audible signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131dipped beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131lighting of the instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137lighting of the switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Load compartment in the luggage compartmentsee Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 151

Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 151Loading the vehicle

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . 156

Locking and unlockingin the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

automatic lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 138luggage compartment variable floor . . . 159, 160net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 155rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151retractable rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 154unlocking manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12see also Loading the luggage compartment . 151

Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 160Luggage compartment variable floor . . . . 159, 160Luggage net

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

MMain beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Main panel

turn signal and main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . 131Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Malfunction

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208front assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 208gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Manual unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Mobile telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Model plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Moving off

hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

NNatural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257LNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 260smell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Natural leathercleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Navigation systemCD-ROM player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Net bagluggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 155Noises

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174refuelling natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 271

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

OOctane rating (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

313

Index

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51On-screen messages

Front Assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 208One-touch opening and closing

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Open and close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 257panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 257in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10rear lid of the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . 11windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Opening manuallyrear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

PPaint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Paintworkcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Panoramic sliding sunroofclosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 128fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129roll-back function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 183Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Parking Aidadjusting the display and audible warnings . 230automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227sensors and camera: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Parking aid systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173automatic release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Parking distance warning systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Parking (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183ParkPilot

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Particulate filter (diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Passenger

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 66, 67, 68

Passenger door manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Passenger seat backrest

folding down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Pedestrian Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Pedestrian protection

see Pedestrian Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . 212Petrol

additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Plastic parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 250Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Positioning seat belts

during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Power steering

see Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Pre-heating system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Press & Drive

starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Progressive steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Puncture

action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

RRacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 208Radio-operated remote control

see Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

314

Index

Radio display: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

control of the function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Rear

headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Rear Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Rear bulbs in the side panel

disassembling the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 12

see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 126Rear light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Rear lights

changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Rear lights in the rear lid

disassembling the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Rear lights on the side panel

summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Rear seat

folding down and raising the backrest . . . . . . 146Rear seat backrest

folding down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147folding down and lifting the backrest . . . . . . . 147lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Rear seat passengerssee Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 66, 67, 68

Rear shelfstoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 154

Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Rear view mirrors

adjusting the exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . 142

Rear vision mirrorinterior anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Refuellingfuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108gas gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257opening fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Remote control keyunlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Removing and installing head restraints . . . . . . 144Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Replacing the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Reset the trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Retractable rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . 180Rims

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Roll-back function

panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Roof luggage rack

attach the cross bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Running-in

new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Running in

new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

SSafe

driving safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Safelock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

see also Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . 116Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . 17Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Safety information

knee airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Safety instructions

head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 83

Safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Safety notes

seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Saving fuelinertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Saving tips (efficiency programme) . . . . . . . . . . . 36Seat

electric seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Seat belt positionfor pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 74cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 76

315

Index

safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 75SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Seats

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143rear seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Selector lever (automatic gearbox)

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181manual release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Service notification: read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Side airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Sitting position

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Sliding panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Smell of gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 283

four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Special characteristics

tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Speed warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 192

switching off and on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193the engine does not switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . 192the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Steering

electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253engaging the steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Steering wheeladjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16gearshift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . 182setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Storage area

front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149glove compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 139

roll-back function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Switch

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Switching off the engine

with the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Switching off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Switching on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . 24, 167System Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

TTailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . . . 156

Taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Technical datacapacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Tightening torques of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 283Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

lap times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 180, 182Tire Mobility Set

inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Top speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 23Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 23Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89Tow-starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Towing bracket

retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234operation and care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Towline anchorage

rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 85Tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

316

Index

Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217situations in which Traffic Jam Assist must be

switched off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Traffic Sign Detection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Traffic signsindication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 241driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241electrical socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240safety lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Transporting items

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Transporting objectsnet bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . 156

Trim parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Trims

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Turn signal convenience function . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Tyre mobility set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Tyre Mobility Systemsee Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Tyre monitoring systems

tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273with compulsory direction of rotation . . . . . . . . 59with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

UUnfastening the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 74Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Upholstery: cleaningalcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115USB/AUX-IN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

VVanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Vehicle

chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58unlocking and locking the vehicle with Keyless

Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 269

assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 269disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Vehicle carenatural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . 63

Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system 126activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

317

Index

WWarning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 109

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80applying the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 208ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190engine pre-heating/fault system . . . . . . . . . . . 190ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178for seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 42instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Warning symbolssee Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Wheel

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57loosening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271, 283chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 59cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Windows

electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 127removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . . . 87

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 139Windscreen washer water

capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 140window wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys-temsservice position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140lifting the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Winter conditionsbattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269defrosting the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Winter operationheadlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 140salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

XXDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

318

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16

About this manual

This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the vehicle at the time this manual was published. Some of the units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer-tain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the LEON range, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not in-cluded in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the mar-ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The steering indications (left, right, forward, reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-cept when otherwise indicated.

The audiovisual material only is intended to help users to understand certain car function-alities better. It does not replace the instruc-tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-al to obtain more comprehensive information and indications.

The equipment marked with an aster-isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op-tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries.

® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Although the copyright symbol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

>> The section is continued on the follow-ing page.

Important warnings on a given page

Detailed contents on a given page

General information on a given page

Emergency information on a given page

Audiovisual material on a given page

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-mation on safety. They warn you about possi-ble dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION

Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.


Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-vant information concerning environmental protection.

Note

Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-nal information.

This manual is divided into six large parts, which are:

1. The essentials

2. Safety

3. Emergencies

4. Operation

5. Tips

6. Technical data

At the end of this manual, there is a detailed alphabetical index that will help you quickly find the information you require.

SEAT recommendsSEAT GENUINE OIL

SEAT recommendsCastrol EDGE Professional

OWNER’S MANUAL

Leon

5F0012720BG

Ingl

és 5

F001

2720

BG

(11

.16)

Leon

In

glés

(11

.16)

OWNER’S MANUAL - SEAT · OWNER’S MANUAL Leon 5F0012720BG Inglés 5F0012720BG (11.16) Leon...

Documents

Transcript of OWNER’S MANUAL - SEAT · OWNER’S MANUAL Leon 5F0012720BG Inglés 5F0012720BG (11.16) Leon...